Product Documentation Damper Actuators and Accessoriesmidwestbas.com/store/media/pdf/belimo/Belimo_Damper_Actuators... · Product Documentation Damper Actuators and Accessories ...

Product DocumentationDamper Actuators and AccessoriesEffective January 2004

®

Bel

imo

Pro

ject

: E

mpi

re S

tate

Bui

ldin

g N

ew Y

ork,

New

Yor

k

Table of Contents Application Solutions .........................2Features and Benefits .......................3Sizing & Selecting Actuators .............4Control Signal Overview ....................5

ActuatorsAF/AFR Series (133 in-lb spring return).....8NF Series (60 in-lb spring return)............28LF Series (35 in-lb spring return) ............44GM Series (320 in-lb) ..........................68AM Series (160 in-lb) ..........................80SM Series (133 in-lb) ..........................88NM Series (70 in-lb)............................98LM Series (35 in-lb) ..........................112

AccessoriesMechanical Accessories ................126Electronic Accessories ..................150Wiring Guide..................................167

Specifications ..............................190Terms and Conditions.................193Discontinued Products ...............194

Application Solutions ®

K4-2 US Universal clampStandard for all AF, NF and AM series actuators Eases installation – Only two nuts to tighten

Increased flexibility – 1/2” to 1.05” capacityCentered on:1/2”, 3/4” and 1.05” shafts

Reduced cost - No need to purchase separate accessories

Retrofit applications

Replace virtually any Non-Direct coupled actuator with a high quality solution from Belimo.

Solve any application - Widest range of mounting brackets and accessories

Reduce installation cost – By resizing the damper you can select from 7 Belimo seriesof actuator types and torque ranges. 35 to 320 in-lb.

Retrofit of non-direct coupled actuators

Our 0 to 135 ohm input actuators are a cost effective replace-ment for applications where the existing actuators have failedand the controller is still in good working condition.

AF24-MFT95 US - Spring Return, 133 in-lb and

AM24-MFT 95 US - Non-spring return, 160 in-lb

We offer a complete line of mounting accessories for non-direct coupled applications (see pages 134-141)

ZG-108 – replaces Honeywell, Johnson and BarberColman non-direct coupled actuators. (see page 142)

New products

Need a retrofit solution for your existing Staefa Controls SmartII controls?Our retrofit solutions will accept the 0 to 20 V phasecut outputallowing for simple installation without replacing the controller.

AF24-PC US – Spring Return, 133 in-lb (see pages 18-19)

AM24-PC US – Non-spring return, 160 in-lb (see pages 86-87)

Remove for3/4” to 1.05”shafts

ZS-150WeatherShield

ZS-300 NEMA 4XHousing

ZS-260 ExplosionHousing

OTHER HOUSINGS

ZS-100 Weather Shield

ZS-260Explosion ProofHousing

ZG-110MountingBracket

ZG-DC1Damper Clip

ZG-100 UniversalMounting Bracket

ZG-108 UniversalMounting Bracket

KH8 UniversalCrankarm withKG8 Balljoint

ZG-102 Multiple ActuatorMounting Bracket

ZG-DC2Damper Clip

ZG-AF USCrankarmAdaptor Kit

KG-8 90° Ball Joint

KH-AFCrankarm

2

ZG-106/ZG-107Mounting Bracket

AF…NF…

ZG-106

ZG-107ZG-107 ZG-108

9080

7060

50

40

30

20

100

-5

0

R

9080

7060

50

40

30

20

100

-5

0

R

K4(-1) Clamp with ZDB Angle

of Rotation Limiter

IND-2 Position Indicator(optional)

AF…NF…

AF…NF…

AF…NF…

ZG-108

AF…NF…

3

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Why Choose Belimo?A CLOSER LOOK…

Cut labor costs with simple direct coupling.

True mechanical spring return – the most reliable failsafe.

Reverse mount for clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe.

Check damper position easily with clear position indicator.

Overload-proof throughout rotation

Temporary restrictions in damper movement will not change actuator operation. Actuator returns to normal operation when restriction is removed.

Built-in or add on mechanical stops to adjust angle of rotation

By eliminating internal condensation Golden Point breather membraneoptimizes performance in harsh airstream environments. (AF series)

Built-in auxiliary switch is easy to use, offers feedback or signal for additional device. (-S models)

Manual override crank speeds installation(Not available with LF, NF and AFR… series)

Need to change control direction? Do it easily with a simple switch on actuator housing.

Microprocessor-controlled brushless DC motor increases actuator life span and reliability, provides constant running time. (modulating and (-SR) and floating point (-3) actuators)

Rugged housings withstand rough handling in the mechanical room.

3 ft. appliance cable and conduit connector eases installation.

Double insulated – no need for separate safety ground. A Belimoexclusive (on 120/230V models, and all models with built-in aux.switches).

Automatically compensates for damper seal wear, ensuring tight close-off.

Features and Benefits®

LF… SeriesThe “Installers choice” for:

Classroom Unit Ventilators Fan coil units Economizers Airhandlers and Rooftop units Control dampers

Our New LF24-SR-E USIs a 2-10VDC controlled actuator with a built-inMin position potentiometer specifically forEconomizer applications.

Retrofit and Non-Direct coupled linkage solutions

Belimo offers the widest range of mechanicalaccessories for the replacement of competitiveproducts as well as for the unique installation.

Give us a call with your application problem.

Brushless DC motor technology

The latest Belimo product with our Brushless DC motor technology is the 35 in-lb LM… series.

With the increase in product lifespan and qualitythe LM series creates a new level of expectation for actuators installed in VAV applications.

Only ONE moving part!

No brushes to wear out

Position feedback is generated by ASIC

Overload proof; reduces power consumption in end position

Running noise is reduced to absolute minimum

LM… Series actuators with Brushless motors

LM24-3 (-T) US, Floating point or tri-state control, 35 in-lb

LM24-SR-2.0 (-T) US, Proportional 2-10 VDC control, 35 in-lb

©

4

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

®

The “10 questions” method for sizing and selection is recom-mended as the best method for your actuation requirements.Use the ‘Application Data’ column in this chart as a worksheet

to help in the selection process. This data, along with the‘Actuator Product Range’ charts on pages 2 and 3, allow for thebest selection of a Belimo actuator.

Damper with square shape: ft2= h x w /144; (h= high, w= width)

Damper Area (8 ft2) x Rated Torque Loading of Damper (4 in-lb/ft2) = Total in-lb Required (32 in-lb) Belimo LF/LM 35 in-lb

Torque Loading in-lb/ft2

< 1000 FPM FPM FPM

Damper Blade 2 inch water column 1000-2500 2500-3500

Parallel blade/edge seals 7 10.5 14

Opposed blade/edge seals 5 7.5 10

Parallel blade/no edge seals 4 6 8

Opposed blade/no edge seals 3 4.5 6

Round 10 14 20

Sizing and Selecting Actuators

This will impact the proper selection as theseals add resist-ance requiringmore torque.

If this informa-tion is notavailable referto the “typicaldamperrequirements”chart.

Systems above 1,000 FPMrequire additional actuator torque

FAN

FAN

E

OAR

SA

A = MIXING PLENUM∆PT

∆PD

∆PD

∆PD

∆PT

∆PT

A

B

OA

Consider the application. Is the actu-ator/damper exposed to outside air?use spring return.

• Two position

• Floating point

• Modulating

• Sequencing

• “Non-standard”

voltage signals

This will be a critical component to thedamper selection of an actuator.consider the …MFT actuator and theflexibility of it’s application.

Controller

If unknown use a worst case sce-nario, parallel bladewith seals.

L” x W” = Total sqinches/144 = totalsq feet

Typical damper requirements and sizing

SQ

UA

RE

What is the total area of the damper?

Opposed bladeor Parallelblade controlconstruction?

Are thereblade andedge seals onthe damper?

For thedamper inquestion. What does themanufacturerspecify as thetorque rating?

What is the airvelocity, staticpressure ordesign CFM?

Is fail-saferequired?

What is the supplyvoltage to the actuator?• 24 VAC/DC

• 120 VAC

• 230 VAC single phase

What is the controlsignal to theactuator?

Can you directcouple to adamper shaft?

Are thereadditionalaccessoriesrequired?

___________sq. ft.

OpposedBlade

ParallelBlade

YES

NO

___________in-lb/sq. ft.

_______W.G.

_______CFM

_______FPM

YES

NO

24 VAC

120 VAC

230 VAC

On/Off

FloatingPoint

2-10 VDC

0-10 VDC

4-20 mA

PWM____range

YES

NO, seeaccessoriespage

NO

YES, seeaccessoriessection oractuator series fordetails

Opposed Blade w/o seals 3 in-lb/sq feet

Opposed Blade w/ seals 5 in-lb/sq feet

Parallel Blade w/o seals 4 in-lb/sq feet

Parallel Blade w/ seals 7 in-lb/sq feet

Do you need a step down transformer? If replacing an oilimmersed geartrain actuator. Is

the transformer in the defective actua-tor? You may need to purchase one.

Direct cou-pling hasbecome theindustry stan-dard. Someretrofit appli-cations do notallow direct

coupling. Refer to the Belimo MountingMethods guide for application details.

K4-2

KH-AFKH-AF-1

Some applications require the additions ofan auxiliary switch for proof of position. Ora retrofit application may require an addi-tional mounting bracket and linkage kit.You must identify these needs prior toleaving the job site or ordering products.

ApplicationCriteria Data

1

2

3

4

5

ApplicationCriteria Data

6

7

8

9

10SN1SN2

SA…

ZG-AM

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

® Control Signal Overview

Belimo actuators are compatible with many control inputs. Thereare many signals to select from with today’s controllers.

What does ‘on-off’, ‘open-close’, ‘3-point’, ‘tri state’, ‘floating point’,‘proportional modulation’, ‘phase cut’, ‘PWM’ or ‘MFT’ mean?Belimo will help you understand more on this control signal jun-gle with a quick overview:

On-Off or Open-Close: The actuator is able to drive either toits full open position, or to its full closed position. The sameindication is used for Spring return type actuators. However theactuator will drive to its full open position and spring return to itszero position. This can also be reversed.

3-point, tri-state, floating point: The actuator has both clock-wise (CW) and counter-clockwise (CCW) control inputs. Onedrives the actuator to its open, the other to its close position. Ifthere is no signal (Null point) on either input the actuator simplystays in its last position.

Proportional control: The Actuator drives proportional to its con-trol input and modulates through-out its angle of rotation. Thiscontrol type is usually a variation of VDC. Common values are:

0-10 VDC 2-10 VDCIt is common to also have a 0-20 mA output from a controller.This can be very easily converted to 0-10VDC or 2-10 VDC witha 500 ohm resistor.

Pulse Width Modulation (PWM): The actuator drives to aspecified position according to a pulse duration, the “length” ofsignal. The pulse can originate from a dry contact closure or atriac sink or source controller. An example of PWM control.

Time base: 0 to 10 secondsOutput pulse: 5 secondsActuator position: 50%

Phasecut: An actuator drives depending on the power result of aremaining wave. This signal type cuts the amplitude of the waveand the actuator recognizes this signal as a proportional movement.

Belimo developed multifunction Technology (MFT) with forwardthinking. Today our MFT products are used to solve standardcommercial HVAC control applications. Default MFT actuatorsare factory programmed to receive a standard 2-10 VDC controlsignal. In addition you can choose to program the actuator inthe field for other standard VDC, PWM, Floating point and On-Off control.

Default actuator characteristics allow for 2-10 VDC control inputwith a 2-10 VDC position feedback and a runtime of 150 sec-onds. All Belimo actuators can be ordered with these operatingcharacteristics.

Programmable capabilities of MFT:• Control input: selectable, VDC, PWM, Floating point or

On/Off• Motion values: selectable running time torque adjustment• Feedback: selectable feedback values

100%

Vol

tage

80% 50% 20%

time

Airside Products 24 V

AC ±

20%

, VDC

+/-

15%

120

VAC

±10

%23

0 VA

C ±

10%

VA ra

ting

Wat

tage

runn

ing

(hol

ding

)

Mot

or D

rive

(Def

ault)

*(…

MFT

US

adju

stab

le 7

5 to

300

sec

.)

Sprin

g Re

turn

On/O

ffFl

oatin

g Po

int

2-10

VDC

(Def

ault)

4-20

mA*

(w/5

00Ω

resi

stor

)0

to 2

0 v.

pha

secu

t6-

9 VD

C, 2

0 VD

C ou

tput

vol

tage

Hone

ywel

l Ser

ies

90, 0

-135

ΩLO

NTAL

K

On/O

ff*Fl

oatin

g Po

int*

Star

t and

Spa

n ad

j., S

tart

0.5

to

30 V

DC. S

pan

2.5

to 3

2 VD

C*PW

M a

dj.,

0.0

2 to

50.

0 se

cond

s*2-

10 V

DC (D

efau

lt)

VDC

Varia

ble,

Sta

rt 0

to 8

,Sp

an 2

to 1

0 VD

C*

35 in

-lb [4

Nm

], Ap

prox

. 8sq

.ft.

60 in

-lb [7

Nm

], Ap

prox

. 15

sq. f

t.70

in-lb

[8Nm

], Ap

prox

. 18

sq. f

t.13

3 in

-lb [1

5 Nm

], Ap

prox

. 33

sq. f

t.16

0 in

-lb [1

8 Nm

], Ap

prox

. 40

sq. f

t.32

0 in

-lb [3

6Nm

], Ap

prox

. 80

sq. f

t.1

SPDT

, 6A

(1.5

A in

duct

ive)

@25

0 V1

SPDT

, 6A

(2.5

A in

duct

ive)

@24

V2

SPDT

, 7A

(2.5

A in

duct

ive)

@25

0VAd

d-on

See

Page

Num

ber

Power Power Running Control Control Input Position Torque AuxiliarySupply Consumption Time Input Multi-Function Feedback (based on 4 in-lb per sq.ft) Switches

LF24-SR US 5 2.5 (1) 150 <25♦ 44 $ 350.00LF24-SR-E US* 5 2.5 (1) 150 <25♦ 44 $ 380.00LF24-SR-S US 5 2.5 (1) 150 <25♦ 44 $ 400.00LF24-MFT US 5 2.5 (1) 150 <25♦ ‡ $ 400.00LF24-MFT-S US 5 2.5 (1) 150 <25♦ ‡ $ 450.00LF24-MFT-20 US 6 3.5 (1.5) 150 <25♦ ‡ $ 440.00LF24-MFT-S-20 US 6 3.5 (1.5) 150 <25♦ ‡ $ 490.00LF24-3 US 5 2.5 (1) 150 <25♦ 44 $ 310.00LF24-3-S US 5 2.5 (1) 150 <25♦ 44 $ 360.00LFC24-3-R US 5 2.5 (1) 90 <25♦ 44 $ 360.00LFC24-3-S US 5 2.5 (1) 90 <25♦ 44 $ 410.00NF24-SR US 6 3 (1) 150 <60 28 $ 370.00NF24-SR-S US 6 3 (1) 150 <60 28 $ 440.00NF24-MFT US 10 6 (1.8) 150 <60 ‡ $ 450.00NF24-MFT-S US 10 6 (1.8) 150 <60 ‡ $ 520.00AF24-MFT US 10 6 (1.8) 150 <20 ‡ $ 525.00AF24-MFT-S US 10 6 (1.8) 150 <20 ‡ $ 600.00AF24-MFT95 US 10 6 (2) 150 <20 ‡ $ 580.00AF24-SR US 10 6 (2) 150 <20 8 $ 475.00AFR24-SR US 10 6 (2) 150 <20 8 $ 450.00AFR24-3 US 10 6 (2) 150 <20 8 $ 430.00AFR24-3-S US 10 6 (2) 150 <20 8 $ 485.00AF24LON US 10 6 (2) 150 <20 ‡ $ 700.00AF24-PC US* 10 6 (2) 150 <20 8 $ 580.00LM24-3 US 3 2 95 112 $ 150.00LM24-3.1 US 3 2 95 112 $ 140.00LM24-3-T US 3 2 95 112 $ 130.00LM24-3-T.1 US 3 2 95 112 $ 116.00LM24-SR-2.0 US 4 2 95 112 $ 220.00LM24-SR-2.0.1 US 4 2 95 112 $ 210.00LM24-SR-T-2.0 US 4 2 95 112 $ 200.00LM24-SR-T-2.0.1 US 4 2 95 112 $ 190.00LMC24-SR US†(fast running) 4 2.5 25-35 112 $ 230.00

LM24-MFT US 4 2 150 ‡ $ 300.00LM24-MFT.1 US 4 2 150 ‡ $ 290.00NM24 US 3.5 2 75-150 98 $ 170.00NM24-SR US 3.5 1.3 150 98 $ 254.00NM24-MFT US 3.5 1.3 150 ‡ $ 330.00NM24-MFT.1 US 3.5 1.3 150 ‡ $ 320.00NMQ24-MFT US 12 9 (1.2) 5 ‡ $ 400.00AM24 US 4.5 2.5 110-150 80 $ 250.00AM24-SR US 5 2.5 150 80 $ 360.00AM24-MFT US 5 2.5 150 ‡ $ 400.00AM24LON US 5 2.5 150 ‡ $ 550.00AM24-PC US* 5 2.5 150 80 $ 485.00AM24-MFT95 US* 4.2 2 150 ‡ $ 485.00GM24 US 6 3 135 68 $ 350.00GM24-SR US 7 3 135 ♦♦ 68 $ 475.00GM24-MFT US 7 3 150 ‡ $ 540.00GM24LON US 7 3 150 ‡ $ 750.00* Variable † Torque 18 in-lb ♦ <60 sec. @ -22°F [-30°C] ♦♦ The GM24-SR US actuator torque will remain at 266 in-lb.* New products are in bold print ‡ All …MFT actuator details can be found in the Multi-Function documentation

NO

N-S

PR

ING

RE

TU

RN

SP

RIN

G R

ET

UR

N

List Price

Actuator Product RangeModulating actuator application chart

6

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

®

Actuator Product RangeOn-Off actuator application chart

7

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

®

Airside Products 24 V

AC +

/- 20

%, V

DC +

/- 15

%12

0 VA

C +/

- 10%

230

VAC

+/- 1

0%

VA ra

ting

Wat

tage

runn

ing

(hol

ding

)

Mot

or D

rive

Sprin

g Re

turn

On/O

ff

Floa

ting

Poin

t

5 K

Ωre

sist

ive

feed

back

10 K

Ωre

sist

ive

feed

back

Add-

on re

sist

ive

35 in

-lb [4

Nm

], Ap

prx.

8sq

. ft.

60 in

-lb [7

Nm

], Ap

prx.

15

sq. f

t.

70 in

-lb [8

Nm

], Ap

prx.

18

sq. f

t.

133

in-lb

[15

Nm],

Appr

x. 3

3sq

. ft.

160

in-lb

[18

Nm],

Appr

x. 4

0sq

. ft.

320

in-lb

[36

Nm],

Appr

x. 8

0sq

. ft.

1 SP

DT, 6

A (1

.5A

indu

ctiv

e) @

250V

1 SP

DT, 6

A (2

.5A

indu

ctiv

e) @

24V

2 SP

DT, 7

A (2

.5A

indu

ctiv

e) @

250

V

Add-

on

See

Page

Num

ber

Power Power Running Control Torque AuxiliarySupply Consumption Time Input Feedback (based on 4 in-lb per sq.ft) Switches

LF24 US 7 5 (2.5) < 40 to 75 <25♦ 44 $ 250.00LF24-S US 7 5 (2.5) < 40 to 75 <25♦ 44 $ 300.00LF120 US 7.5 5.5 (3.5) < 40 to 75 <25♦ 44 $ 280.00LF120-S US 7.5 5.5 (3.5) < 40 to 75 <25♦ 44 $ 330.00LF230 US 7 5 (3) < 40 to 75 <25♦ 44 $ 310.00LF230-S US 7 5 (3) < 40 to 75 <25♦ 44 $ 360.00NF24 US 8 5 (2.6) <75 <60 28 $ 270.00NF24-S US 8 5 (2.6) <75 <60 28 $ 340.00NF24-S2 US 8 5 (2.6) <75 <60 28 $ 345.00NF120 US 7 6 (3.5) <75 <60 28 $ 310.00NF120-S US 7 6 (3.5) <75 <60 28 $ 380.00NF230 US 7 6 (3.5) <75 <60 28 $ 360.00NF230-S US 7 6 (3.5) <75 <60 28 $ 430.00FSNF24 US 27 18 (6) <15 <15 ∆ $ 350.00FSNF24-S US 27 18 (6) <15 <15 ∆ $ 420.00FSNF120 US 27 18 (6) <15 <15 ∆ $ 400.00FSNF120-S US 27 18 (6) <15 <15 ∆ $ 470.00FSNF230 US 27 18 (6) <15 <15 ∆ $ 412.00FSNF230-S US 27 18 (6) <15 <15 ∆ $ 482.00AF24 US 10 5 (1.5) 150 <20 8 $ 375.00AF24-S US 10 5 (1.5) 150 <20 8 $ 450.00AF120 US 10 6 (2.3) 150 <20 8 $ 425.00AF120-S US 10 6 (2.3) 150 <20 8 $ 500.00AF230 US 11 6.5 (2.5) 150 <20 8 $ 500.00AF230-S US 11 6.5 (2.5) 150 <20 8 $ 570.00AFR24 US 10 5 (1.5) 150 <20 8 $ 350.00AFR24-S US 10 5 (1.5) 150 <20 8 $ 425.00AFR120 US 10 6 (2.3) 150 <20 8 $ 400.00AFR120-S US 10 6 (2.3) 150 <20 8 $ 475.00LM24 US 3 2 80 - 110 112 $ 150.00LM24.1 US 3 2 80 - 110 112 $ 140.00LM24-T US 3 2 80 - 110 112 $ 114.00LM24-T.1 US 3 2 80 - 110 112 $ 100.00LM24-S US 3 2 80 - 110 112 $ 190.00LMC24 US†(fast running) 3 2 25 - 35 112 $ 160.00LM24-10P US 3 2 80 - 110 112 $ 200.00LM24-5PO-T US 3 2 80 - 110 112 $ 170.00LM24-5PO-T-1 US 3 2 80 - 110 112 $ 160.00NM24 US 3.5 2 75 - 150 98 $ 170.00NM24.1 US 3.5 2 75 - 150 98 $ 166.00AM24 US 4.5 2.5 110-150 80 $ 250.00AM24-S US 4.5 2.5 110-150 80 $ 320.00SM24-S US(fast running) 12 9.5 (1.2) 16 - 19 80 $ 320.00GM24 US 6 3 135 68 $ 350.00

Note: AFR… series: No manual override, 1 SPDT auxiliary switch (-S)† Torque 18 in-lb ♦ <60 sec. @ -22°F [-30°C] ∆ All …FSNF actuator details can be found in the Fire and Smoke documentation

NO

N-S

PR

ING

RE

TU

RN

SP

RIN

G R

ET

UR

N

List Price

8

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AF Series Spring Return Direct Coupled Actuator®

Applications

Minimum 133 in-lb torque For damper areas up to 35 sq-ft*

(For lower torque, see NF or LF series)

ZG106 or ZG 107bracket

Mount directly to 1.05” jackshafts.New standard clamp fits standard 1/2”shafts to 1.05” jackshafts.

Linkage solutions are available when direct coupling is notpossible. (See Mounting Methods Guide and MechanicalAccessories Documentation page 132)

Removefor 3/4” to 1.05”shafts

Torque: 133 in-lb

Power supply : 24 VAC/DC

120 VAC

230 VAC

Control signal: on-off

Floating point

2 to 10 VDC

0 to 20 V phasecut

Feedback signal: 2 to 10 VDC

Motor: 150 sec constant

Spring: <20 sec

External direction of rotation switch

Manual override

Appliance rated cable, 18 GA

Built-in auxiliary switch 2 SPDT

1 SPDT

Installation instructions ......(p. 20–26) General wiring ..............(p. 26) Start-up and checkout (p. 27)Electrical operations ..........(p. 25)* 4 in-lb/ft2 damper torque loading. Parallel blade. No edge seals.

AF Series – at a glance AF2

4 U

S (p

. 10)

AF2

4-S

US

(p. 1

0)A

FR24

US

(p. 1

0)A

FR24

-S U

S (p

. 10)

AF1

20 U

S (p

. 12)

AF1

20-S

US

(p. 1

2)A

FR12

0 U

S (p

. 12)

AFR

120-

S U

S (p

.12)

AF2

30 U

S (p

. 12)

AF2

30-S

US

(p. 1

2)A

FR24

-3 U

S (p

. 14)

AFR

24-3

-S U

S (p

. 14)

AF2

4-S

R U

S (p

. 16)

AFR

24-S

R U

S (p

. 16)

AF2

4-P

C U

S (p

. 18)

9

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AF

A CLOSER LOOK…

AF Series Spring Return Direct Coupled Actuator®

LISTED94D5TEMP. IND &REG. EQUIP.

UL



Reverse mount for clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe.


Overload-proof throughout rotation

Temporary restrictions in damper movement will not changeactuator operation. Actuator returns to normal operation whenrestriction is removed. (modulating actuators)

Easy mechanical stop to adjust angle of rotation (add ZDB-AF2 accessory).

By eliminating internal condensation Golden Point breather membrane optimizes performance in harsh airstream environments.

Built-in auxiliary switch is easy to use, offers feedback or signal for additional device. (-S models)

Manual override crank speeds installation(Not available with AFR… series)

Need to change control direction? Do it easily with a simple switch. (modulating actuators)

Microprocessor-controlled brushless DC motor increases actu-ator life span and reliability, provides constant running time. (modulating actuators)

Rugged metal housing withstands rough handling in themechanical room.

3 ft. appliance cable and conduit connectoreases installation.

Double insulated – no need for separate safety ground. A Belimo exclusive. (-S,120V, 230V models)

Automatically compensates for damper seal wear, ensuring tightclose-off.

The Belimo Difference

Customer Commitment.Extensive product range. Competitive project pricing. Application assistance. Same-day shipments. Free technical support. Five year warranty.

Low Installation and Life-Cycle Cost.Easy installation. Accuracy and repeatability. Low power consumption. No maintenance.

Long Service Life.Components tested before assembly. Every product tested before shipment. 20+ years direct coupled actuator design.

©

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AF24 (-S) US, AFR24 (-S) US On-off, spring return safety, 24 V

®

Torque min. 133 in-lb, for control of air dampers

ApplicationFor on-off, fail-safe control of dampers in HVAC systems.Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the dampermanufacturer’s specifications. Control is on-off from an auxil-iary contact, or a manual switch.

The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 1.05”in diameter by means of its universal clamp. A crankarm andseveral mounting brackets are available for applications wherethe actuator cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft.

OperationThe AF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides consistent torqueto the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.

The AF and AFR series provide 95° of rotation and are provid-ed with a graduated position indicator showing -5° to 90°.The AF has a unique manual positioning mechanism whichallows the setting of any damper position within its 95° of rota-tion. The AF and AFR series actuators are shipped in the zeroposition (5° from full fail-safe) to provide automatic compres-sion against damper gaskets for tight shut-off. When power isapplied to the AF series, the manual mechanism is released.When power is applied to the AFR series its “one time use”mechanism is released. The actuators will now try to closeagainst the -5° position during its normal control operations.The manual override can also be released physically by theuse of a crank supplied with the actuator (AF series).

The AF uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by anApplication Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The ASIC moni-tors and controls the actuator’s rotation and provides a digitalrotation sensing function to prevent damage to the actuator ina stall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in itsnormal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.

The AF24-S US version is provided with 2 built in auxiliaryswitches. These SPDT switches are provided for safety inter-facing or signaling, for example, for fan start-up. The switchingfunction at the fail-safe position is fixed at +5°, the other switchfunction is adjustable between +25° to +85°. The AFR… seriesactuators are provided with 1 SPDT switch, adjustablebetween 5° to 85°.

Dimensions (All numbers in brackets are metric.)

1.97"

3.15

" [8

0]

3.86

" [9

8]3.

10"

[78]

2.24

" [5

7]

[50]

1.93

"[4

9]

2.64"[67]

0.26" [6.5]5.85" [148.5]

10.59" [269]

0.35" [9]

0.39" [10]

0.65" [16.5]

0.19" [5]

K4-2 US (supplied)

1/2" Centered (Default)

3/4" Centered (Field Selectable)

1.05" Centered (Field Selectable)

K4-1 US (optional)

3/4" to 1.05" Adjustable

K4 US (optional)

3/8" to 3/4" Adjustable


UL

Technical Data AF24 (-S) US

Power supply 24 VAC ± 20% 50/60 Hz24 VDC ± 10%

Power consumption running: 5 Wholding: 1.5 W

Transformer sizing 10 VA (class 2 power source)

Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cable1/2” conduit connector

Electrical protection auxiliary switches are double insulated

Overload protection electronic throughout -5° to 90° rotation

Angle of rotation 95°, adjustable 30 to 90° w/ ZDB-AF2

Torque 133 in-lb [15 Nm] constant

Direction of rotation spring return can be selected byCW/CCW mounting

Position indication visual indicator, -5° to 90° (-5° isspring return position)

Manual override 3mm hex crank (shipped w/actuator)

Auxiliary switches 2 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listedone set at +5°, one adjustable 25° to 85°

Running time 150 sec. constant, independent ofload, spring return < 20 sec

Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing

Ambient temperature -22°F to +122°F [-30°C to +50°C]

Storage temperature -40°F to +176°F [-40°C to +80°C]

Housing NEMA type 2 / IP54

Housing material zinc coated steel

Agency listings UL 873 listed, CSA C22.2 No. 24 certified

Noise level max. 45 dB (A)

Servicing maintenance free

Quality standard ISO 9001

Weight 6.0 lbs (2.7 kg.)

AFR24 (-S) US (same as above except)

Position indication -5° to 90° position indication

Manual override Not available

Auxiliary switches 1 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listedadjustable 5° to 85°

10

D00

1

©

11

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AF

AF24 (-S) US, AFR24 (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, 24 V

®

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extensionIND-AF2 Damper position indicatorK4 US Universal clamp for 3/8” to 3/4” shaftsK4-1 US Universal clamp for up to 1.05” dia jackshaftsK4-H Universal clamp for hexshafts 3/8” to 5/8”KH-AF Crankarm for up to 3/4” round shaft (Series 2)KH-AF-1 Crankarm for up to 1.05” jackshaft (Series 2)KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF and KH-AF-1Tool-01 10 mm wrenchZDB-AF2 Angle of rotation limiterZG-100 Universal mounting bracketZG-101 Universal mounting bracketZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracketZG-103 Universal mounting bracketZG-104 Universal mounting bracketZG-106 Mounting bracket for Honeywell® Mod IV

replacement or new crankarm type installationsZG-107 Mounting bracket for Honeywell® Mod III or Johnson®

Series 100 replacement or new crankarm typeinstallations

ZG-108 Mounting bracket for Barber Colman® MA 3../4..,Honeywell® Mod III or IV or Johnson® Series 100replacement or new crankarm type installations

ZG-AF US Crankarm adaptor kit for AF/NF ZG-AF108 Crankarm adaptor kit for AF/NF ZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)ZS-260 Explosion-proof housingZS-300 NEMA 4X housing

For an overview of how to apply the accessories see pages 16 - 19. More detailed specifications can be found in ourMechanical Accessories section, page 132. Refer to ourMounting Methods Guide for application details.

Note: When using AF24 US and AF24-S US actuators,only use accessories listed on this page.

Wiring diagrams

AF24 (-S) US, AFR24 (-S) US Typical SpecificationOn-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupledtype which require no crankarm and linkage and be capable ofdirect mounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter. The actu-ators must be designed so that they may be used for eitherclockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation. Actuatorsshall have a manual positioning mechanism accessible on itscover. AFR… will not. Actuators shall use a brushless DCmotor and be protected from overload at all angles of rotation.Run time shall be constant and independent of torque. Ifrequired, 2 SPDT auxiliary switches shall be provided with oneswitch having the capability of being adjustable, AFR… 1adjustable SPDT. Actuators with switches must be constructedto meet the requirement for Double Insulation so an electricalground connection is not required to meet agency listings.Actuators shall be UL listed and CSA certified, have a 5 yearwarranty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001 InternationalQuality Control Standards. Actuators shall be as manufac-tured by Belimo.

2

3

1 Provide overload protection and disconnect as required.

Actuators may be connected in parallel. Power con-sumption must be observed.

Actuator may also be powered by 24 VDC.

2

3

1

4

5

6

Provide overload protection and disconnect as required.



For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., AF24-S US incorporates two built-in auxiliaryswitches: 2 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed,one switch is fixed at +5°, one is adjustable 25° to85°.

AFR24-S US 1 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, ULlisted, 5° to 85°

Meets UL and CSA requirements without the need of anelectrical ground connection.

On-off wiring for AF24 US, AFR24 US On-off wiring for AF24-S US, AFR24-S US

1 Common

2 + Hot

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

AF24 US AFR24 US

Line Volts 3

1 Common

2 + Hot

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

AF24-S US

Line Volts 3

4

6

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

NC

NO

NC

NO

5°

25° to 85°

AFR24-S US

5S1

S2

S3

NC

NO5° to 85°

W00

1

W00

2

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.




OperationThe AF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides consistent torqueto the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.

The AF and AFR series provide 95° of rotation and are provid-ed with a graduated position indicator showing -5° to 90°. TheAF has a unique manual positioning mechanism which allowsthe setting of any damper position within its 95° of rotation.The AF and AFR series actuators are shipped in the zeroposition (5° from full fail-safe) to provide automatic compres-sion against damper gaskets for tight shut-off. When power isapplied to the AF series, the manual mechanism is released.When power is applied to the AFR series its “one time use”mechanism is released. The actuators will now try to closeagainst the -5° position during its normal control operations.The manual override can also be released physically by theuse of a crank supplied with the actuator (AF series).

The AF uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by anApplication Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The ASIC monitorsand controls the actuator’s rotation and provides a digital rotationsensing function to prevent damage to the actuator in a stall con-dition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its normal rota-tion without the need of mechanical end switches. The actuatorsare Double Insulated so a ground connection is not required.

The AF120/230-S US version is provided with 2 built-in auxil-iary switches. These SPDT switches are provided for safetyinterfacing or signaling, for example, for fan start-up. Theswitching function at the fail-safe position is fixed at +5°, theother switch function is adjustable between +25° to +85°. TheAFR… series actuators are provided with 1 SPDT switch,adjustable between 5° to 85°.


AF120 (-S) US, AFR120 (-S) US / AF230 (-S) US On-off, spring return safety, 120 or 230 VAC

1.97"

3.15

" [8

0]

3.86

" [9

8]3.

10"

[78]

2.24

" [5

7]

[50]

1.93

"[4

9]

2.64"[67]

0.26" [6.5]5.85" [148.5]

10.59" [269]

0.35" [9]

0.39" [10]

0.65" [16.5]

0.19" [5]

K4-2 US (supplied)




K4-1 US (optional)


K4 US (optional)



UL

®

Technical Data AF120 (-S) US AF230 (-S) USPower supply 120 VAC ± 10% 230 VAC ±14%

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Power consumption running: 6 W 6.5 Wholding: 2.3 W 2.5 W

Transformer sizing 10 VA 11 VA


Electrical protection actuators are double insulated





Position indication visual indicator, -5° to 90° (-5° isspring return position)


Auxiliary switches 2 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listed

(AF120/230-S) one set at +5°, one adjustable 25° to 85°












AFR120 US (same as above except)


Manual override Not available, when powered theactuator will drive to -5° for damperpre-tensioning

AFR120-S US (same as above except)


Manual override Not available, when powered theactuator will drive to -5° for damperpre-tensioning


12

D00

1

©

13

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AF

AF120 (-S) US, AFR120 (-S) / AF230 (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, 120 or 230 VAC

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extensionIND-AF2 Damper position indicatorK4 US Universal clamp for 3/8” to 3/4” shaftsK4-1 US Universal clamp for up to 1.05” dia jackshaftsKH-AF Crankarm for up to 3/4” round shaft (Series 2)KH-AF-1 Crankarm for up to 1.05” jackshaft (Series 2)KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF and KH-AF-1Tool-01 10 mm wrenchZDB-AF2 Angle of rotation limiterZG-100 Universal mounting bracketZG-101 Universal mounting bracketZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracketZG-103 Universal mounting bracketZG-104 Universal mounting bracketZG-106 Mounting bracket for Honeywell® Mod IV replace-

ment or new crankarm type installationsZG-107 Mounting bracket for Honeywell® Mod III or Johnson®





Note: When using AF120/230 US and AF120/230-S USactuators, only use accessories listed on this page.

AF120 US, AFR120 (-S) US/AF230 US Typical SpecificationOn-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupledtype which require no crankarm and linkage and be capableof direct mounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter. Theactuators must be designed so that they may be used foreither clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation.Actuators shall have a manual positioning mechanism acces-sible on its cover. AFR… will not. Actuators shall use abrushless DC motor and be protected from overload at allangles of rotation. Run time shall be constant and independ-ent of torque. If required, 2 SPDT auxiliary switches shall beprovided with one switch having the capability of beingadjustable, AFR… 1 adjustable SPDT. Actuators must beconstructed to meet the requirement for Double Insulation soan electrical ground connection is not required to meetagency listings. Actuators shall be UL listed and CSA certi-fied, have a 5 year warranty, and be manufactured under ISO9001 International Quality Control Standards. Actuators shallbe as manufactured by Belimo.

Wiring diagrams

2



No ground connection is required.


2

3

1

3




For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup,etc., AF120/230-S US incorporates two built-in auxiliaryswitches: 2 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed,one switch is fixed at +5°, one is adjustable 25° to 85°.

AFR120-S US 1 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, ULlisted, 5° to 85°


®

4

4

5

6

On-off wiring for AF120 US/AF230 US On-off wiring for AF120-S US/AF230-S US

1 Neutral

2 Hot1

2

120 VAC (230 VAC for AF230 US)

AF120 US AFR120 US AF230 US

3

4

L1 N

L2 H

120 VAC (230 VAC for AF230 US)

1 Neutral

2 Hot1

2AF120 US AF230 US

3

4

6

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

NC

NO

NC

NO

5°

25° to 85°

AFR120-S US

5S1

S2

S3

NC

NO5° to 85°

L1 N

L2 H

W00

3

W00

4

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.


ApplicationFor modulating or on-off control of dampers in HVAC systems.Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the dampermanufacturer’s specifications.


Control is floating point from a triac or relay, or on-off from anauxiliary contact from a fan motor contactor, controller, ormanual switch. The AFR24-3-S US is constructed to meetthe requirements for Double Insulated devices. These unitsdo not require a ground connection to meet electrical coderequirements.

OperationThe AFR series actuators provide true spring return operationfor reliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on airtight dampers. The spring return system provides consistenttorque to the damper with, and without, power applied to theactuator.

The AFR series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with agraduated position indicator showing -5° to 90°. The AFRseries actuators are shipped in the zero position (5° from fullfail-safe) to provide automatic compression against dampergaskets for tight shut-off. When power is applied to the AFRseries its “one time use” mechanism is released.

The AFR uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by anApplication Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) and a micro-processor. The microprocessor provides the intelligence to theASIC to provide a constant rotation rate. The ASIC monitorsand controls the brushless DC motor’s rotation and provides adigital rotation sensing function to prevent damage to the actua-tor in a stall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere inits normal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.

The AFR24-3-S version is provided with 1 built-in auxiliaryswitch. This SPDT switch is provided for safety interfacing orsignaling, for example, for fan start-up. The switching functionis adjustable between 5 to 85°.

The AF24-MFT (-S) US actuator with P-30… series configura-tions provides for floating point control, manual override andtwo auxiliary switches (-S). Please see the Multi-FunctionTechnology® documentation 2.5 for more details


AFR24-3 (-S) US On-off, spring return reversible, floating point, 24V

1.97"

3.15

" [8

0]

3.86

" [9

8]3.

10"

[78]

2.24

" [5

7]

[50]

1.93

"[4

9]

2.64"[67]

0.26" [6.5]5.85" [148.5]

10.59" [269]

0.35" [9]

0.39" [10]

0.65" [16.5]

0.19" [5]

K4-2 US (supplied)




K4-1 US (optional)


K4 US (optional)



UL

®

Technical Data AFR24-3 (-S) US


Power consumption running: 6 W ; holding: 2 W





Input impedance 1000 Ω (0.6w) control inputs



Direction of rotation spring: reversible with CW/CCW mounting

motor: reversible with built-in switch

Position indication visual indicator, -5° to 90°


Auxiliary switches 1 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listed(AF24-3-S) adjustable 5° to 85°





Housing NEMA type 2 /IP54

Housing material zinc coated metal






14

D00

2

©

15

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AF

AFR24-3 (-S) US On-off, spring return reversible, floating point, 24V

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extensionIND-AF2 Damper position indicatorK4 US Universal clamp for 3/8” to 3/4” shaftsK4-1 US Universal clamp for up to 1.05” dia jackshaftsK4-H Universal clamp for hexshafts 3/8” to 5/8”KH-AF Crankarm for up to 3/4” round shaft (Series 2)KH-AF-1 Crankarm for up to 1.05” jackshaft (Series 2)KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF and KH-AF-1Tool-01 10 mm wrenchZDB-AF2 Angle of rotation limiterZG-100 Universal mounting bracketZG-101 Universal mounting bracketZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracketZG-103 Universal mounting bracketZG-104 Universal mounting bracketZG-106 Mounting bracket for Honeywell® Mod IV replace-


Series 100 replacement or new crankarm type installationsZG-108 Mounting bracket for Barber Colman® MA 3../4..,

Honeywell® Mod III or IV or Johnson® Series 100replacement or new crankarm type installations



Note: When using AFR24-3 (-S) US actuators, only useaccessories listed on this page.

AFR24-3 US, AFR24-3-S US Typical SpecificationFloating point, on-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled typewhich require no crankarm and linkage and be capable of direct mounting to a jack-shaft up to a 1.05” diameter. The actuators must be designed so that they may beused for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation. Actuators shallhave an external direction of rotation switch to reverse control logic. Actuators shalluse a brushless DC motor and be protected from overload at all angles of rotation.Run time shall be constant and independent of torque. If required, 1 SPDT auxiliaryswitch shall be provided with having the capability of being adjustable, AFR…1adjustable SPDT. Actuators with auxiliary switches must be constructed to meet therequirements for Double Insulation so an electrical ground connection is not requiredto meet agency listings. Actuators shall be UL listed and CSA certified, have a 5year warranty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality ControlStandards. Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

®

1 2324 VAC Transformer

a opena closed

The indication of direction is valid for switch position CW.

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +

AFR24-3 (-S) USCCW CW

a

Line Volts

Line Volts


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +

24 VAC Transformer

AFR24-3 (-S) USCCW CW

CCWCW

stop

a(3)

b(4)

stop stop stop

Installation Side

Direction of Rotation Switch

xxxx

xxxx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xxx

xxxx

xxxx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xxx

CWCCWSwitch

Positions

CCWCW

Wiring Diagrams

On-Off control of AFR24-3 (-S) US

Triac sink

Auxiliary switches of AF24-3-S US

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +

ComHot

Controller

Line Volts

CCW CW

AFR24-3 (-S) US


1

2

24 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +

ComHot

Controller

Line Volts

CCW CW

AFR24-3 (-S) US


1

2

4

5

24 VAC Transformer

Triac sink with separate transformers

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +

ComHot

Controller

Line Volts

CCW CW

AFR24-3 (-S) US


1

2

5

24 VAC Transformer Line Volts


7AFR24-3-S US

6S1

S2

S3

NC

NO5° to 85°

Floating point control of AFR24-3 (-S) US

2

3

4

5

6

7


Actuators may be connected in parallel. Power consumption must be observed.

May also be powered by 24 VDC.

The Common connection from the actuator must be connected to the Hot connectionof the controller.

The actuator Hot must be connected to the control board Common.

For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., AFR24-3-S US incor-porates one built-in auxiliary switch: 1 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed,adjustable 5° to 85°.

Meets UL & CSA requirements without the need of an electrical ground connection.

Notes:

Triac source

W00

5W

006

W00

7

W01

0W

009

W00

8

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.


ApplicationFor proportional modulation of dampers in HVAC systems.Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the dampermanufacturer’s specifications.


The actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10 VDC, with theaddition of a 500Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input from anelectronic controller or positioner. A 2 to 10 VDC feedbacksignal is provided for position indication or master-slave appli-cations.

OperationThe AF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides constant torque tothe damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.

The AF series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with agraduated position indicator showing -5 to 90°. The AF has aunique manual positioning mechanism which allows the set-ting of any damper position within its 95° of rotation. Whenpower is applied to the AFR series its “one time use” mecha-nism is released. The actuator is shipped in the zero position(5° from full fail-safe) to provide automatic compressionagainst damper gaskets for tight shut-off. When power isapplied, the manual mechanism is released and the actuatordrives toward the full fail-safe position. The actuator willmemorize the angle where it stops rotating and use this pointfor its zero position for its normal control operations. Themanual override can also be released physically by the use ofa crank supplied with the actuator.

The AF uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by anApplication Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) and a micro-processor. The microprocessor provides the intelligence to theASIC to provide a constant rotation rate and to know the actu-ator’s exact zero position. The ASIC monitors and controlsthe brushless DC motor’s rotation and provides a digital rota-tion sensing function to prevent damage to the actuator in astall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in itsnormal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.


1.97"

3.15

" [8

0]

3.86

" [9

8]3.

10"

[78]

2.24

" [5

7]

[50]

1.93

"[4

9]

2.64"[67]

0.26" [6.5]5.85" [148.5]

10.59" [269]

0.35" [9]

0.39" [10]

0.65" [16.5]

0.19" [5]

K4-2 US (supplied)




K4-1 US (optional)


K4 US (optional)


AF24-SR US, AFR24-SR US Proportional damper actuator, spring return safety, 24 V for 2 to 10 VDC and 4 to 20 mA control signal. Output signal of 2 to 10 VDC for position indication

Technical Data AF24-SR US


Power consumption running: 6 W ; holding: 2 W



Overload protection electronic throughout 0 to 95° rotation

Operating range Y 2 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA

Input impedance 100 kΩ (0.1 mA), 500ΩFeedback output U 2 to 10 VDC (max. 0.5 mA) for 95°

Angle of rotation mechanically limited to 95°


Direction of rotation spring return reversible with CW/CCW mounting. Control direction selected by switch: CW=CW with decrease in signalCCW=CCW with a decrease in signal

Position indication visual indicator, -5° to 90° (-5° is springreturn position)


Running time 150 sec. constant, independent of load,spring return < 20 sec











AFR24-SR US (same as above except)

Position indication -5° to 95°



UL

®

16

D00

1

©

17

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AF

AF24-SR US, AFR24-SR US Proportional damper actuator, spring return safety, 24 V for 2 to 10 VDC and

4 to 20 mA control signal. Output signal of 2 to 10 VDC for position indication

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extensionIND-AF2 Damper position indicatorK4 US Universal clamp for 3/8” to 3/4” shaftsK4-1 US Universal clamp for up to 1.05” dia jackshaftsK4-H Universal clamp for hexshafts 3/8” to 5/8”KH-AF Crankarm for up to 3/4” round shaft (Series 2)KH-AF-1 Crankarm for up to 1.05” jackshaft (Series 2)KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF and KH-AF-1Tool-01 10 mm wrenchSGA24 Min. and/or man. positioner in NEMA 4 housingSGF24 Min. and/or man. positioner for flush panel mountingZG-R01 500Ω resistor for 0 to 20 mA control signalZDB-AF2 Angle of rotation limiterZG-100 Universal mounting bracketZG-101 Universal mounting bracketZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracketZG-103 Universal mounting bracketZG-104 Universal mounting bracketZG-106 Mounting bracket for Honeywell® Mod IV replace-


Series 100 replacement or new crankarm type installations


ZG-AF US Crankarm adaptor kit for AF/NF ZG-AF108 Crankarm adaptor kit for AF/NF

ZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)ZS-260 Explosion-proof housingZS-300 NEMA 4X housing


Note: When using AFR24-SR US actuators, only useaccessories listed on this page.

Wiring diagrams

2


Actuators may be connected in parallel. Power con-sumption and input impedance must be observed.

Actuator may also be powered by 24 VDC.3

2




The ZG-R01 500Ω resistor converts the 4 to 20 mAcontrol signal to 2 to 10 VDC. Only connect common to neg. (—) leg of control circuits

4

5

3

®

AF(R)24-SR US Typical Specification Spring return control damper actuators shall be direct coupled typewhich require no crankarm and linkage and be capable of directmounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter. The actuator mustprovide proportional damper control in response to a 2 to 10 VDC or,with the addition of a 500Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input froman electronic controller or positioner. The actuators must bedesigned so that they may be used for either clockwise or counter-clockwise fail-safe operation. Actuators shall have control direction ofrotation switch accessible on its cover. Actuators shall use a brushlessDC motor controlled by a microprocessor and be protected from over-load at all angles of rotation. Run time shall be constant, and inde-pendent of torque. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal shall be providedfor position feedback or master-slave applications. Actuators shall beUL listed and CSA certified, have a 5 year warranty, and be manufac-tured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control Standards.Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

Control Signal (+)2 to 10 VDC

(–)

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y Input, 0 to 10V

5 U Output 2 to 10V

1

2

3

24 VAC Transformer

AFR24-SR USAF24-SR US

Line Volts

W01

1

W19

7

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y Input, 0 to 10V

5 U Output 2 to 10V


5

3

2

4Control Signal (+)

4 to 20 mA (–)

Feedback Signal (+)2 to 10 VDC (–)

Ω500Ω

Line Volts

AFR24-SR USAF24-SR US

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.




The actuator operates in response to a 0-10 V phasecut con-trol input from an electronic controller or positioner. A 2 to 10VDC feedback signal is provided for position indication ormaster-slave applications.

OperationThe AF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides constant torque tothe damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.

The AF series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with agraduated position indicator showing -5 to 90°. The AF has aunique manual positioning mechanism which allows the set-ting of any damper position within its 95° of rotation. Whenpower is applied to the AFR series its “one time use” mecha-nism is released. The actuator is shipped in the zero position(5° from full fail-safe) to provide automatic compressionagainst damper gaskets for tight shut-off. When power isapplied, the manual mechanism is released and the actuatordrives toward the full fail-safe position. The actuator willmemorize the angle where it stops rotating and use this pointfor its zero position for its normal control operations. Themanual override can also be released physically by the use ofa crank supplied with the actuator.

The AF uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by anApplication Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) and a micro-processor. The microprocessor provides the intelligence to theASIC to provide a constant rotation rate and to know the actu-ator’s exact zero position. The ASIC monitors and controlsthe brushless DC motor’s rotation and provides a digital rota-tion sensing function to prevent damage to the actuator in astall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in itsnormal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.


1.97"

3.15

" [8

0]

3.86

" [9

8]3.

10"

[78]

2.24

" [5

7]

[50]

1.93

"[4

9]

2.64"[67]

0.26" [6.5]5.85" [148.5]

10.59" [269]

0.35" [9]

0.39" [10]

0.65" [16.5]

0.19" [5]

K4-2 US (supplied)




K4-1 US (optional)


K4 US (optional)


AF24-PC US Proportional damper actuator, spring return safety, 24 V for 0 to 20 V phasecut control signal. Output signal of 2 to 10 VDC for position indication

Technical Data AF24-PC US


Power consumption running: 6 W ; holding: 2.5 W




Operating range Y 0 to 10 V phasecut

Input impedance 8 kΩ (0.1 mA), 50mW

Feedback output U 2 to 10 VDC (max. 0.5 mA) for 95°




Position indication visual indicator, -5° to 90° (-5° is springreturn position)


Running time 150 sec. constant, independent of load,spring return < 20 sec












UL

®

D00

1

©

18

19

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AF

AF24-PC US Proportional damper actuator, spring return safety, 24 V for 0 to 20 V phasecut control signal.

Output signal of 2 to 10 VDC for position indication

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extensionIND-AF2 Damper position indicatorK4 US Universal clamp for 3/8” to 3/4” shaftsK4-1 US Universal clamp for up to 1.05” dia jackshaftsK4-H Universal clamp for hexshafts 3/8” to 5/8”KH-AF Crankarm for up to 3/4” round shaft (Series 2)KH-AF-1 Crankarm for up to 1.05” jackshaft (Series 2)KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF and KH-AF-1Tool-01 10 mm wrenchSGA24 Min. and/or man. positioner in NEMA 4 housingSGF24 Min. and/or man. positioner for flush panel mountingZG-R01 500Ω resistor for 0 to 20 mA control signalZDB-AF2 Angle of rotation limiterZG-100 Universal mounting bracketZG-101 Universal mounting bracketZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracketZG-103 Universal mounting bracketZG-104 Universal mounting bracketZG-106 Mounting bracket for Honeywell® Mod IV replace-




ZG-AF US Crankarm adaptor kit for AF/NF ZG-AF108 Crankarm adaptor kit for AF/NF

ZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)ZS-260 Explosion-proof housingZS-300 NEMA 4X housing


Note: When using AFR24-SR US actuators, only useaccessories listed on this page.

Wiring diagrams

2




®

AF24-PC US Typical Specification Spring return control damper actuators shall be direct coupled typewhich require no crankarm and linkage and be capable of directmounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter. The actuator mustprovide proportional damper control in response to a 0 to 20 Vphasecut control output from an electronic controller or positioner.The actuators must be designed so that they may be used for eitherclockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation. Actuators shallhave control direction of rotation switch accessible on its cover.Actuators shall use a brushless DC motor controlled by a micro-processor and be protected from overload at all angles of rotation.Run time shall be constant, and independent of torque. A 2 to 10VDC feedback signal shall be provided for position feedback ormaster-slave applications. Actuators shall be UL listed and CSAcertified, have a 5 year warranty, and be manufactured under ISO9001 International Quality Control Standards. Actuators shall be asmanufactured by Belimo.


(–)

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y Input, 0 to 20V Phasecut

5 U Output 2 to 10V

1

2

3

24 VAC Transformer

AF24-PC US

Line Volts

W18

4

0 to 20 V phasecut control of AF24-PC US

20

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Installation InstructionsQuick-Mount Visual Instructions for Mechanical Installation

IND-AF2 Position Indicator(optional)


QUICK-MOUNT VISUAL INSTRUCTIONS

1. Rotate the damper to its fail-safe position. If the shaftrotates counterclockwise, mount the “CCW” side of the actu-ator out. If it rotates clockwise, mount the actuator with the“CW” side out.

2. If the universal clamp is not on the correct side of the actua-tor, move it to the correct side.

3. Slide the actuator onto the shaft and tighten the nuts on theV-bolt with a 10mm wrench to 6-8 ft-lb of torque.

4. Slide the anti-rotation strap under the actuator so that itengages the slot at the base of the actuator. Secure thestrap to the duct work with #8 self-tapping screws.

NOTE: Read the “Standard Mounting” instructions, on the nextpage, for more detailed information.

min. 3 1/2"

[90] min. 3/4"

[20]

®

Removefor 3/4” to 1.05”shafts


21

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AF

Installation InstructionsMechanical Installation

Standard Mounting

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

02

34 6 8 10

5 7 9

Dam

per A

rea

(sq.

ft.)

Torque Loading (in-lb/ sq. ft.)

Torque LoadingChart

Mechanical Operation

The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 1.05” in diameter by means of its universal clamp. A crankarm and sever-al mounting brackets are available for applications where the actuator cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft. The AF seriesactuators provide true spring return operation for reliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tight dampers. The springreturn system provides constant torque to the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator. The AF…-S versions areprovided with 2 built-in auxiliary switches. These SPDT switches are provided for safety interfacing or signaling, for example, for fanstart-up. The switching function at the fail-safe position is fixed at +5°, the other switch function is adjustable between +25 to +85°.The AFR… series are provided with 1 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listed adjustable switch, 5° to 85°.

Automatic Airtight Dampers/Manual Override

The AF series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with a graduated position indicator showing -5 to 90°. The AF has a uniquemanual positioning mechanism which allows the setting of any damper position within its 95° of rotation. A pre-tensioned springautomatically tightens damper when power is applied to the actuator, compensating for damper seal deterioration. The actuator isshipped in the 0 position (5° from full fail-safe) to provide automatic compression against damper gaskets for tight shut-off. Whenpower is applied, the manual mechanism is released and the actuator drives toward the full fail-safe position. While the AFR…series actuators do not have a manual override they do provide the -5° pre-tensioning feature.

Note:The AF…series actuator is shipped with the manualoverride adjusted for a 0° position at the universal clamp (notat full fail-safe, -5° ). This allows for automatic compression ofdamper blade seals when the actuator is in use, providingtight shut-off. This assumes that the damper is to have tightshut-off at the fail-safe position. If tight close-off is desired atthe opposite direction from fail-safe, the manual overrideshould be released so the actuator can go to the full fail-safeposition. See the manual override instructions.

1. Manually move the damper to the fail-safe position (usuallyclosed). If the shaft rotated counterclockwise ( ), thisis a CCW installation. If the shaft rotated clockwise ( ),this is a CW installation. In a CCW installation, the actuatorside marked “CCW” faces out, while in a CW installation,the side marked “CW” faces out. All other steps are identi-cal.

2. The actuator is usually shipped with the universal clampmounted to the “CCW” side of the actuator. To test for

Determining Torque Loading and Actuator Sizing

Damper torque loadings, used in selecting the correct size actua-tor, should be provided by the damper manufacturer. If thisinformation is not available, the following general selectionguidelines can be used.

Damper Type Torque Loading

Opposed blade, without edge seals, 3 in-lb/sq. ft.for non-tight close-off applications

Parallel blade, without edge seals, 4 in-lb/sq. ft.for non-tight close-off applications

Opposed blade, with edge seals, 5 in-lb/sq. ft.for tight close-off applications

Parallel blade, with edge seals, 7 in-lb/sq. ft.for tight close-off applications

The above torque loadings will work for most applications under2 in. w.g. static pressure or 1000 FPM face velocity. For appli-cations between this criteria and 3 in. w.g. or 2500 FPM, thetorque loading should be increased by a multiplier of 1.5. If theapplication calls for higher criteria up to 4 in. w.g. or 3000 FPM,use a multiplier of 2.0.

General Information

Belimo actuators should be mounted indoors in a dry, relatively clean environment free from corrosive fumes. If the actuator is tobe mounted outdoors, a protective enclosure must be used to shield the actuator. For new construction work, order dampers with extended shafts. Instruct the installing contractor to allow space for mounting and serv-ice of the Belimo actuator on the shaft. The damper shaft must extend at least 3 1/2" from the duct. If the shaft extends less than 3 1/2"or if an obstruction blocks access, the shaft can be extended with the AV 10-18 shaft extension or the actuator may be mounted in itsshort shaft configuration.

®

22

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.


adequate shaft length, slide the actuator over the shaftwith the side marked “CCW” (or the “CW” side if this is theside with the clamp). If the shaft extends at least 1/8”through the clamp, mount the actuator as follows. If not,go to the Short Shaft Installation section.

Fig. A Universal Clamp and IND-AF2 Pointer (optional)positions indicating fail-safe and pre-load settings

3. If the clamp is not on the correct side as determined in step#1, re-mount the clamp as follows. If it is on the correctside, proceed to step #5. Look at the universal clamp. Ifyou are mounting the actuator with the “CCW” side out,position the clamp so that the pointer section of the tab ispointing to 0° (see Fig. C) and the spline pattern of theclamp mates with spline of the actuator. Slip the clampover the spline. (Use the same procedure if the “CW” side isout.) If your application requires a mechanical minimumposition, read the Rotation Limiting, Mechanical MinimumDamper Position section.

4. Lock the clamp to the actuator using the retaining clip. 5. Verify that the damper is still in its full fail-safe position.6. Slide the actuator over the shaft.7. Position the actuator in the desired location.8. Tighten the two nuts on the clamp using a 10mm wrench

or socket using 6-8 ft-lb of torque.9. Slip the stud of the anti rotation strap into the slot at the

base of the actuator. The stud should be positionedapproximately 1/16 of an inch from the closed end of theslot. Bend the strap as needed to reach the duct. Attachthe strap to the duct with #8 self tapping screws.

Short Shaft InstallationIf the shaft extends at least 3/4” from the duct, follow thesesteps:1. Determine the best orientation for the universal clamp on

the back of the actuator. The best location would be whereyou have the easiest access to the V bolt nuts on theclamp.

2. Engage the clamp to the actuator as close as possible tothe determined location.

3. Lock the clamp in place using the remaining retainer clip.4. Verify that the damper is still in its full fail-safe position.5. Slide the actuator over the shaft.6. Position the actuator in the desired location.7. Tighten the two nuts on the clamp using a 10mm wrench

or socket using 6-8 ft-lb of torque.8. Slip the stud of the anti-rotation strap into the slot at the

base of the actuator. The stud should be positionedapproximately 1/16 of an inch from the closed end of theslot. Bend the strap as needed to reach the duct. Attachthe strap to the duct with #8 self tapping screws.

9. If damper position indication is required, use the optionalIND-AF2 pointer. See Fig. A.

Jackshaft InstallationThe AF… series actuator is designed for use with jackshaftsup to 1.05” in diameter. In most applications, the AF actuatormay be mounted in the same manner as a standard dampershaft application. If more torque is required than one AF actu-ator can provide, a second AF actuator may be mounted tothe jackshaft using the ZG-102 multiple actuator mountingbracket. See wiring guide for wiring details.

Correct pointer mountingposition when actuator isat 5° preload.

4030

20

10

0-5

40

30

20

100

-5

Correct pointer mountingposition if actuator is atfull fail-safe.

40

30

20

100

-5

4030

20

10

0-5

Correct clamp mountingposition when actuator isshipped from factory(with 5° preload)

30

20

10

0-5

30

20

100

CW

Correct clamp mountingposition if actuator is atfull fail-safe.

30

20

10

0-5

30

20

100

-5

CCW

CWCCW

CWCCW

CWCCW

®

Mounting:If the actuators are mounted onthe opposed ends of the shaft,the actuator direction must beselected carefully. Usually, thedirection of rotation is reversed.

AF actuators which may beused on one shaft:

MaxQuantity

Model Per Shaft

AF24 (-S) USAFR24 (-S) USAF120 (-S) US 4AFR120 (-S) USAF230 (-S) US

AF24-SR US 4AFR24-SR US 4

AFR24-3 (-S) US 4

23

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AF


Multiple Actuator MountingIf more torque is required than one AF actuator can provide, asecond AF actuator may be mounted to the shaft using theZG-102 multiple mounting bracket. Notes:The manual positioning mechanism cannot be used in

multiple actuator applications.

Special Wiring and Additional Information: See wiring guide

Rotation LimitationThe angle of rotation limiter, ZDB-AF2, is used in conjunctionwith the tab on the universal clamp or IND-AF2 position indicatorwhich comes with the ZDB-AF2. In order to function properly,the clamp or indicator must be mounted correctly. See Fig. A.

The ZDB-AF2 may not work in certain mounting orientationsusing the ZG-106 or ZG-107 mounting brackets. It will not workwith the ZG-108 mounting bracket. Limiting the damper rotationmust be accomplished by adjusting the crankarm linkage.

The ZDB-AF2 may be used in 2 ways to control the rotationaloutput of the AF series actuator. One use is in the applicationwhere a damper has a designed rotation less than 90°. Anexample would be a 45° or 60° rotating damper. The otherapplication would be to set a minimum damper position whichcan be easily set or changed without having to remove theactuator from the damper.

Damper rotation limiting1. Determine the amount of damper rotation required.2. Locate the Angle of Rotation Limiter (ZDB-AF2) on the

actuator so that its edge lines up with the degree grad-uation on the actuator face which corresponds with therequired rotation. See Fig. C.

3. Find the appropriate cross-hair location through theslot of the limiter. This is the screw mounting location.

4. Pierce through the label material to allow easy fasten-ing of the retaining screw.

5. Position the limiter back to the desired position, mak-ing sure the locating “teeth” on the limiter are engagedinto the locating holes on the actuator.

6. Fasten the limiter to the actuator using the self tappingscrew provided.

7. Test the damper rotation either manually with the man-ual crank or apply power and if required, a control sig-nal. Re-adjust if necessary.

Mechanical minimum damper positionIn order to use this procedure, the actuator must be mount-ed for short shaft mounting. See pages 8 & 10.1. Position the damper to its minimum position by using

the manual crank or by providing the appropriate con-trol signal to the AF24… modulating type actuator.

2. Place the indicator on to the actuator spline in theapproximate position shown in Fig. D. Fasten it withthe retaining clip. Note that the mounting orientation isdifferent than the mounting used for Damper RotationLimiting.

3. Place the ZDB-AF2 rotation limiter on the actuator sothat it either makes contact with, or is as close as pos-sible to, the edge of the indicator. See Fig. E. Makesure that the locating teeth are engaged into the locat-ing holes on the actuator. If all of the mounting teethdo not align with the holes, the mounting location ofthe indicator to the spline may have to be moved. Thelimiter would then be remounted to get the best posi-tion match of both parts.

4. Find the cross-hair location through the slot of the lim-iter. This is the screw mounting location.



7. Test the damper operation either manually with themanual crank or apply power and if required, a controlsignal. Re-adjust if necessary.

®

20

3040

Screw secured atthese cross hairs

20

3040

Secure angle-of-rotation limiter

Screw

Philips screwdriver

20

3040

Angle of rotation is now set at 40°.

Fig. C ZDB-AF2 Securing the Angle of Rotation Limiter

9080

7060

50

40

30

20

100

-5

908070

6050

4030

20

10

0-5

CWCCW

9080

7060

50

40

30

20

100

-5

908070

6050

4030

20

10

0-5

908 90

CWCCW

Fig. D

Fig. E

24

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Installation Instructions ®

This method should not be used for outside air damper appli-cations. The damper will never go to the full close-off position.This may cause coils to freeze or other system problems. TheAF24-SR (-S) US wired to either the SGA24 or SGF24 can beused for minimum position setting and still provide full close-off.

Manual overrideThe AF series actuators can be manually positioned to easeinstallation or for emergency positioning.

1. The manual override will only work if no power is availableto the actuator.

2. Insert the manual crank (shipped with the actuator) intothe hexagon hole located on either side of the actuator. Anillustration, located on the label, shows the location.

3. Turn the crank in the direction shown on the label (clock-wise on the “CW” side, counterclockwise on the “CCW”side). It will take approximately 19 revolutions to rotatethe full 95° of rotation.

4. To lock the actuator in the required position, rotate thecrank quickly in the opposite direction, 1/2 of a revolution. The“lock closed” icon on the label shows the correct direction.

5. The manual override may be disengaged in 2 ways. - Rotate the crank about a 1/4 revolution in the same

direction as the initial winding. The “lock open” iconshows the correct direction.

- Apply power to wire 1 and 2. The actuator will automati-cally disengage the override function and will go to the“on” position in the case of the on-off versions. Or, in thecase of the proportional versions, go to the 0 signal posi-tion and then go to the position corresponding to thecontrol signal. The actuator will now work normally.

Testing the installation without power The actuator/damper installation may be tested without powerat the actuator. Refer to the manual positioning section of theinstructions. Move the damper to its full non-fail-safe positionusing the manual crank. Disengage the manual positionmechanism and have the damper go to full fail-safe position.Correct any mechanical problems and retest.

Auxiliary SwitchesThe AF series actuators may be ordered with 2 built-in SPDTauxiliary switches used for safety interfacing or signalling, forexample, for fan start-up. The switch position near the fail-safeposition is fixed at 5°. The other is adjustable between 25 and85° of rotation. The crank, supplied with the actuator, or a 3mm

allen wrench is used to adjust the switching position. AFR…series 1 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listed adjustable 5° to 85°

Switch Rating

Voltage Resistive Load Inductive Load

120 VAC 7A 5A

250 VAC 7A 2.5A

Two methods may be used to adjust the switching point of theadjustable switch.

Method 1 - See Fig. F1 The actuator must be in its fail-safe position.2. Insert the crank into the hexagon shaped hole located in

the center of the adjustable switch pointer.3. Rotate the crank until the switch pointer is at the desired

switch point in degrees as shown.

Method 2 - See Fig. G1. Position the damper to the point at which you want the

switch to activate. This may be done by using the manualoverride or by providing the appropriate proportional sig-nal to AF24… modulating type actuator. The position ofthe switch pointer is not important during this step.

2. Insert the crank into the hexagon shaped hole located inthe center of the adjustable switch pointer.

3. Rotate the switch pointer to just past the switch point indi-cating arrow as shown.

30 4050

607080

25…85°

Factory setting 85°

30 4050

607080

25…85°

Rotate withcrank handle

30 4050

607080

25…85°

60° set

Crank Handle

30 4050

607080

25…85°

Actuatorafter locking

30 4050

607080

25…85°

Switch operates

30 4050

607080

25…85°

Switch doesnot operate

Crank Handle

Fig. F

Fig. G

Winding the damper actuator

- insert crank handle- turn handle in direc-

tion of arrow

Locking the damper actuator

- rotate crank handle1/2 turn in the direc-tion shown by the“locked” icon.

Unlocking the damper actuator

(2 options)- rotate crank handle

1/4 turn in the directionshown by the“unlocked” icon.

- remote control by sup-plying power to theunit for > than 3 sec.

(Not provided with AFR…series)

Factory setting 85°Rotate withcrank handle 45° set

5…85°

10 2030

4050

607080

5…85°

10 2030

4050

607080

5…85°

10 2030

4050

607080

Crank Handle

Fig. D

AF…series

AFR…series

25

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AF

Installation InstructionsNon-direct mounting methods and electrical operation

®

General The AF series actuators utilize brushless DC motor technolo-gy. The AF uses this motor in conjunction with an ApplicationSpecific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). In the On-Off versions ofthe AF, the ASIC monitors and controls the actuator’s rotationand a digital rotation sensing function to prevent damage tothe actuator. The AF24… modulating type actuators incorpo-rate a built in microprocessor. The microprocessor providesthe intelligence to the ASIC to provide a constant rotation rateand knows the actuator’s exact zero position.

Brushless DC motor operation Belimo’s brushless DC motor spins by reversing the poles ofstationary electromagnets housed inside of a rotating perma-nent magnet. The electromagnetic poles are switched by aspecial ASIC circuit developed by Belimo. Unlike the conven-tional DC motor, there are no brushes to wear or commutatorsto foul.

Overload protection The AF series actuators are protected from overload at allangles of rotation. The ASIC circuit constantly monitors the

rotation of the DC motor inside the actuator and stops thepulses to the motor when it senses a stall condition. The DCmotor remains energized and produces full rated torque to theload. This helps ensure that dampers are fully closed and thatedge and blade seals are always properly compressed.

The AF… actuators are protected against overload by digitaltechnology located in the ASIC. The ASIC circuitry constantlymonitors the rotation of the brushless DC motor inside theactuator and stops the pulsing to the motor when it senses astall condition. The motor remains energized and producesfull rated torque during stall conditions.

Motor position detection Belimo brushless DC motors eliminate the need for poten-tiometers for positioning in modulating type actuators. Insidethe motor are three “Hall Effect” sensors. These sensorsdetect the spinning rotor and send pulses to the microproces-sor which counts the pulses and calculates the position towithin 1/3 of a revolution of the motor.

Electrical Operation

Crankarm for AF Series Actuators

KH-AF Non-direct mounting with ZG-108 mounting bracket

KH-AF crankarm including retaining ring. Caution: theretaining clip supplied with the clamp is not used to mount theKH-AF crankarm.

Multiple dampers direct coupled to one actuator with link-age to operate the other damper.

The KH-AF (-1) crankarm is used in non-direct coupledmounting applications. The KH-AF (-1) may also be used tosimultaneously direct couple to a damper shaft and provide anadditional crank arm connection to a second damper. TheKH-AFV V-bolt kit must be used for this non-direct application(see illustration below).

Two sizes are available:KH-AF For round shafts up to 3/4” or square shafts up to 5/8”KH-AF-1For jackshafts up to 1.05”

KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF(-1) crankarm

Note: KH-AF (-1) crankarms cannot be used on AF Series 1 actuators.

KH-AF (-1)crankarmwith KH-AFVV-bolt kit

KH-8crankarm

26

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Installation InstructionsGeneral Wiring

General Wiring Instructions

WARNING The wiring technician must be trained and experi-enced with electronic circuits. Disconnect power supplybefore attempting any wiring connections or changes. Makeall connections in accordance with wiring diagrams and followall applicable local and national codes. Provide disconnectand overload protection as required. Use copper, twisted pair,conductors only. If using electrical conduit, the attachment tothe actuator must be made with flexible conduit.

Always read the controller manufacturer's installation lit-erature carefully before making any connections. Followall instructions in this literature. If you have any questions,contact the controller manufacturer and/or Belimo.

Transformer(s)The AF24 . . actuators require a 24 VAC class 2 transformerand draws a maximum of 10 VA per actuator. The actuatorenclosure cannot be opened in the field, there are no parts orcomponents to be replaced or repaired.

– EMC directive: 89/336/EEC– Software class A: Mode of operation type 1– Low voltage directive: 73/23/EEC

CAUTION: It is good practice to power electronic or digitalcontrollers from a separate power transformer than that usedfor actuators or other end devices. The power supply designin our actuators and other end devices use half wave rectifica-tion. Some controllers use full wave rectification. When thesetwo different types of power supplies are connected to thesame power transformer and the DC commons are connectedtogether, a short circuit is created across one of the diodes inthe full wave power supply, damaging the controller. Only usea single power transformer to power the controller and actua-tor if you know the controller power supply uses half wave rec-tification.

Multiple actuators, one transformer Multiple actuators may be powered from one transformer provid-ed the following rules are followed:1. The TOTAL current draw of the actuators (VA rating) is

less than or equal to the rating of the transformer.2. Polarity on the secondary of the transformer is strictly fol-

lowed. This means that all No. 1 wires from all actuatorsare connected to the common leg on the transformer andall No. 2 wires from all actuators are connected to thehotleg. Mixing wire No. 1 & 2 on one leg of the trans-former will result in erratic operation or failure of the actua-tor and/or controls.

Multiple actuators, multiple transformersMultiple actuators positioned by the same control signal maybe powered from multiple transformers provided the followingrules are followed:1. The transformers are properly sized.2. All No. 1 wires from all actuators are tied together and tied

to the negative leg of the control signal. See wiring dia-gram.

Wire length for AF… actuatorsKeep power wire runs below the lengths listed in the Fig. H. Ifmore than one actuator is powered from the same wire run,divide the allowable wire length by the number of actuators todetermine the maximum run to any single actuator. Example: 3 actuators, 16 Ga wire

350 Ft ÷ 3 Actuators = 117 Ft. Maximum wire run

Maximum wire length:

Wire Size Max. Feet. Wire Size Max. Feet12 Ga 900 Ft. 18 Ga 225 Ft.14 Ga 550 Ft. 20 Ga 125 Ft. 16 Ga 350 Ft. 22 Ga 60 Ft.

Fig. H

Wire Type and Wire Installation TipsFor most installations, 18 or 16 Ga. cable works well with theAF24. . actuators. Use code-approved wire nuts, terminalstrips or solderless connectors where wires are joined. It isgood practice to run control wires unspliced from the actuatorto the controller. If splices are unavoidable, make sure thesplice can be reached for possible maintenance. Tape and/orwire-tie the splice to reduce the possibility of the splice beinginadvertently pulled apart.

The AF24… proportional actuators have a digital circuit that isdesigned to ignore most unwanted input signals (pickup). Insome situations the pickup may be severe enough to causeerratic running of the actuator. For example, a large inductiveload (high voltage AC wires, motors, etc.) running near thepower or control wiring may cause excessive pickup. Tosolve this problem, make one or more of the followingchanges:1. Run the wire in metallic conduit.2. Re-route the wiring away from the source of pickup.3. Use shielded wire (Belden 8760 or equal). Ground the

shield to an earth ground. Do not connect it to the actua-tor common.

Initialization of the AF24-SR US, AFR24-SR US When power is initially applied, the actuator will first releaseits preload position (This assumes a manual position has beenset, The AFR… is pre set from the factory). The actuator willthen rotate to the full fail-safe position. At this point the micro-processor recognizes that the actuator is at full fail-safe anduses this position as the base for all of its position calcula-tions. The microprocessor will retain the initialized zero duringshort power failures of up to 20 seconds. For power failuresgreater than 20 seconds, the actuator would naturally return toits full fail-safe position prior to the microprocessor losing itsmemory. The actuator will also re-initialize if the manual posi-tion mechanism is used.

®

27

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AF

Startup and CheckoutInstructions For AF24-SR US, AFR24-SR US

®

Procedure

Control signal is applied to actuator.

Check power wiring. Correct anyproblems. See Note 1.

Turn reversing switch to the correctposition. Make sure the switch isturned all the way left or right.

Make sure the control signal positive(+) is connected to Wire No 3 andcontrol signal negative (-) is connect-ed to wire No. 1. Most control prob-lems are caused by reversing thesetwo wires. Verify that the reversingswitch is all the way CCW or CW.

Check input signal with a digital voltmeter (DVM). Make sure the input iswithin the range of the actuator. ForAF24-SR US this is 2 to 10 VDC or

4 to 20 mA.Note: The input signal must be abovethe 2 VDC or 4 mA to have the actu-ator move.

Check damper torque requirement.

Actuator works properly. Test con-troller by following controller manu-facturer's instructions.

Expected Response

Actuator will move to its “ControlSignal” position.

Power supply rating should be ≥the total power requirement ofthe actuator(s). Minimum volt-age of 19.2 VAC or 21.6 VDC.


Drives to “Control Signal” posi-tion

Input voltage or current shouldbe ±1% of what controller'sadjustment or programming indi-cate.

Torque requirement is ≤ actua-tor’s minimum torque.

Gives ExpectedResponse

Go To Step…

Actuator operatesproperlyStep 7

Power wiring correct-ed, actuator begins

to driveStep 1

Actuator operatesproperly.Step 7


Controller output(actuator input) is

correct. InputPolarity Correct.

Step 6

Defective Actuator.Replace Actuator -

See Note 2

Does Not GiveExpected Response

Go To Step…

No response at allStep 2

Operation isreversedStep 3

Does not drivetoward "ControlSignal Position"

Step 4

Power wiringcorrected, actuatorstill does not drive

Step 4

Does not drivetoward “ControlSignal Position”

Step 4

Step 5

Reprogram, adjustrepair or replace

controller as needed.Step 1

Recalculate actuatorrequirement and

correct installation.

Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

7.

8.

Note 1 Check that the transformer(s) are sized properly. • If a common transformer is used, make sure that polarity is observed on the secondary. This means connect all No. 1

wires to one leg of the transformer and all No. 2 wires to the other leg of the transformer. • If multiple transformers are used with one control signal, make sure all No. 1 wires are tied together and tied to control

signal negative (-).• Controllers and actuators must have separate 24 VAC/VDC power sources.

Note 2 If failure occurs within 5 years from original installation date, notify Belimo and give details of the application.

AF24-SR US, AFR24-SR US Electrical check-out procedure

28

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NF Series Spring Return Direct Coupled Actuator ®


Torque: 60 in-lb

Power supply : 24 VAC

120 VAC

230 VAC


Control signal: proportional 2 to 10 VDC


Running time motor <75 sec

motor 150 sec constant

spring <60 sec


Appliance rated cable, 18 GA

Built-in auxiliary switch

Two built-in auxiliary switches

Installation instructions ......(p. 36–41) General wiring ..............(p. 41)Start-up and checkout ......(p. 42)

NF Series – at a glance

K4-1 USClamp

ZG106 or ZG 107bracket

* 4 in-lb/ft2 damper torque loading. Parallel blade. No edge seals.

Mount directly to 1.05” jackshafts withaccessory clamp.

Linkage is available when direct coupling isnot possible. (See Mounting Methods Guide5.1 and Mechanical Accessories Doc 4.2)

NF2

4 U

S (p

. 30)

NF2

4-S

US

(p. 3

0)

NF2

4-S

2 U

S (p

. 30)

NF1

20 U

S (p

. 32)

NF1

20-S

US

(p. 3

2)

NF2

30 U

S (p

. 32)

NF2

30-S

US

(p. 3

2)

NF2

4-S

R U

S (p

. 34)

NF2

4-S

R-S

US

(p. 3

4)

Applications

29

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NF

A CLOSER LOOK…

NF Series Spring Return Direct Coupled Actuator®


UL



Mount for clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe.


Don’t worry about actuator burn-out. Belimo is overload-proof throughout rotation

Easy mechanical stop to adjust angle of rotation. (add ZDB-AF2 accessory).

Need to change control direction? Do it easily with a simple switch. (NF24-SR US)

Golden Point breather membrane optimizes performance in harsh airstream environments.

Built-in auxiliary switch(s) is easy to use, offers feedback or signal for additional device. (NF24-S2 US has two switches,NF24-S US, NF120-S US, NF230-S US)

Microprocessor-controlled brushless DC motor increases actuator life span and reliability, provides constant running time. (NF24-SR US)


3 ft. appliance rated cable and conduit connectoreases installation.





©

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.



The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 1.05”in diameter by means of its universal clamp. A crank arm andseveral mounting brackets are available for applications wherethe actuator cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft.

OperationThe NF series actuators provide true spring return operationfor reliable fail-safe application and positive close off on airtight dampers. The spring return system provides constanttorque to the damper with, and without, power applied to theactuator.The NF series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with agraduated position indicator showing 0° to 95°.The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its normal rotationwithout the need of mechanical end switches.

The NF24-S US version is provided with 1 built in auxiliaryswitch. This SPDT switch is provided for safety interfacing orsignaling, for example, for fan start-up. The switching functionis adjustable between 5° and 85°.

The NF24-S2 US version is provided with 2 built-in auxiliaryswitches. These SPDT switches are provided for safety inter-facing or signaling, for example, for fan start-up. The switchingfunction at the fail-safe position is fixed at +5°, the otherswitch function is adjustable between +25° to +85°.

NF24 (-S,-S2) US On-off, spring return safety, 24 V

®

Technical Data NF24 (-S) US





Overload protection Electronic throughout 0 to 95° rotation

Electrical protection Auxiliary switches are double insulated

Angle of rotation 95°, adjustable 30 to 95° w/ accessories

Torque 60 in-lb [7 Nm] constant torque


Position indication visual indicator, 0° to 95° (0° is springreturn position)


Running time motor: < 75 secspring: < 60 sec






Agency listings UL 873 listed, CSA C22.2 No.24 certified





Technical Data NF24 (-S2) US

Auxiliary switches 2 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listedone set at +5°, one adjustable 25° to 85°

(NF24-S)

(nominal)

1.97"

3.15

" [8

0]

3.86

" [9

8]3.

10"

[78]

2.24

" [5

7]

[50]

1.93

"[4

9]

2.64"[67]

0.26" [6.5]5.85" [148.5]

10.59" [269]

0.35" [9]

0.39" [10]

0.65" [16.5]

0.19" [5]

K4-2 US (supplied)




K4-1 US (optional)


K4 US (optional)


Dimensions (All ratings in brackets are metric.)


UL

D01

1

30

31

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NF

NF24 (-S,-S2) USOn-off, spring return safety, 24 V

®

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extensionIND-AF2 Damper position indicatorK4-1 US Universal clamp for up to 1.05” dia jackshaftsK4-H Universal clamp for hexshafts 3/8” to 5/8”KH-AF Crankarm for up to 3/4” round shaft KH-AF-1 Crankarm for up to 1.05” jackshaft KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF and KH-AF-1Tool-01 10 mm wrenchZDB-AF2 Angle of rotation limiterZG-100 Universal mounting bracketZG-101 Universal mounting bracketZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracketZG-103 Universal mounting bracketZG-104 Universal mounting bracketZG-106 Mounting bracket for Honeywell® Mod IV replace-





Note: When using NF24 (-S, -S2) US actuators, only useaccessories listed on this page.

Wiring diagrams

NF24 US Typical SpecificationOn-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupledtype which require no crankarm and linkage and be capableof direct mounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter. Theactuators must be designed so that they may be used foreither clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation.Actuators shall be protected from overload at all angles ofrotation. If required, 1 or 2 SPDT auxiliary switch shall be pro-vided having the capability of being adjustable. Actuatorswith auxiliary switches must be constructed to meet therequirements for Double Insulation so an electrical ground isnot required to meet agency listings. Actuators shall be ULlisted and CSA certified, have a 5 year warranty, and be man-ufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality ControlStandards. Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

2

3




2

3

1

4

5




For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., NF24-S US incorporates a built-in auxiliaryswitch: 1 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed,adjustable 5° to 85°. NF24-S2 US incorporates twobuilt-in auxiliary switches: 2 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250VAC, UL listed, one switch is fixed at +5°, one isadjustable 25° to 85°.


On-off wiring for NF24 US On-off wiring for NF24-S US

1 Common

2 + Hot

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

NF24 (-S,-S2) US

Line Volts 3

1 Common

2 + Hot

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

NF24-S US2NF24-S2 US

Line Volts 3

4

5

S1

S2

S3

NC

NO5° to 85°

4

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

NC

NO

NC

NO

5°

25° to 85°

W06

3

W06

4

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NF120 (-S) US / NF230 (-S) US On-off, spring return safety, 120 or 230 VAC




OperationThe NF series actuators provide true spring return operationfor reliable fail-safe application and positive close off on airtight dampers. The spring return system provides constanttorque to the damper with, and without, power applied to theactuator.The NF series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with agraduated position indicator showing 0° to 95°. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its normal rotationwithout the need of mechanical end switches.

The NF120-S / NF230-S US versions are provided with 1built-in auxiliary switch. This SPDT switch is provided for safe-ty interfacing or signaling, for example, for fan start-up. Theswitching function is adjustable between 5° and 85°.

Technical Data NF120 (-S) US NF230 (-S) US

Power supply 120 VAC ± 10% 230 VAC ± 10%50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Power consumption running: 6 W 6 Wholding: 3.5 W 3.5W

Transformer sizing 7 VA 7 VA



Electrical protection Auxiliary switches are double insulated

Angle of rotation 95°, adjustable 30 to 95° w/ accessories




Auxiliary switches 1 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, (-S models) UL listed, adjustable 5° to 85°

Running time motor: < 75 secspring: < 60 sec












UL

®

(nominal)

32

1.97"

3.15

" [8

0]

3.86

" [9

8]3.

10"

[78]

2.24

" [5

7]

[50]

1.93

"[4

9]

2.64"[67]

0.26" [6.5]5.85" [148.5]

10.59" [269]

0.35" [9]

0.39" [10]

0.65" [16.5]

0.19" [5]

K4-2 US (supplied)




K4-1 US (optional)


K4 US (optional)



D01

1

33

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NF

NF120 (-S) US / NF230 (-S) US On-off, spring return safety, 120 or 230 VAC

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extensionIND-AF2 Damper position indicatorK4-1 US Universal clamp for up to 1.05” dia jackshaftsK4-H Universal clamp for hexshafts 3/8” to 5/8”KH-AF Crankarm for up to 3/4” round shaft KH-AF-1 Crankarm for up to 1.05” jackshaft KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF and KH-AF-1Tool-01 10 mm wrenchZDB-AF2 Angle of rotation limiterZG-100 Universal mounting bracketZG-101 Universal mounting bracketZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracketZG-103 Universal mounting bracketZG-104 Universal mounting bracketZG-106 Mounting bracket for Honeywell® Mod IV replace-





Note: When using NF120 US, NF120-S, NF230 US andNF230-S US actuators, only use accessories listed on thispage.

NF120 US / NF230 US Typical SpecificationOn-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupledtype which require no crankarm and linkage and be capableof direct mounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter. Theactuators must be designed so that they may be used foreither clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation.Actuators shall be protected from overload at all angles ofrotation. If required, 1 SPDT auxiliary switch shall be providedhaving the capability of being adjustable. Actuators with aux-iliary switches must be constructed to meet the requirementsfor Double Insulation so an electrical ground is not required tomeet agency listings. Actuators shall be UL listed and CSAcertified, have a 5 year warranty, and be manufactured underISO 9001 International Quality Control Standards. Actuatorsshall be as manufactured by Belimo.

Wiring diagrams

2




2

3

1

3




For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., NF120-S US and NF230-S incorporate onebuilt-in auxiliary switch: 1 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250VAC, UL listed, adjustable 5° to 85°.


®

4

5

On-off wiring for NF120 US / NF230 US On-off wiring for NF120-S US / NF230-S US

1 Neutral

2 Hot

3 Ground

1

2

230 VAC 120 VAC

NF120 US NF230 US

Wht N

Blk H

1 Neutral

2 Hot

2

3

4

5

S1

S2

S3

NC

NO5° to 85°

NF120-S US NF230-S US

1

120 VAC

L1 N

L2 H

W06

6

W06

7

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NF24-SR (-S) US Proportional damper actuator, spring return safety, 24 V for 2 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA control signal.Output signal of 2 to 10 VDC for position indication




The actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10 VDC, or with theaddition of a 500Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input from anelectronic controller or positioner. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signalis provided for position indication or master-slave applications.

OperationThe NF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides constant torque tothe damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.The NF series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with agraduated position indicator showing 0° to 95°.

The NF24-SR US uses a brushless DC motor which is con-trolled by an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) anda microprocessor. The microprocessor provides the intelli-gence to the ASIC to provide a constant rotation rate and toknow the actuator’s exact fail-safe position. The ASIC moni-tors and controls the brushless DC motor’s rotation and pro-vides a digital rotation sensing function to prevent damage tothe actuator in a stall condition. The actuator may be stalledanywhere in its normal rotation without the need of mechani-cal end switches.

Technical Data NF24-SR US


Power consumption running: 3 Wholding: 1 W




Operating range Y 2 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20mA


Angle of rotation 95°, adjustable 30° to 95° w/accessory



Position indication visual indicator, 0° to 95°(0° is spring return position)


Running time motor: 150 sec constant,independent of load

spring: < 60 sec












UL

®

(nominal)

(NF24-SR(-S)

1.97"

3.15

" [8

0]

3.86

" [9

8]3.

10"

[78]

2.24

" [5

7]

[50]

1.93

"[4

9]

2.64"[67]

0.26" [6.5]5.85" [148.5]

10.59" [269]

0.35" [9]

0.39" [10]

0.65" [16.5]

0.19" [5]

K4-2 US (supplied)




K4-1 US (optional)


K4 US (optional)



D01

1

34

©

35

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NF

NF24-SR (-S) USProportional damper actuator, spring return safety, 24 V for 2 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA control signal.

Output signal of 2 to 10 VDC for position indication

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extensionIND-AF2 Damper position indicatorK4-1 US Universal clamp for up to 1.05” dia jackshaftsK4-H Universal clamp for hexshafts 3/8” to 5/8”KH-AF Crankarm for up to 3/4” round shaft KH-AF-1 Crankarm for up to 1.05” jackshaft KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF and KH-AF-1PTA-250 Pulse width modulation interfaceTool-01 10 mm wrenchSGA24 Min. and/or man. positioner in NEMA 4 housingSGF24 Min. and/or man. positioner for flush panel mountingZDB-AF2 Angle of rotation limiterZG-100 Universal mounting bracketZG-101 Universal mounting bracketZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracketZG-103 Universal mounting bracketZG-104 Universal mounting bracketZG-106 Mounting bracket for Honeywell® Mod IV replace-





Note: When using NF24-SR US actuators, only useaccessories listed on this page.

NF24-SR US Typical Specification Spring return control damper actuators shall be direct coupledtype which require no crankarm and linkage and be capable ofdirect mounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter. The actu-ator must provide proportional damper control in response toa 2 to 10 VDC or, with the addition of a 500Ω resistor, a 4 to20 mA control input from an electronic controller or positioner.The actuators must be designed so that they may be used foreither clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation.Actuators shall use a brushless DC motor controlled by amicroprocessor and be protected from overload at all angles ofrotation. Run time shall be constant, and independent oftorque. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal shall be provided forposition feedback or master-slave applications. Actuators shallbe UL listed and CSA certified, have a 5 year warranty, and bemanufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality ControlStandards. Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

Wiring diagrams

2




®

2


Up to 4 actuators may be connected in parallel. With4 actuators wired to one 500Ω resistor. Power con-sumption must be observed.


A 500Ω resistor converts the 4 to 20 mA control signalto 2 to 10 VDC. (ZG-R01) Only connect common to neg. (–) leg of control circuits

For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., NF24-SR US incorporates a built-in auxiliaryswitch: 1 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed,adjustable 5° to 85°.

4

5

6

3

4 to 20 mA control of NF24-SR US with 2 to 10 VDCfeedback output

0 to 10 VDC control of NF24-SR US Auxiliary switch wiring


(–)

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y1 Input, 2 to 10V

5 U Output 2 to 10V

1

2

3

24 VAC Transformer

NF24-SR US

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y1 Input, 2 to 10V

5 U Output 2 to 10V


5

3

2

4

NF24-SR US

Control Signal (+)4 to 20 mA (–)


Ω500Ω

Line Volts

To other actuators

NF24-SR-S US

6S1

S2

S3

NC

NO5° to 85°

W06

8

W14

6W

069

36

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.


®




1. Rotate the damper to its failsafe position. If the shaft rotatescounterclockwise, mount the “CCW” side of the actuator out.If it rotates clockwise, mount the actuator with the “CW” sideout.

2. If the universal clamp is not on the correct side of the actua-tor, move it to the correct side for ease of installation.



NOTE: Read the “Standard Mounting” instructions, on the nextpage, for more detailed information.

min. 3 1/2"

[90] min. 3/4"

[20]

1/4" 1/4"

1/4" 1/4"


37

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NF


Standard Mounting

30

25

20

15

10

5

02

34 6 8 10

5 7 9

Dam

per A

rea

(sq.

ft.)


Torque LoadingChart


The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 1.05” in diameter by means of its universal clamp. A crank arm and sever-al mounting brackets are available for applications where the actuator cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft.

The NF series actuators provide true spring return operation for reliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides consistent torque to the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.

The NF series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with a graduated position indicator showing 0° to 95°.

The NF…-S versions are provided with 1 built-in auxiliary switch. This SPDT switch is provided for safety interfacing or signaling,for example, for fan start-up. The switching function is adjustable between 5° and 85°. (NF24-S2, with 2 built-in switches, adjustablebetween +25° and +85°)

1. See Fig. B. Manually move the damper to the fail-safeposition (a) (usually closed). If the shaft rotated counter-clockwise ( ), this is a CCW installation. If the shaftrotated clockwise ( ), this is a CW installation. In aCCW installation, the actuator side marked “CCW” facesout, while in a CW installation, the side marked “CW”faces out. All other steps are identical.

2. The actuator is usually shipped with the universal clampmounted to the “CCW” side of the actuator. To test foradequate shaft length, slide the actuator over the shaftwith the side marked “CCW” (or the “CW” side if this is theside with the clamp). If the shaft extends at least 1/8”through the clamp, mount the actuator as follows. If not,go to the Short Shaft Installation section.









General Information

Belimo actuators should be mounted indoors in a dry, relatively clean environment free from corrosive fumes. If the actuator is tobe mounted outdoors, a protective enclosure must be used to shield the actuator. For new construction work, order dampers with extended shafts. Instruct the installing contractor to allow space for mounting and serv-ice of the Belimo actuator on the shaft. The damper shaft must extend at least 3 1/2" from the duct. If the shaft extends less than 3 1/2"or if an obstruction blocks access, the shaft can be extended with the AV 10-18 shaft extension or the actuator may be mounted in itsshort shaft configuration.

®

38

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.


Figure A Universal Clamp and IND-AF2 PositionIndicator (optional)

3. If the clamp is not on the correct side as determined in step#1, re-mount the clamp as follows. If it is on the correctside, proceed to step #5. Look at the universal clamp. Ifyou are mounting the actuator with the “CCW” side out,position the clamp so that the pointer section of the tab ispointing to 0° (see Fig. C) and the spline pattern of theclamp mates with spline of the actuator. Slip the clampover the spline. (Use the same procedure if the “CW” side isout.) If your application requires a mechanical minimumposition, read the Rotation Limitation section.

4. Lock the clamp to the actuator using the retaining clip. 5. Verify that the damper is still in its full fail-safe position. (a)6. Mount the spring return actuator to the shaft. Tighten the

universal clamp, finger tight only.7. Mount the anti-rotation strap at the base of the actuator.

Slip the stop of the anti-rotation strap in the slot of the baseof the actuator. The stud should be centered approximately1/4” from the end of the slot. Do not tighten the screws.

8. Remove the screw from one end of the mounting bracketand pivot it away from the actuator.

9. Loosen the universal clamp and, making sure not to movethe damper shaft, rotate the actuator approximately 5° inthe direction which would open the damper.

10. Tighten the universal clamp to the shaft.11. Rotate the actuator to apply pressure to the damper seals

(b) and re-engage the anti-rotation strap (c).12. Tighten all fasteners.

Short Shaft InstallationIf the shaft extends at least 3/4” from the duct, follow thesesteps:

1. Move damper blades to the fail-safe position (a).2. Determine the best orientation for the universal clamp on the

back of the actuator. The best location would be where youhave the easiest access to the V bolt nuts on the clamp.


4. Lock the clamp to the actuator using the retainer clip.

5. Mount the spring return actuator to the shaft. Tighten theuniversal clamp, finger tight only.

6. Mount the anti-rotation strap at the base of the actuator.Do not tighten the screws.

7. Remove the screw from one end of the mounting bracketand pivot it away from the actuator.


9. Verify that the damper is still in its full fail-safe position.10. Tighten the universal clamp to the shaft.11. Rotate the actuator to apply pressure to the damper seals


30

20

10

0

CCW

30

20

100

-5

Correct clamp mountingposition if actuator is atfull fail-safe.

4030

20

10

0-5

40

30

20

100

-5

Correct pointer mountingposition if actuator is atfull fail-safe.

CW

CCW CW

®

Figure B

R

5°

M

1 2 S1 S2

(COM) (+)

Made in Sw i t ze r l and

30 40 5060

70

80

25…85°

90 80 70 6050

40

30

20

10

0

-5

LC

Ma

de

in S

wi t z

er l a

nd

9080

7060

50

40

30

20

100

-5

b

c

a

CW

®

NF…

1/4"

39

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NF


Rotation LimitationThe angle of rotation limiter, ZDB-AF2, is used in conjunctionwith the tab on the universal clamp or IND-AF2 position indica-tor which comes with the ZDB-AF2. In order to function prop-erly, the clamp or indicator must be mounted correctly. See Fig. A.

The ZDB-AF2 may not work in certain mounting orientationsusing the ZG-106 or ZG-107 mounting brackets. It will not workwith the ZG-108 mounting bracket. Limiting the damper rotationmust be accomplished by adjusting the crank arm linkage.

The ZDB-AF2 may be used to control the rotational output ofthe NF series actuator where a damper has a designed rota-tion less than 90°. An example would be a 45° or 60° rotatingdamper.

Damper rotation limiting1. Determine the amount of damper rotation required.2. Locate the Angle of Rotation Limiter (ZDB-AF2) on the

actuator so that its edge lines up with the degree grad-uation on the actuator face which corresponds with therequired rotation. See Fig. C.

3. Find the appropriate cross-hair location through the slotof the limiter. This is the screw mounting location.


5. Position the limiter back to the desired position, makingsure the locating “teeth” on the limiter are engaged intothe locating holes on the actuator.


7. Test the damper rotation before applying power and ifrequired, a control signal. Re-adjust if necessary.

Auxiliary SwitchesThe NF series actuators may be ordered with 1 built-in SPDTauxiliary switch used for safety interfacing or signalling, forexample, for fan start-up. The switch position is adjustablebetween 5° and 85° of rotation. The crank, supplied with theactuator, or a 3mm allen wrench (NF24-S2, with 2 built-inswitches, adjustable between +25° and +85°) is used to adjustthe switching position.See Fig. D.

1 The actuator must be in its fail-safe position.2. Insert the crank into the hexagon shaped hole located in

the center of the adjustable switch pointer.3. Rotate the crank until the switch pointer is at the desired

switch point in degrees as shown.

®

20

3040

Screw secured atthese cross hairs

20

3040

Secure angle-of-rotation limiter

Screw

Philips screwdriver

20

3040

Angle of rotation is now set at 40°.

Figure C ZDB-AF2 Securing the Angle of Rotation Limiter

Factory setting 5°Rotate withcrank handle 45° set

5…85°

10 2030

4050

607080

5…85°

10 2030

4050

607080

5…85°

10 2030

4050

607080

Crank Handle

Figure D

40

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Installation InstructionsNon-direct mounting methods and additional information

Initialization of the NF24-SR US When power is initially applied, the microprocessor recognizesthat the actuator is at full fail-safe and uses this position asthe base for all of its position calculations. The microprocessorwill retain the initialized zero during short power failures of upto 20 seconds. For power failures greater than 20 seconds theactuator would naturally return to it full fail-safe position priorto the microprocessor losing its memory. When power isapplied again, the actuator will re-initialize the zero position.The microprocessor will keep count of these short power fail-ures until 16 occur. At this point, the microprocessor will auto-matically drive the actuator to its zero position and re-initializeto correct for any possible error accumulation.

Motor position detectionBelimo brushless DC motors eliminate the need for potentiome-ters for positioning. Inside the motor are three “Hall Effect” sen-sors. These sensors detect the spinning rotor and send pulsesto the microprocessor which counts the pulses and calculatesthe position to within 1/3 of a revolution of the motor.

Overload protectionThe Belimo NF24-SR US actuator is protected from overloadat all angles of rotation. The on board microprocessor con-stantly monitors the rotation of the DC drive motor inside theactuator and stops the pulses to the motor when it senses astall condition. The DC motor remains energized and pro-duces full rated torque to the load. This helps ensure thatdampers are fully closed and that edge and blade seals arealways properly compressed.

Brushless DC motor operationBelimo's brushless DC motor spins by reversing the poles ofstationary electromagnets housed inside rotating permanentmagnets. The electromagnetic poles are switched by a micro-processor and a special ASIC (Application Specific IntegratedCircuit) developed by Belimo. Unlike the conventional DCmotor, there are no brushes to wear or commutators to foul.

Additional Operational Information for NF24-SR US Proportional Actuators

®

Crankarm

KH-AF Non-direct mounting with ZG-108 mounting bracket

KH-AF crankarm including retaining ring. Caution: theretaining clip supplied with the clamp is not used to mount theKH-AF crankarm.

Non-direct mounting using various accessories

The KH-AF (-1) crankarm is used in non-direct coupledmounting applications.

Two sizes are available:KH-AF For round shafts up to 3/4” or square shafts up to5/8”KH-AF-1For jackshafts up to 1.05”

ZG-AF USLinkageKitKH-AF

Crankarm

ZG-106 orZG-107

DC1 Damper Clip

41

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NF



Transformer(s)The NF24 . . actuator requires a 24 VAC class 2 transformerand draws a maximum of 8 VA per actuator. The actuatorenclosure cannot be opened in the field, there are no parts orcomponents to be replaced or repaired.



Multiple actuators, one transformer Multiple actuators may be powered from one transformer pro-vided the following rules are followed:1. The TOTAL current draw of the actuators (VA rating) is


lowed. This means that all No. 1 wires from all actuatorsare connected to the common leg on the transformer andall No 2 wires from all actuators are connected to the hot-leg. Mixing wire No. 1 & 2 on one leg of the transformerwill result in erratic operation or failure of the actuatorand/or controls.


to the negative leg of the control signal. See wiring dia-gram page 19.

Wire length for NF… actuatorsKeep power wire runs below the lengths listed in the table inFig. E. If more than one actuator is powered from the same

wire run, divide the allowable wire length by the number of actu-ators to determine the maximum run to any single actuator. Example for NF24-SR US:

3 actuators, 16 Ga wire 550 Ft ÷ 3 Actuators = 183 Ft. Maximum wire run



Figure E

Wire Type and Wire Installation TipsFor most installations, 18 or 16 Ga. cable works well with theNF24… actuators. Use code-approved wire nuts, terminalstrips or solderless connectors where wires are joined. It isgood practice to run control wires unspliced from the actuatorto the controller. If splices are unavoidable, make sure thesplice can be reached for possible maintenance. Tape and/orwire-tie the splice to reduce the possibility of the splice beinginadvertently pulled apart.

The NF24… proportional actuators have a digital circuit that isdesigned to ignore most unwanted input signals (pickup). Insome situations the pickup may be severe enough to causeerratic running of the actuator. For example, a large inductiveload (high voltage AC wires, motors, etc.) running near thepower or control wiring may cause excessive pickup. To solvethis problem, make one or more of the following changes:1. Run the wire in metallic conduit.2. Re-route the wiring away from the source of pickup.3. Use shielded wire (Belden 8760 or equal). Ground the






®

NF24 (-S) US

NF120 (-S) US / NF230 (-S) US

NF24-SR (-S) US

42

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Startup and CheckoutInstructions For NF24-SR US

Procedure





Check input signal with a digital voltmeter (DVM). Make sure the input iswithin the range of the actuator. ForNF24-SR US this is 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA. Note: The input signalmust be above the 2 VDC or 4 mA tohave the actuator move.

Loosen the nuts on the V-bolt andmove the damper by hand from fullyclosed to fully open..



Expected Response






Damper will go from fully closedto fully open.



Go To Step…



to driveStep 1





Step 6

Damper moves properlyStep 7


See Note 2


Go To Step…




Step 4


Step 4


Step 4

Step 5



Find cause of damperjam and repair. Movedamper back to thefully closed positionand tighten the nuts.

Step 1



Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.





NF24-SR US Electrical check-out procedure

®

43

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NF

Notes/Work Pad®

44

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LF Series Spring Return Direct Coupled Actuator®


LF Series – at a glance


Torque: 35 in-lb

Power supply: 24 VAC/DC

120 VAC

230 VAC


Control signal: floating point


Control signal: 6 to 9 VDC

Feedback: 2 to 10 VDC

Auxiliary output, 20 VDC (to power controller)

Running time: motor <75 sec



spring <25 sec


Plenum rated cable, 18 GA

Conduit fitting

Appliance cable


LF24-SR-E US operation ..(p.58) Installation instructions ..(p. 60–65)General wiring ..................(p. 61) Start-up and checkout ..(p. 66)

LF24

US

(p. 4

6)LF

24-S

US

(p. 4

6)LF

120

US

(p. 4

8)LF

120-

S U

S (p

. 48)

LF23

0 U

S (p

. 48)

LF23

0-S

US

(p. 4

8)LF

24-3

US

(p. 5

0)LF

C24

-3-R

US

(p. 5

2)

LFC

24-3

-S U

S (p

. 52)

LF24

-3-S

US

(p. 5

2)

LF24

-SR

US

(p. 5

4)LF

24-S

R-S

US

(p. 5

6)

ApplicationsCost effective quality and performance for a range of applications including:

• Classroom Unit Ventilators• Fan/Coil Units• VAV Terminal Units• Economizer Units• Airhandlers• Control Dampers

LF… actuator

45

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LF

LF Series Spring Return Direct Coupled Actuator®


UL

Cut labor costs with (10 min. installation) simple direct coupling.Actuator Centers on 1/2” shaft. (K6-1, 3/4” clamp optional)


Mount for clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe.

Easy-to-adjust mechanical stop to limit damper rotation.



Need to change control direction? Do it easily with a simple switch. (modulating actuators)

Built-in auxiliary switch is easy to use, offers feedback or signal for additional device.

Microprocessor-controlled brushless DC motor increases actuator life span and reliability, provides constant running time. (modulating actuators)


3 ft. cable and conduit connector eases installation.

A CLOSER LOOK…





©

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LF24 (-S) US On-off, spring return safety, 24 V

®


ApplicationFor on-off, fail-safe control of dampers in HVAC systems.Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the dampermanufacturer’s specifications. Control is on-off from an auxil-iary contact, digital output, or a manual switch.

The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft from 3/8”up to 1/2” in diameter by means of its universal clamp, 1/2”shaft centered at delivery. For shafts up to 3/4” use K6-1accessory. A crank arm and several mounting brackets areavailable for applications where the actuator cannot be directcoupled to the damper shaft.

OperationThe LF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides consistent torqueto the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.The LF series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with agraduated position indicator showing 0° to 90°.The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its normal rotationwithout the need of mechanical end switches. Power con-sumption is reduced in holding mode.

The LF24-S US version is provided with 1 built in auxiliaryswitch. This SPDT switch is provided for safety interfacing orsignaling, for example, for fan start-up. The switching functionis adjustable between 0° and 95°. The auxiliary switch in theLF24-S is double insulated so an electrical ground connectionis not necessary.


0.39" [10]

7.67" [195]

3.66" [93]

1.93"[49]

6.10" [155]

3.15" [80]3.86"[98]

0.256" [6.5]0.98"[25]

4.92" [125]

0.79"[20]

0.5"[12.7]

0.71" [18]

0.74" [18.7]

2.24"[57]

3.23" [82]

0.25" [6.3]

Standard: 3/8" to 1/2"

3/8" to 7/16" Optional

1/2" to 3/4" w/K6-1 accessory

Technical Data LF24 (-S) US




Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cable(LF24-S US has 2 cables)1/2” conduit connector


Angle of rotation max. 95°, adjust. with mechanical stop

Torque 35 in-lb [4 Nm]

Direction of rotation reversible with cw/ccw mounting


Auxiliary switch 1 x SPDT 6A (1.5) @ 250 VAC, UL listedadjustable 0° to 95° (double insulated)

Running time motor: < 40 to 75 secspring: < 25 sec @-4°F to +122°F [-20°C to +50°C]

< 60 sec @-22°F [-30°C]






Agency listings UL 873 listed, CSA C22.2 No.24 certified, CE

Noise level max: running < 50 db (A)spring return 62 dB (A)



Weight LF24 3.1 lbs (1.40 kg.)LF24-S 3.2 lbs (1.45 kg.)


UL

(LF24-S)

(nominal)

46

D01

0

47

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LF

LF24 (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, 24 V

®

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extension (K6-1 is required)IND-LF Damper position indicatorK6-1 Universal clamp for up to 3/4” diameter shaftsKH-LF Crankarm for up to 1/2” round shaft Tool-01 10 mm wrenchZG-LF2 Crankarm adaptor kit for LF ZG-112 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod IV, M6415

type actuators, and new installationsZG-LF112 Crankarm adaptor kit for Honeywell Mod IV,

M6415 type actuators, and new installationsZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)ZS-260 Explosion-proof housing

Note: When using LF24 US and LF24-S US actuators,only use accessories listed on this page.

Wiring diagrams

LF24 (-S) US Typical SpecificationOn-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupledtype which require no crankarm and linkage and be capableof direct mounting to a shaft up to a 3/4” diameter and centera 1/2” shaft. The actuators must be designed so that they maybe used for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safeoperation. Actuators shall be protected from overload at allangles of rotation. If required, 1 SPDT auxiliary switch shall beprovided having the capability of being adjustable. Actuatorswith auxiliary switch must be constructed to meet the require-ments for Double Insulation so an electrical ground is notrequired to meet agency listings. Actuators shall be UL listedand CSA certified, have a 5 year warranty, and be manufac-tured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control Standards.Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

2

3




2

3

1

4

5




For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., LF24-S US incorporates a built-in auxiliaryswitch: 1 x SPDT, 6A (1.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed,adjustable 0° to 95°.


On-off wiring for LF24 US On-off wiring for LF24-S US

1 Common

2 + Hot

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

LF24 US

Line Volts 3

1 Common

2 + Hot

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

LF24-S US

Line Volts 3

4

5

S1

S2

S3

NC

NO0° to 95°W

047

W04

8

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.




OperationThe LF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides consistent torqueto the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.The LF series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with agraduated position indicator showing 0° to 90°. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its normal rotationwithout the need of mechanical end switches. Power con-sumption is reduced in holding mode. The actuator is doubleinsulated so an electrical ground connection is not necessary.

The LF120-S US and LF230-S US versions are provided with1 built-in auxiliary switch. This SPDT switch is provided forsafety interfacing or signaling, for example, for fan start-up.The switching function is adjustable between 0° and 95°.


LF120 (-S) US / LF230 (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, 120/230 VAC

Technical Data LF120 (-S) US LF230 (-S) US

Power supply 120 VAC ± 10% 230 VAC ± 10%50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Power consumption running: 5.5 W 5 W holding: 3.5 W 3 W

Transformer sizing 7.5 VA 7 VA

Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cable (-S models have 2 cables)1/2” conduit connector



Angle of rotation max 95°, adjust. with mechanical stop


Direction of rotation reversible with cw/ccw mounting

Position indication visual indicator, 0° to 90° (0° isspring return position)

Auxiliary switch 1 x SPDT 6A (1.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listed(-S models) adjustable 0° to 95°


Running time motor: < 40 to 75 secspring:< 25 sec @-4°F to +122°F [-20°C to +50°C]

< 60 sec @-22°F [-30°C]






Agency listings UL 873, CSA C22.2 No. 24 Certified,CE [LF230(-S) US]




Weight LF120/230 3.4 lbs (1.54 kg.)LF120/230-S 3.5 lbs (1.60 kg.)

®

(nominal)


UL

48

0.39" [10]

7.67" [195]

3.66" [93]

1.93"[49]

6.10" [155]

3.15" [80]3.86"[98]

0.256" [6.5]0.98"[25]

4.92" [125]

0.79"[20]

0.5"[12.7]

0.71" [18]

0.74" [18.7]

2.24"[57]

3.23" [82]

0.25" [6.3]




D01

0

49

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LF

LF120 (-S) US / LF230 (-S) US On-off, spring return safety, 120/230 VAC

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extension (K6-1 is required)IND-LF Damper position indicatorK6-1 Universal clamp for up to 3/4” diameter shaftsKH-LF Crankarm for up to 1/2” round shaft Tool-01 10 mm wrenchZG-LF2 Crankarm adaptor kit for LF ZG-112 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod IV, M6415


M6415 type actuators, and new installations ZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)ZS-260 Explosion-proof housing

Note: When using LF120/230 US and LF120-S/230-S USactuators, only use accessories listed on this page.

LF120 (-S) US / LF230 (-S) US Typical SpecificationOn-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupledtype which require no crankarm and linkage and be capable ofdirect mounting to a shaft up to a 3/4” diameter and center a1/2” shaft. The actuators must be designed so that they maybe used for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe oper-ation. Actuators shall be protected from overload at all anglesof rotation. If required, 1 SPDT auxiliary switch shall be pro-vided having the capability of being adjustable. Actuatorsmust be constructed to meet the requirements for DoubleInsulation so an electrical ground is not required to meetagency listings. Actuators shall be UL listed and CSA certified,have a 5 year warranty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001International Quality Control Standards. Actuators shall be asmanufactured by Belimo.

Wiring diagrams

2




2

3

1

3




For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., LF120-S US and LF230-S US incorporateone built-in auxiliary switch: 1 x SPDT, 6A (1.5A)@250 VAC, UL listed, adjustable 0° to 95°.


®

4

5

On-off wiring for LF120 US / LF230 US On-off wiring for LF120-S US / LF230-S US

1 Neutral

2 Hot1

2

120 VAC (230 VAC for LF230 US)

LF120 US LF230 US

3L1 N

L2 H

1 Neutral

2 Hot

2

3

4

5

5

S1

S2

S3

NC

NO0° to 95°

LF120-S US LF230-S US

1

120 VAC (230 VAC for LF230 US)

L1 N

L2 H

W04

9

W05

0

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LF24-3 (-S) US On-off, spring return safety, reversible, floating point, 24V


ApplicationFor modulation or on-off control of dampers in HVAC systems.Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the dampermanufacturer’s specifications.


Control is floating point from a triac or relay, or on-off from anauxiliary contact from a fan motor contactor, controller, ormanual switch.

OperationThe LF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides consistent torqueto the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.

The LF series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with agraduated position indicator showing 0 to 90°.

The LF24-3 (-S) US uses a brushless DC motor which is con-trolled by an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) and amicroprocessor. The microprocessor provides the intelligence tothe ASIC to provide a constant rotation rate. The ASIC monitorsand controls the brushless DC motor’s rotation and provides adigital rotation sensing function to prevent damage to the actua-tor in a stall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere inits normal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.Power consumption is reduced in holding mode.

The LF24-3-S US version is provided with 1 built-in auxiliaryswitch. This SPDT switch is provided for safety interfacing orsignaling, for example, for fan start-up. The switching functionis adjustable between 0° and 95°. The auxiliary switch in theLF24-3-S US is double insulated so an electrical ground is notnecessary.


Technical Data LF24-3 (-S) US


Power consumption running: 2.5 W ; holding: 1 W


Electrical connection LF24-3 US 3 ft, plenum rated cableLF24-3-S US 3 ft, 18 GA appliance

cables (2)1/2” conduit connector





Direction of rotation spring: reversible with cw/ccw mountingmotor: reversible with built-in switch

Position indication visual indicator, 0° to 90° (0° isspring return position)

Auxiliary switch 1 x SPDT 6A (1.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listed(LF24-3-S US) adjustable 0° to 95° (double insulated)

Running time motor: 150 sec constant, independent of load

spring: < 25 sec @-4°F to +122°F [-20°C to +50°C]

< 60 sec @-22°F [-30°C]






Agency listings UL 873 listed; CSA C22.2 No. 24 certified, CE




Weight LF24-3 3.1 lbs (1.40 kg.)LF24-3-S 3.6 lbs (1.45 kg.)


UL

®

50

0.39" [10]

7.67" [195]

3.66" [93]

1.93"[49]

6.10" [155]

3.15" [80]3.86"[98]

0.256" [6.5]0.98"[25]

4.92" [125]

0.79"[20]

0.5"[12.7]

0.71" [18]

0.74" [18.7]

2.24"[57]

3.23" [82]

0.25" [6.3]




D01

0

51

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LF

LF24-3 (-S) US On-off, spring return safety, reversible, floating point, 24V

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extension (K6-1 is required)IND-LF Damper position indicator K6-1 Universal clamp for up to 3/4” diameter shaftsKH-LF Crankarm for up to 1/2” round shaft Tool-01 10 mm wrenchZG-LF2 Crankarm adaptor kit for LF ZG-112 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod IV, M6415


M6415 type actuators, and new installationsZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)ZS-260 Explosion-proof housing

Note: When using LF24-3 (-S) US actuators, only useaccessories listed on this page.

LF24-3 (-S) US Typical SpecificationFloating point, on-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled typewhich require no crankarm and linkage and be capable of direct mounting to a shaftup to a 3/4” diameter and center a 1/2” shaft. The actuators must be designed sothat they may be used for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation.Actuators shall have an external direction of rotation switch to reverse control logic.Actuators shall use a brushless DC motor and be protected from overload at allangles of rotation. If required, 1 SPDT auxiliary switch shall be provided havingthe capability of being adjustable. Actuators with auxiliary switch must be con-structed to meet the requirements for Double Insulation so an electrical groundis not required to meet agency listings. Run time shall be constant and independ-ent of torque. Actuators shall be UL listed and CSA certified, have a 5 year warran-ty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control Standards.Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

®

1 2 8324 VAC Transformer

a opena closed


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Grn (4) +

LF24-3 (-S) USCW CCW

a

Line Volts

Line Volts


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Grn (4) +

24 VAC Transformer

LF24-3 (-S) USCW CCW

bCCWCW

stop

a(3) (4)

stop stop stop

Installation Side


xxxx

xxxx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xxx

xxxx

xxxx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xxx

CWCCWSwitch

Positions

CCWCW

a

b

8

Wiring Diagrams

On-Off control of LF24-3 (-S) US

Triac source

Triac sink

Floating point control of LF24-3 (-S) US

Auxiliary switch of LF24-3 (-S) US

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) +

Grn (4) +

ComHot

Controller

Line Volts

CW CCW

LF24-3 (-S) US


1

2

24 VAC Transformer

8

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) +

Grn (4) +

ComHot

Controller

Line Volts

CW CCW

LF24-3 (-S) US


1

2

4

5

24 VAC Transformer

8

Triac sink with separate transformers

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) +

Grn (4) +

ComHot

Controller

Line Volts

CW CCW

LF24-3 (-S) US


1

2

5

24 VAC Transformer Line Volts


8

7LF24-3-S US

6S1

S2

S3

NC

NO0° to 95°

2

3

4

5




The Common connection from the actuator must be connected to the Hot con-nection of the controller.


For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., LF24-3-S US LF120-S US and LF230-S US incorporate one built-in auxiliary switch: 1 x SPDT,6A (1.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed, adjustable 0° to 95°.

Meets UL and CSA requirements without the need of an electrical ground connection.

Actuators with plenum rated cable do not have numbers on wires; use colorcoded instead. Actuators with appliance rated cable use numbers.

6

7

8

Notes:

W05

3W

052

W05

1

W05

4W

055

W05

6

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LFC24-3-R (-S) US On-off, spring return safety, reversible, floating point, 24V, Trane Voyager retrofit


ApplicationFor modulation or on-off control of dampers in HVAC systems.Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the dampermanufacturer’s specifications.

The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft from 3/8”up to 1/2” in diameter by means of its universal clamp, 1/2”shaft centered at delivery. For shafts up to 3/4” use K6-1accessory. The ZG-LFC114 universal mounting kit can beused with the LFC24-3-R US actuator for retrofit of the econo-mizer section of the Trane Voyager unit.

Control is floating point from a triac or relay, or on-off from anauxiliary contact from a fan motor contactor, controller, ormanual switch.

OperationThe LF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides consistent torqueto the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.

The LF series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with agraduated position indicator showing 0 to 90°.

The LFC24-3-R (-S) US uses a brushless DC motor which iscontrolled by an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) anda microprocessor. The microprocessor provides the intelligenceto the ASIC to provide a constant rotation rate. The ASIC moni-tors and controls the brushless DC motor’s rotation and providesa digital rotation sensing function to prevent damage to the actua-tor in a stall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere inits normal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.Power consumption is reduced in holding mode.

The LFC24-3-S US version is provided with 1 built-in auxiliaryswitch. This SPDT switch is provided for safety interfacing orsignaling, for example, for fan start-up. The switching functionis adjustable between 0° and 95°. The auxiliary switch in theLFC24-3-S US is double insulated so an electrical ground isnot necessary.


Technical Data LFC24-3-R US


Power consumption running: 2.5 W ; holding: 1 W


Electrical connection LFC24-3-R US 3 ft, plenum ratedcable 4 male spade connectors





Direction of rotation spring: reversible with cw/ccw mountingmotor: reversible with built-in switch


Running time motor: 90 sec constant, independent of load


< 60 sec @-22°F [-30°C]






Agency listings UL 873 listed; CSA C22.2 No.24 certified, CE




Weight LFC24-3-R US 3.1 lbs (1.40 kg.)

Technical Data LFC24-3-S US

Auxiliary switch 1 x SPDT 6A (1.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listedadjustable 0° to 95° (double insulated)

Electrical Connection 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cables (2)1/2” conduit connector

Weight LFC24-3-S US 3.6 lbs (1.45 kg.)


UL

®

52

0.39" [10]

7.67" [195]

3.66" [93]

1.93"[49]

6.10" [155]

3.15" [80]3.86"[98]

0.256" [6.5]0.98"[25]

4.92" [125]

0.79"[20]

0.5"[12.7]

0.71" [18]

0.74" [18.7]

2.24"[57]

3.23" [82]

0.25" [6.3]




D01

0

53

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LF

LFC24-3-R (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, reversible, floating point, 24V, Trane Voyager retrofit

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extension (K6-1 is required)IND-LF Damper position indicator K6-1 Universal clamp for up to 3/4” diameter shaftsKH-LF Crankarm for up to 1/2” round shaft Tool-01 10 mm wrenchZG-LF2 Crankarm adaptor kit for LF ZG-112 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod IV, M6415


M6415 type actuators, and new installationsZG-LFC114 Used with LFC24-3-R US, mounting bracket kit for

Trane Voyager economizer actuator retrofit. Kit includes mounting bracket and installation hardware.

ZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)ZS-260 Explosion-proof housing

Note: When using LFC24-3-R (-S) US actuators, only useaccessories listed on this page.

Note: For On-Off control wiring please see LF24-3 USwiring diagram. “On-Off control of LF24-3 (-S) US” page 49.

Note: For Floating point control wiring, Triac source, sinkor wiring with separate power supplies please see page49for correct wiring.

Note: Please consult equipment and/or controller manu-facturers documentation to ensure compatibility. If you areunsure send controller specifications to Belimo Aircontrolsfor evaluation.

LFC24-3-R (-S) US Typical SpecificationFloating point, on-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled typewhich require no crankarm and linkage and be capable of direct mounting to a shaftup to a 3/4” diameter and center a 1/2” shaft. The actuators must be designed sothat they may be used for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation.Actuators shall have an external direction of rotation switch to reverse control logic.Actuators shall use a brushless DC motor and be protected from overload at allangles of rotation. If required, 1 SPDT auxiliary switch shall be provided havingthe capability of being adjustable. Actuators with auxiliary switch must be con-structed to meet the requirements for Double Insulation so an electrical groundis not required to meet agency listings. Run time shall be constant and independ-ent of torque. Actuators shall be UL listed and CSA certified, have a 5 year warran-ty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control Standards.Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

®

Line Volts


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Grn (4) +

24 VAC Transformer

LFC24-3-R USLFC24-3-S US

CW CCW

bCCWCW

stop

a(3) (4)

stop stop stop

Installation Side


xxxx

xxxx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xxx

xxxx

xxxx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xxx

CWCCWSwitch

Positions

CCWCW

a

b

Wiring Diagrams

Floating point control of LF24-3… US

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Grn (4) +

LFC24-3-R USCW CCW

PinkRed

Blue

Yellow

Yellow

Pink

Female

Connector TypeEquipment Wiring

Field installed female connectors (provided)

Pre-installed male connectors on actuators

Male

Pink Pink

Pink Pink

Blue Blue

7LFC24-3-S US

6S1

S2

S3

NC

NO0° to 95°

Auxiliary switch of LFC24-3-S US

2

3

1Provide overload protection anddisconnect as required.



For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., LFC24-3-S US,LF120-S US and LF230-S US incorporate one built-in auxiliary switch: 1 xSPDT, 6A (1.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed, adjustable 0° to 95°.

Meets UL and CSA requirements without the need of an electricalground connection.

6

7

Notes:

ZG-LFC114

Wiring LFC24-3-R US

Retrofit solution installation

W14

7W

148

W14

9

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.




The actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10 VDC, or with theaddition of a 500Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input from anelectronic controller or positioner. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signalis provided for position indication or master-slave applications.

OperationThe LF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides consistent torqueto the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.The LF series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with agraduated position indicator showing 0 to 90°.

The LF24-SR (-S) US uses a brushless DC motor which iscontrolled by an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC)and a microprocessor. The microprocessor provides the intelli-gence to the ASIC to provide a constant rotation rate and toknow the actuator’s exact fail-safe position. The ASIC moni-tors and controls the brushless DC motor’s rotation and pro-vides a digital rotation sensing function to prevent damage tothe actuator in a stall condition. The actuator may be stalledanywhere in its normal rotation without the need of mechani-cal end switches. Power consumption is reduced in holdingmode.

The LF24-SR-S US version is provided with 1 built-in auxiliaryswitch. This SPDT switch is provided for safety interfacing orsignaling, for example, for fan start-up. The switching functionis adjustable between 0° and 95°. The auxiliary switch in theLF24-SR-S US is double insulated so an electrical ground innot necessary.


LF24-SR (-S) US Proportional damper actuator, spring return safety, 24 V for 2 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA control signal.Output signal of 2 to 10 VDC for position indication.

Technical Data LF24-SR (-S) US


Power consumption running: 2.5 W; holding: 1 W


Electrical connection LF24-SR US 3 ft, plenum rated cableLF24-SR-SUS 3 ft, 18 GA appliance

cables (2)1/2” conduit connector


Operating range Y 2 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20mA




Direction of rotation spring return reversible with cw/ccwmounting control direction selected by switch:CW=CW with a decrease in signalCCW=CCW with a decrease in signal

Position indication visual indicator, 0° to 95°(0° is spring return position)

Auxiliary switch 1 x SPDT 6A (1.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listed(LF24-SR-S US) adjustable 0° to 95° (double insulated)


spring:< 25 sec @-4°F to +122°F [-20°C to +50°C]

< 60 sec @-22°F [-30°C]










Weight LF24-SR 3.1 lbs (1.40 kg.)LF24-SR-S 3.2 lbs (1.45 kg.)


UL

®

(nominal)

0.39" [10]

7.67" [195]

3.66" [93]

1.93"[49]

6.10" [155]

3.15" [80]3.86"[98]

0.256" [6.5]0.98"[25]

4.92" [125]

0.79"[20]

0.5"[12.7]

0.71" [18]

0.74" [18.7]

2.24"[57]

3.23" [82]

0.25" [6.3]




D01

0

54

©

55

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LF

2 to 10 VDC control of LF24-SR (-S) US

LF24-SR (-S) USProportional damper actuator, spring return safety, 24 V for 2 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA control signal.

Output signal of 2 to 10 VDC for position indication.

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extension (K6-1 is required)IND-LF Damper position indicator K6-1 Universal clamp for up to 3/4” diameter shaftsKH-LF Crankarm for up to 1/2” round shaft SGA24 Min. and/or man. positioner in NEMA 4 housingSGF24 Min. and/or man. positioner for flush panel mountingTool-01 10 mm wrenchZG-LF2 Crankarm adaptor kit for LF ZG-112 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod IV, M6415


M6415 type actuators, and new installationsZG-R01 500Ω resistor for 0 to 20 mA control signalZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)ZS-260 Explosion-proof housing

Note: When using LF24-SR (-S) US actuators, only useaccessories listed on this page.

LF24-SR (-S) US Typical Specification Spring return control damper actuators shall be direct coupledtype which require no crankarm and linkage and be capable ofdirect mounting to a shaft up to a 3/4” diameter and center a 1/2”shaft. The actuator must provide proportional damper control inresponse to a 2 to 10 VDC or, with the addition of a 500Ωresistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input from an electronic controlleror positioner.The actuators must be designed so that they maybe used for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe opera-tion. Actuators shall use a brushless DC motor controlled by amicroprocessor and be protected from overload at all angles ofrotation. Run time shall be constant, and independent of torque.A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal shall be provided for positionfeedback or master-slave applications. If required, 1 SPDT aux-iliary switch shall be provided having the capability of beingadjustable. Actuators with auxiliary switch must be construct-ed to meet the requirements for Double Insulation so an elec-trical ground is not required to meet agency listings. Actuatorsshall be UL listed and CSA certified, have a 5 year warranty, andbe manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality ControlStandards. Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

Wiring diagrams

2

1

2

1




Actuators with plenum rated cable do not have num-bers on wires; use color codes instead.

The LF24-SR-S US wire 5 is white.

3

4

®

2


Up to 4 actuators may be connected in parallel. With4 actuators wired to one 500Ω resistor, a +2% shift ofcontrol signal may be required. Power consumptionmust be observed.


A 500Ω resistor converts the 4…20 mA control signalto 2 to 10 VDC. (ZG-R01) Only connect common to neg. (—) leg of control circuits.


4

5

6

3

4 to 20 mA control of LF24-SR (-S) US with 2 to 10 VDC feedback output

Auxiliary switch of LF24-SR-S US

For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., LF24-SR-S US incorporates one built-in aux-iliary switch: 1 x SPDT, 6A (1.5A ) @250 VAC, ULlisted, adjustable 0° to 95°.

Meets UL & CSA requirements without the need of anelectrical ground connection.

5

1

1 4

5

2

3

24 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) Y Input, 2 to 10V

Grn (5) U Output, 2 to 10V

LF24-SR US

Line Volts

2 to 10 VDCControl Signal (–)

(+)

CW CCW

2LF24-SR-S US

1S1

S2

S3

NC

NO0° to 95°

4

To other actuators

6

3

5

24 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot



4 to 20 mAControl Signal

(–)(+)

2 to 10 VDCFeedback Signal

(–)(+)

Ω500Ω

2

LF24-SR US

CW CCW

1

Line Volts

1

W05

7W

058

W05

9

• Torque min. 35 in-lb, for control of air dampers• Built-in adjustable min-position for 3-position and

proportional control

ApplicationFor proportional control with minimum position setpoint, orthree position control of dampers in HVAC systems. Actuatorsizing should be done in accordance with the damper manu-facturer’s specifications.


The actuator operates in response to 24 VAC on wire 2 or 3,which allows the LF24-SR-E US to retrofit or replace Honeywell®

M8405A actuators.

OperationThe LF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides constant torque tothe damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.The LF series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with agraduated position indicator showing 0 to 90°.

The LF24-SR-E US uses a brushless DC motor which is con-trolled by an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) anda microprocessor. The microprocessor provides the intelligenceto the ASIC to provide a constant rotation rate and to know theactuator’s exact position. The ASIC monitors and controls thebrushless DC motor’s rotation and provides a digital rotationsensing function to prevent damage to the actuator in a stall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in itsnormal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.Power consumption is reduced in holding mode.

See wiring diagrams for LF24-SR-E US for more details on 3-position control.

InstallationRefer to LF Section of the Standard Actuation and Accessories,2003 Product Documentation.

Honeywell®

is a trademark of Honeywell Inc.


LF24-SR-E US Proportional damper actuator, 24 V for 2 to 10 VDC (or 4 to 20 mA) control signal or 3-position on/off control, with minimum position potentiometer. Output signal of 2 to 10 VDC for position indication.

Technical Data LF24-SR-E US

Power supply 24 VAC ± 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC ± 10%

Power consumption running: 2.5 W; holding: 1 W


Electrical connection 3 ft, plenum rated cable1/2” conduit connector


Control signal Y 0 to 10 VDC, 0 to 20 mA, or 24 VACfor 3-position on/off control

Input impedance 100 kΩOperating range Y 2 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20mA between

0% and 100%

Feedback output U 2 to 10 VDC (max. 0.7 mA) for 95°



Override function Minimum, Open, Closed via spring Min-position adjusts on actuator coverbetween 0 and 100% (scaled 0 to 1)

Direction of rotation Spring return direction is reversible withCW/CCW mounting.Motor direction selected by switch:CW (Default)=CW with a decreasing signal CCW=CCW with a decreasing signal.

Position indication visual indicator, 0° to 95° scaled as0 to 1 (0° is spring return position)



< 60 sec @-22°F [-30°C]












UL

®

0.39" [10]

7.67" [195]

3.66" [93]

1.93"[49]

6.10" [155]

3.15" [80]3.86"[98]

0.256" [6.5]0.98"[25]

4.92" [125]

0.79"[20]

0.5"[12.7]

0.71" [18]

0.74" [18.7]

2.24"[57]

3.23" [82]

0.25" [6.3]




CCW

D05

9

56

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

57

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LF

Three-Position Control SignalsSwitch A Wire 2-Red (x) Wire 3-White (D) Position

Open** Any Any Closed (via spring)

Closed 24 VAC Open Mid-position*

Closed Open 24 VAC Full Open*

Closed 24 VAC 24 VAC Full Open*

* Desired position achieved by driving actuator with motor. **An example would be to interlock the actuator power supply

with the fan motor starter.

® LF24-SR-E USProportional damper actuator, 24 V for 2 to 10 VDC (or 4 to 20 mA) control signal or 3-position on/off

control, with minimum position potentiometer. Output signal of 2 to 10 VDC for position indication.

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extension (K6-1 is required)IND-LF Damper position indicator K6-1 Universal clamp for up to 3/4” diameter shaftsKH-LF Crankarm for up to 1/2” round shaft Tool-01 10 mm wrenchZG-LF2 Crankarm adaptor kit for LF ZG-112 Mounting bracket for replacing Honeywell

Mod IV, M6415 and M8405 type actuators, and new installations

ZG-LF112 Crankarm adaptor kit for replacing Honeywell Mod IV, M6415 and M8405 type actuators, and new installations

ZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)

Note: When using LF24-SR-E US actuators, only use accessories listed on this page.

LF24-SR-E US Typical Specification Spring return control damper actuators shall be direct coupledtype which require no crankarm and linkage and be capable ofdirect mounting to a shaft up to a 3/4” diameter and center a1/2” shaft. Actuator shall deliver a minimum output torque of35 in-lbs. The actuator must provide proportional damper con-trol in response to a 2 to 10 VDC or, with the addition of a500Ω resistor, a 4 to 20mA control input from an electroniccontroller. Actuator must have a built-in minimum positionpotentiometer. During 3-position control, the actuator shalldrive to minimum position with 24 VAC on wire 2 and drive fullopen with 24 VAC on wire 3. Actuators shall use a brushlessDC motor controlled by a microprocessor and be protectedfrom overload at all angles of rotation. Run time shall be con-stant, and independent of torque. A 2 to 10 feedback signalshall be provided for position feedback or master-slave applica-tions. The actuator must be designed so that they may beused for either clockwise or counterclockwise failsafe opera-tion. Actuators shall be UL listed and CSA certified, have a 5year warranty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001International Quality Control Standards. Actuators shall be asmanufactured by Belimo.Wiring diagrams

1 3

4

5

2

24 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) x + Min-position

Wht (3) D Y Full Open


Line Volts

24 VAC

LF24-SR-E US

.8

.6

.4

.20

MIN

1Default CW CCW

4


Line Volts

24 VAC

5

2Blk (1) Common

Red (2) x + Min-position

Wht (3) D Y Full Open


LF24-SR-E US

.8

.6

.4

.20

MIN

1Default CW CCW

Notes:

1

2


Min-position is adjustable from 0 to 100% with a potentiometer on the actuator cover.

3Actuators with plenum rated cable do not have numbers on wires; use color codes instead.

4

5

For 3-position control set direction of rotation to CW (Default).

Switch A, actuator spring returns when open (e.g., fan interlock).

W17

9

W17

6

3-position control with a SPDT switch ortwo contact closures (e.g. fan, cooling Y).

Min-position with Full Open override (with a single contact closure).

14

5

52

3

24 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot



Line Volts

1

2


Actuators may be connected in parallel. Power consumption and input impedance must be observed

3

4Actuators with plenum rated cable do not have numbers on wires; use color codes instead.

The ZG-R01 500Ω resistor converts the 4-20mA control signal to 2 to 10 VDC


2 to 10 VDCControl Signal (–)

(+)

LF24-SR-E US

.8

.6

.4

.20

MIN

1Default CW CCW

Ω

2 to 10 VDC control of LF24-SR-E US

58

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

SatisfiedControl Position


MinimumControl Resolution

Minimum ReversedControl Deadband

Prior to Normal Control

80 mV

250 mV

LF Actuator responds to a 80 mV signal whennot changing direction from stop position.

LF Actuator responds to a 250 mV signal whenreversing direction from stop position.

®

LF24-SR-E US operates as follows:

1. Set desired minimum position (Example 20%), while leavingthe direction of rotation switch in the CW (default) position.

2. With power applied to wire 2 (red), the actuator will maintainthe desired minimum position.

3. Applying a signal higher than that set by the minimum positionpotentiometer. In this example the input DC voltage must begreater than 3.6 VDC to move the actuator toward full open.

4. Changing the position of the direction of rotation switch toCCW will reverse the actuator’s control logic. If only the posi-tion of the direction of rotation switch is changed, then theactuator will move from 20% to 80%. The scale is now reversefrom the default (e.g. 10VDC moves the actuator to 0).

5. Typically, power to the actuator is interlocked with the fanrelay, which causes the actuator to spring return closed if thefan de-energizes.

Application of the LF24-SR-E US with minimum position potentiometer

The LF24-SR-E US is the newest addition to the LF-series product range featuring dual functionality. A minimum position poten-tiometer has been built into the actuator for cost effective proportional and three position applications, e.g. economizer dampers inrooftop units.

Proportional control with minimum position

Minimum position is adjustable using the built-in potentiometer on the cover of the LF24-SR-E US. Theminimum position can be adjusted anywhere over the full 0 to 95° range of the actuator. A 2 to 10 VDCinput proportionally controls the actuator to the set-point position. The actuator electronics see both the2 to 10 VDC input and the input signal from the potentiometer (minimum position setting). The actuator’selectronics select between the higher of these two signals. Therefore, the actuator moves to the positionof the higher signal, which is the same operating characteristic the Belimo –SR actuators exhibit with theBelimo SGA24 and SGF24 positioners.

LF24-SR-E US Operation

LF24-SR-E US actuators have built-in brushless DC motors which provide better accuracy and longer service life.

The LF24-SR-E US actuators are designed with a unique non-symmetrical deadband. The actuator follows an increasing ordecreasing control signal with a 80 mV resolution. If the signal changes in the opposite direction, the actuator will not responduntil the control signal changes by 250 mV. This allows these actuators to track even the slightest deviation very accurately,yet allowing the actuator to “wait” for a much larger change in control signal due to control signal instability.

Control Accuracy and Stability

.8

.6

.4

.20

1

MIN

59

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LF

LF24-SR-E US Operation®

The LF24-SR-E US will:

• Direct couple to the damper shaft between 3/8” and 3/4”diameter for reduced installation cost.

• Spring return in either CW or CCW direction depending onmounting orientation of the actuator. This feature elimi-nates the need to select a specific model with correctspring return direction.

• Spring returns in <25 seconds @ -4° to +122°F.

• Increase minimum torque output to 35 in-lbs for 40% moretorque than other 3-position actuator solutions.

• Drive to the adjustable minimum position from either thefully Open or Closed position using its brushless DC motorfor improved reliability. Spring returns only during powerloss.

• Drive full stroke in 150 seconds.

• Output a 2 to 10 VDC signal for position feedback

• Control a damper proportionally between minimum positionand full open (2 to 10 VDC input) for additional applications.

• Have dual (3-position and proportional control) wiring dia-grams on actuator label for clear and easy wiring in thefield.

• Consumes only 2.5 W driving to setpoint and 1 W to holdposition, lower than actuators using AC motor technology.

Features of the Belimo Three-Position Solution

Three-Position control using the LF24-SR-E US

By applying the LF24-SR override functionality and the new mini-mum position potentiometer, it is possible to achieve simple three-position control with the LF24-SR-E US.

1. Set desired minimum position (Example 20%), while leaving thedirection of rotation switch in the CW (default) position. Thedirection of rotation switch does not need to be changed forthree-position control, because direction of rotation can bechanged by flipping the actuator.

2. With 24 VAC power applied across wire 1 (black) and 2 (red),the actuator will maintain minimum position.

3. Applying 24 VAC power across wire 1 (black) and 3 (white) overrides the minimum position and moves the actuator to Full Open.

4. With no power applied to actuator, it will spring return (fail-safe)closed.

5. Typically, power to the actuator is interlocked with the fanrelay, which causes the actuator to spring return closed if thefan de-energizes.

Replacing an M8405 actuator

The three-position control functionality of the LF24-SR-E USallows direct replacement of a Honeywell M8405A foot mount-ed economizer actuator.

MountingFor non-direct coupled applications use the ZG-LF112 HWaccessory kit, which includes the KH-LF crankarm and ZG112bracket and an accessory logic module mounting kit. The ZG-112 aligns the plane of the crankarm with that of theHoneywell M8405A. ZG-112 has at least two mounting holesthat match the M805A foot pattern. The logic module mount-ing kit allows for attachment to the end of the LF24-SR-E USactuator. It provides for installation flexibility to place the mod-ule where space is available.

WiringFor proper control logic wiring always refer to the controllermanufactures documentation. See the 2003 ProductDocumentation Standard Actuation and Accessories for properthree position wiring diagram Belimo wiring diagram, page 55.

ZG-LF112 Crankarm adaptor kit

– Bracket and crankarm for replace-ment of Honeywell M8405 actuators.

ZG-112

KH-LFcrankarm

60

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Preliminary steps1. Belimo actuators should be mounted indoors in dry, rela-

tively clean environment free from corrosive fumes. If theactuator is to be mounted outdoors, a protective enclosuremust be used to shield the actuator. (See BelimoMechanical Accessories Doc. 5.2)

2. For new construction work, order dampers with extendedshafts. Instruct the installing contractor to allow space formounting and service of the Belimo actuator on the shaft.

3. For standard mounting, the damper shaft must extend at least3 1/2" from the duct. If the shaft extends less than 3 1/2", theactuator may be mounted in itsshort shaft configuration. If anobstruction blocks access, theshaft can be extended with theAV 10-18 shaft extension. (K6-1 is required)

Installation InstructionsQuick-Mount Visual Instructions

min 3 1/2”[90]

min 3 1/2”[90]

min 3/4”[20]

IND-LF Position Indicator(optional)

min 3/4”[20]


1. Rotate the damper to its failsafe position. If the shaft rotatescounterclockwise, mount the “CCW” side of the actuator out. If itrotates clockwise, mount the actuator with the “CW” side out.

2. If the universal clamp is not on the correct side of the actua-tor, move it to the correct side.



NOTE: Read the “Standard Mounting” instructions, on page 17,for more detailed information.

min 3 1/2”[90]

min 3/4”[20]

®

StandardMounting

Short ShaftMounting


61

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LF



Transformer(s)The LF24 . . actuator requires a 24 VAC class 2 transformerand draws a maximum of 7 VA per actuator. The actuatorenclosure cannot be opened in the field, there are no parts orcomponents to be replaced or repaired.



Multiple actuators, one transformer Multiple actuators may be powered from one transformer pro-vided the following rules are followed:1. The TOTAL current draw of the actuators (VA rating) is


lowed. This means that all No. 1 wires from all actuatorsare connected to the common leg on the transformer andall No 2 wires from all actuators are connected to the hot-leg. Mixing wire No. 1 & 2 on one leg of the transformerwill result in erratic operation or failure of the actuatorand/or controls.


to the negative leg of the control signal. See wiring diagram.

Wire length for LF… actuatorsKeep power wire runs below the lengths listed in the table inFig. A. If more than one actuator is powered from the samewire run, divide the allowable wire length by the number of actu-ators to determine the maximum run to any single actuator. Example for LF24-SR US:

3 actuators, 16 Ga wire 550 Ft ÷ 3 Actuators = 183 Ft. Maximum wire run



Fig. A

Wire Type and Wire Installation TipsFor most installations, 18 or 16 Ga. cable works well with theLF24… actuators. Use code-approved wire nuts, terminalstrips or solderless connectors where wires are joined. It isgood practice to run control wires unspliced from the actuatorto the controller. If splices are unavoidable, make sure thesplice can be reached for possible maintenance. Tape and/orwire-tie the splice to reduce the possibility of the splice beinginadvertently pulled apart.

The LF24… proportional actuators have a digital circuit that isdesigned to ignore most unwanted input signals (pickup). Insome situations the pickup may be severe enough to causeerratic running of the actuator. For example, a large inductiveload (high voltage AC wires, motors, etc.) running near thepower or control wiring may cause excessive pickup. To solvethis problem, make one or more of the following changes:1. Run the wire in metallic conduit.2. Re-route the wiring away from the source of pickup.3. Use shielded wire (Belden 8760 or equal). Ground the





®

LF24 (-S) US

LF120 (-S) US / LF230 (-S) US

LF24-SR (-S) US / LF24-3 (-S) US / LFC24-3-R (-S) US


62

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

1. See Fig. B. Manually move the damper to the fail-safeposition (a) (usually closed). If the shaft rotated counter-clockwise ( ), this is a CCW installation. If the shaftrotated clockwise ( ), this is a CW installation. In aLeft Hand installation, the actuator side marked “CW”faces out, while in a CW installation, the side marked“CCW” faces out. All other steps are identical.

2. The actuator is usually shipped with the universal clampmounted to the “CW” side of the actuator. To test foradequate shaft length, slide the actuator over the shaftwith the side marked “CW” (or the “CCW” side if this is theside with the clamp). If the shaft extends at least 1/8”through the clamp, mount the actuator as follows. If not,go to the Short Shaft Installation section.

3. If the clamp is not on the correct side as determined in step#1, re-mount the clamp as follows. If it is on the correctside, proceed to step #5. Look at the universal clamp. Ifyou are mounting the actuator with the “CCW” side out,position the clamp so that the pointer section of the tab ispointing to 0° (see Fig. C) and the spline pattern of theclamp mates with spline of the actuator. Slip the clamp overthe spline. (Use the same procedure if the “CW” side isout.)

4. Lock the clamp to the actuator using the retaining clip. 5. Verify that the damper is still in its full fail-safe position. (a)6. Mount the spring return actuator to the shaft. Tighten the


Do not tighten the screws.8. Remove the screw from one end of the mounting bracket

and pivot it away from the actuator.9. Loosen the universal clamp and, making sure not to move

the damper shaft, rotate the actuator approximately 5° inthe direction which would open the damper.

10. Tighten the universal clamp to the shaft.11. Rotate the actuator to apply pressure to the damper seals



Standard Mounting / Airtight Damper Procedure


The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 1/2” in diameter by means of its universal clamp, or up to a 3/4” shaft withthe optional K6-1 clamp. A crank arm and several mounting brackets are available for applications where the actuator cannot bedirect coupled to the damper shaft.

The LF series actuators provide true spring return operation for reliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides consistent torque to the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.

The LF series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with a graduated position indicator showing 0 to 90°.

The LF…-S versions are provided with 1 built-in auxiliary switch. This SPDT switch is provided for safety interfacing or signaling, forexample, for fan start-up. The switching function is adjustable between 0° and 95°.

UniversalClamp

0

.2

.4

.6

.8

1

Fig. BFig. C

0124

56

789

LC

b

c

a

.2

.4

.6

.8

1

CW

0

®

StandardMounting

StandardMounting

min 3 1/2”[90]

63

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LF

If the shaft extends at least 3/4” from the duct, follow thesesteps:

1. (See Fig. D) Move damper blades to the fail-safe position (a).2. Determine the best orientation for the universal clamp on the

back of the actuator. The best location would be where youhave the easiest access to the V bolt nuts on the clamp.


4. Lock the clamp to the actuator using the retainer clip.5. Mount the spring return actuator to the shaft. Tighten the


Do not tighten the screws.7. Remove the screw from one end of the mounting bracket

and pivot it away from the actuator.


9. Verify that the damper is still in its full fail-safe position.10. Tighten the universal clamp to the shaft.11. Rotate the actuator to apply pressure to the damper seals

(b) and re-engage the anti-rotation strap (c).12. Tighten all fasteners.13. Use IND-LF accessory if position indication is needed.

Installation Instructions®

Short Shaft Mounting with IND-LF Position Indicator / Airtight Damper Procedure

Initialization of the LF24-SR (-S) US When power is applied, the internal microprocessor recog-nizes that the actuator is at its full fail-safe position anduses this position as the base for all of its position calcula-tions. This procedure takes approximately 15 seconds.During this time you will see no response at the actuator.The microprocessor will retain the initialized zero duringshort power failures of up to 25 seconds. When power isapplied during this period, the actuator will return to normaloperation and proceed to the position corresponding to theinput signal provided. For power failures over 25 seconds,the actuator will be at it fail-safe position and will go throughthe start up initialization again.

Motor position detection (LF24-SR (-S) US only)Belimo brushless DC motors eliminate the need for poten-tiometers for positioning. Inside the motor are three “HallEffect” sensors. These sensors detect the spinning rotorand send pulses to the microprocessor which counts the

pulses and calculates the position to within 1/3 of a revolu-tion of the motor.

Overload protectionThe LF, on-off actuators are electronically protected againstoverload. The LF, On-off actuator have an internal current lim-iter which maintains the current at a safe level which will notdamage the actuator while providing adequate holding torque.

The LF24, modulating, actuators (LF24-SR (-S) US, LF24-3US) are protected against overload by digital technologylocated in the ASIC. The ASIC circuitry constantly monitorsthe rotation of the brushless DC motor inside the actuatorand stops the pulsing to the motor when it senses a stall con-dition. The motor remains energized and produces full ratedtorque during stall conditions. The actuator will try to move inthe direction of the stall every 2 minutes, for a period of 32minutes. After this, the actuator will try again every 2 hours.

Operational Information for LF24-SR (-S) US Proportional Actuators

min 3/4”[20]


Fig. D

0124

56

789

LC

b

c

a

.2

.4

.6

.8

1

CW

0

®

Short ShaftMounting

Short ShaftMounting

64

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

The LF actuators are provided with an adjustable stop to limitthe rotation of the actuator. This function works in conjunctionwith the universal clamp or the optional position indicator.The adjustable stop is needed when rotation of less than 95°is required. The LF actuator can be indefinitely stalled, in anyposition, without harming the actuator.

Using the universal clamp:1. Loosen the end stop fastening screw using a #2 Phillips

screwdriver. 2. Move the stop block so the bottom edge of the block lines

up with the number corresponding to the desired degreesof rotation. (example: 45 degrees of rotation = .5)

3. Lock the block in place with the fastening screw.4. Check the actuator for proper rotation.

Using the IND-LF position indicator with adjustable stop:Note: preferred method if short shaft mounting is used.1. With the actuator in its fail-safe position, place the IND-LF

Position Indicator so that it points to the 0 degree position.2. Loosen the end stop fastening screw using a #2 Phillips

screwdriver.3. Move the stop block so the bottom edge of the block lines

up with the number corresponding to the desired degreesof rotation. (example: 45 degrees of rotation = .5)

4. Lock the block in place with the fastening screw.5. Check the actuator for proper rotation.

0

.2

.4

.6

.8

1

Mechanical Angle of Rotation Limiting


®

LF24-SR US actuators have built-in brushless DC motors which provide better accuracy and longer service life.

The LF24-SR US actuators are designed with a unique non-symmetrical deadband. The actuator follows an increasing ordecreasing control signal with a 80 mV resolution. If the signal changes in the opposite direction, the actuator will not responduntil the control signal changes by 200 mV. This allows these actuators to track even the slightest deviation very accurately,yet allowing the actuator to “wait” for a much larger change in control signal due to control signal instability.







80 mV

200 mV

LF Actuator responds to a 80 mV signal whennot changing direction from stop position.

LF Actuator responds to a 200 mV signal whenreversing direction from stop position.

LF24-3 (-S) US and LF24-SR (-S) US actuators have a direction ofrotation switch on the cover labeled “CW-CCW”. Switch positionindicates start point. For the LF24-SR, with the switch in position“CW”, the actuator rotates clockwise with a decrease in voltage orcurrent. With the switch in position “CCW”, the actuator rotatescounterclockwise with a decrease in voltage or current.

The LF24-3 (-S) US and LF24-SR (-S) US actuators rotate clock-wise when the switch is in the “CW” position and power is appliedto wire #3. When power is applied to wire #4 the actuator rotatescounter clockwise.

Rotating the direction of rotation switch to “CCW” reverses thecontrol logic.

During checkout, the switch position can be temporarilyreversed and the actuator will reverse its direction. This allowsthe technician a fast and easy way to check the actuator oper-ation without having to switch wires or change settings on thecontroller. When the check-out is complete, make sure theswitch is placed back to its original position.


65

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LF


The …-S model actuators are equipped with an adjustableauxiliary switch used to indicate damper position or to inter-face additional controls or equipment. Switching positions canbe set over the full 0 to 95° rotation simply by setting a switchon the actuator.

1. Set desired switch position. (Example 60%)2. As the actuator rotates, the switch indicator moves from .6

(60%) toward 0 (0%). When the indicator passes 0 theswitch contact between S1 and S2 is broken and the con-tact between S1 and S3 is made.

Auxiliary Switches

.8

.6

.4

.20

1

S1S2

S3

S1S2

S3

Non-direct Mounting Methods

KH-LF crankarm including retaining ring.

KH-LFFor shafts up to 1/2”

ZG-112

(pushrod not supplied with kit)

KG6 ball joint anduniversal crankarm

(not included)

KG6 ball joint(not included)

KH-LFcrankarm

KH-LFcrankarm



Voltage Resistive load Inductive load

120 VAC 6 A 3 A250 VAC 6 A 1.5 A

Switch Rating

66

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

®Startup and CheckoutInstructions For LF24-SR (-S) US

Procedure

Remove power to reset actuator.Re-apply power.Apply control signal to actuator.




Check input signal with a digital voltmeter (DVM). Make sure the input iswithin the range of the actuator. ForLF24-SR US this is 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA. Note: The input signalmust be above the 2 VDC or 4 mA tohave the actuator move.

Loosen the nuts on the V-bolt andmove the damper by hand from fullyclosed to fully open.



Expected Response





Input voltage or current should be±1% of what controller's adjust-ment or programming indicate.




Go To Step…



to driveStep 1





Step 6



See Note 2


Go To Step…




Step 4


Step 4


Step 4

Step 5



Find cause of damperjam and repair. Movedamper back to thefully closed positionand tighten the nuts.

Step 1



Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.





LF24-SR (-S) US Electrical check-out procedure

67

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LF

® Notes/Work Pad

68

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Applications

Actuator ismounted tovortex frame.and directcoupled tolinkage shaft.

Linkage is part of inletvane assembly suppliedby manufacturer.

GM Series Direct Coupled Actuator ®

Minimum 320 in-lb torque** For damper areas up to 80 sq-ft*

Torque: 320 in-lb 266 in-lb 320 in-lb

Power supply : 24 VAC


Control signal: proportional 2 to 10 VDC †

Feedback signal: 2 to 10 VDC †

Running time 135 sec constant †


18 GA appliance cable


GM Series – at a glance

* 4 in-lb/ft2 damper torque loading. Parallel blade. No edge seals. 320 in-lb of actuator torque.**GM24-SR US Only is 266 in-lb†Variable: Refer to Multi-Function Product Documentation for details.

For large damper areas and inlet guide vanes.

GM

24 U

S (p

. 70)

GM

24-S

R U

S (p

. 72)

GM

24-M

FT U

S

69

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

GM

A CLOSER LOOK…

GM Series Direct Coupled Actuator®


UL

Cut labor costs with simple direct coupling– The Belimo Concept.

Check damper position easily with clear indicator.


Easy mechanical stop to adjust angle of rotation. (add ZDB-GM accessory).

Push-button manual override speeds installation.

Need to change control direction? Do it easily with a simple switch.

Microprocessor-controlled brushless DC motor increases actuator life span and reliability, provides constant running time.

Rugged NEMA 2 housing provides protection from splashing water.

3 ft. appliance cable and conduit connectoreases installation.

Microprocessor controlled.





©

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

GM24 US On-off, reversible, non-spring return, direct coupled, tri-state, 24 V

®


ApplicationFor modulating or on-off control of dampers in HVAC systems.Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the dampermanufacturer’s specifications. Control is on-off from an auxil-iary contact of a fan motor contactor, or a manual switch. Thedirection of rotation is reversible, for use with a floating pointtype control. The actuator mounts directly to the damperoperating shaft with a universal V-bolt clamp assembly.

OperationThe anti-rotation strap supplied with the actuator will prevent lat-eral movement of the actuator. The angle of rotation is mechan-ically limited to 95°. When reaching the damper or actuator endposition, the motor stops automatically. The gears can be man-ually disengaged by simply pressing down the spring loaded but-ton on the actuator cover. When this button is pressed down,the damper blades can be adjusted by hand. The position of theactuator is indicated by means of a scale reading 0 to 1.

The GM uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by anApplication Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The ASIC moni-tors and controls the actuator’s rotation and provides a digitalrotation sensing function to prevent damage to the actuator in astall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in itsnormal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.


2.12" [54]

1.02" [26]

3.15"[80]

4.88" [124]

1.18

" [3

0]

8.43" [214]

9.49" [241]

15/32" to 3/4" [12 to 20]

3/8" to 5/8" [9 to 16]

Technical Data GM24 US


Power consumption 3 W





Torque 320 in-lb [36 Nm]starting in June 2002

Direction of rotation reversible with switch A/B

Position indication 0 to 1 and reversible indicator

Running time 135 sec. independent of load




Housing NEMA type 2

Housing rating UL94V-0 (flammability rating)







UL

70

D00

6

©

71

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

GM

GM24 USOn-off, reversible, non-spring return, direct coupled, tri-state, 24 V

®

AccessoriesKH8 Universal crankarmKG10 Ball jointNSV24 Battery back-up moduleP… Feedback potentiometerSZS Mid-position switchS1,S2 Auxiliary switchTool-01 10mm wrenchZDB-GM Angle of rotation limiter (Series 2)ZG-H2 Actuator operator handleZG-GM2 Crankarm adaptor kitZG-100 Universal mounting bracketZG-101 Universal mounting bracketZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracketZG-103 Universal mounting bracketZG-104 Universal mounting bracketZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)ZS-260 Explosion-proof housingZS-300 NEMA 4X housing

NOTE: When using GM24 US actuators, use only theaccessories listed on this page.

Wiring diagrams

GM24 US - Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupledtype which require no crankarm and linkage. Actuators shallbe UL listed and CSA certified, have a 2 year warranty, andbe manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality ControlStandards. Actuators shall have reversing switch and manualoverride on the cover. Actuators shall use a brushless DCmotor and be protected from overload at all angles of rotation.Run time shall be constant and independent of torque.Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

On-Off control of GM24 US

1 Provide overload protection and disconnect asrequired.


Tri-State control of GM24 US


Actuator may also be powered by 24 VDC.2 2

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

a opena closed

The indication of direction is valid for switch position A.

1 Common

2 +

3 +

A

BGM24 US

Line Volts

a

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

The indication of direction is valid for switch position A.

1 Common

2 +

3 +

A

BGM24 US

Line Volts

W07

0

Multiple actuators mounted to shaft

Model Maximum quantity per shaft

GM24 US 2

GM24-SR US 2

GM24-SR US Proportional damper actuator, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V for 2 to 10 VDC and 4 to 20 mA control signal.

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

®



The actuator mounts directly to the damper operating shaftwith a universal V-bolt clamp assembly.

OperationThe actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10 VDC or, withthe addition of a 500Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control inputfrom an electronic controller or positioner. A 2 to 10 VDCfeedback signal is provided for position indication or master-slave applications.

The anti-rotation strap supplied with the actuator will prevent lat-eral movement of the actuator. The angle of rotation is mechan-ically limited to 95°. When reaching the damper or actuator endposition, the motor stops automatically. The gears can be man-ually disengaged by simply pressing down the spring loaded but-ton on the actuator cover. When this button is pressed down,the damper blades can be adjusted by hand. The position of theactuator is indicated by means of a scale reading 0 to 1.

The GM uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by anApplication Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The ASIC moni-tors and controls the actuator’s rotation and provides a digitalrotation sensing function to prevent damage to the actuator in astall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its nor-mal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.


Technical Data GM24-SR US

Power supply 24 VAC ± 20% 50/60 Hz 24 VDC ± 10%






Input impedance 100 kΩ (0.1 mA), 500ΩFeedback output U 2 to 10 VDC, 0.5 mA max


Torque min 266 in-lb [30 Nm]

Direction of rotation reversible with switch A/BA = CW with an increase in voltageB = CCW with an increase in voltage

Position indication 0 to 1 and reversible indicator

Running time 135 sec. independent of load

Humidity 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing



Housing NEMA type 2








UL

72

2.12" [54]

1.02" [26]

3.15"[80]

4.88" [124]

1.18

" [

30]

8.43" [214]

9.49" [241]

15/32" to 3/4" [12 to 20]

3/8" to 5/8" [9 to 16]D

012

©

73

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

GM

®

AccessoriesIRM-100 Input scaling moduleKH8 Universal crankarmKG10 Ball JointNSV24 Battery back-up moduleP… Feedback potentiometerPTA-250 Pulse width modulation interfaceSGA24 Min. and/or manual positioner in NEMA 4 housingSGF24 Min. and/or man. positioner for flush panel mountS1,S2 Auxiliary switchTool-01 10mm wrenchZAD24 Digital position indicationZDB-GM Angle of rotation limiter (Series 2)ZG-H2 Actuator operator handleZG-GM2 Crankarm adaptor kitZG-R01 500Ω resistor for 4 to 20 mAZG-100 Universal mounting bracketZG-101 Universal mounting bracketZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracketZG-103 Universal mounting bracketZG-104 Universal mounting bracketZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)ZS-260 Explosion-proof housingZS-300 NEMA 4X housing

NOTE: When using GM24-SR US actuators, use only theaccessories listed on this page.

Wiring diagrams

GM24-SR US - Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupledtype which require no crankarm and linkage. Actuators shallbe UL listed and CSA certified, have a 2 year warranty, andbe manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality ControlStandards. Actuators shall have reversing switch and geardisengagement button on the cover. Actuators shall use abrushless DC motor and be protected from overload at allangles of rotation. Run time shall be constant and independ-ent of torque. The actuator must provide proportional dampercontrol in response to a 2 to 10 VDC or, with the addition of a500Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input from an electroniccontroller or positioner. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal shallbe provided for position indication or master-slave applica-tions. Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

2



4 to 20 mA control of GM24-SR US with 2 to 10 VDC feed-back output.

0 to 10 VDC control of GM24-SR US

2

1

3


Connect actuator common (wire 1) to negative (–) legof control circuits only.

Up to 4 actuators may be connected in parallel. With 4actuators wired to one 500Ω resistor, a +2% shift ofcontrol signal may be required. Power consumptionmust be observed.

The 500Ω resistor converts the 4 to 20 mA control sig-nal to 2 to 10 VDC.


4

5

GM24-SR USProportional damper actuator, non-spring return, direct coupled,

24 V for 2 to 10 VDC and 4 to 20 mA control signal.

Multiple actuators mounted to shaft

Model Maximum quantity per shaft

GM24 US 2

GM24-SR US 2

Control Signal (+)2 to 10 VDC (–)

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y Input, 2 to 10V

5 U Output 2 to 10V

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

A

B GM24-SR US

Line Volts

1

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y Input, 2 to 10V

5 U Output 2 to 10V


2

5

4

3 A

B GM24-SR US

Control Signal (+)0 to 20 mA (–)


Ω500Ω

To other actuators

Line Volts

1

W07

2

W07

3

74

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.


®

10

5

0

10

5

0

min. 3/4"

[20 mm]

min. 2 1/2"

[63 mm]

Installation instruction for damper shafts with a minimumlength of 2 1/2 inch [63 mm] for GM series actuators

1. Move the damper to closed position.2. Position actuator onto damper shaft.3. Hand tighten nuts on V-clamp.4. If necessary, bend anti-rotation strap at both ends to fit

between damper frame.5. Fix anti-rotation strap to damper frame.6. Disengage gears with manual release button on casing.7. Turn motor clamp back to 5° before closed position and

allow gears to re-engage.8. Align the actuator at 90° to the damper shaft and verify

that the damper is still in the fully closed position.9. Tighten nuts on the V-clamp.

Installation instruction for damper shafts with a minimumlength of 3/4 inch [20 mm] or bridging of damper frame

1. Disengage gears with manual release button on casing(Manual operation).

2. Turn actuator clamp back to 5° before closed position andallow gears to re-engage.

3. Pull out universal clamp after removing retaining clip.4. Fix universal clamp onto damper shaft.5. Move damper into closed position.6. Position actuator onto universal clamp.7. Refit retaining clip.8 If necessary bend or cut anti-rotation strap on either side

to fit the damper frame.9. Slide the stud of the anti-rotation strap into slot on actua-

tor base and fix it with screws to damper frame.

Actuator is mounted to vortexframe. and direct coupled tolinkage shaft.

2nd actuator

Linkage is part ofinlet vane assemblysupplied by manu-facturer.

Installation instruction for mounting GM actuators oninlet guide vanes.

1. Rotate vortex jackshaft fully counterclockwise.2. Depress manual release button on actuator and rotate

universal clamp fully counterclockwise.3. Position the actuator on the jackshaft so that the actua-

tor is in a position to mount to the anti-rotation strap.4. Position and mount the anti-rotation strap to the vortex

frame so that the mounting stud is one-sixteenth inchfrom the bottom of the mounting slot of the actuator.

5. Verify that rotation of the actuator is correct for full oper-ation of the vortex blades. Adjust linkage if necessary.Fully tighten the V-bolt nuts.

6. If additional torque is required, add second actuator tothe other end of the shaft assembly.

75

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

GM


1. Slip the actuator's universal clamp over the damper shaft.Make sure that the bottom of the actuator (metal side) istoward the duct and the controls on the cover are accessi-ble. Place the actuator in the desired mounting position.

2. Turn the damper shaft until the blades are fully closed.3. Hand tighten the two nuts on the GM24 . . universal clamp. 4. Slide the stud of the anti-rotation bracket into the slot in the

bottom of the actuator. Bend the strap as needed to sup-port the rear of the actuator.

5. Fasten the strap to the duct with two screws. We recom-mend No. 8 self tapping sheet metal screws.

6. Loosen the two nuts on the universal clamp. Disengage theactuator gear train by pressing the “manual override button”(half round black button). Keeping the gears disengaged,and the damper fully closed, rotate the clamp until it isabout 5° from the closed position.

7. Tighten the two nuts on the clamp with a 10 mm wrench(Belimo Tool-01). Use 9 to 11 ft-lb of torque.

The damper is now fully closed but the actuator is 5° from fullyclosed. This is called “pre-loading” the actuator. When theactuator is powered and sent to the closed position: it will putits full torque on the shaft compressing the edge and bladeseals. This ensures that the damper will meet its leakage rating.The actuator is electronically protected from overload and will not bedamaged.

Manual overrideThe Belimo GM24 . . actuators have a black, half round “manualoverride button” located on the top of the housing. Press this buttonand the gear train is disengaged so the damper shaft can be movedmanually. Release the button and the gear train is re-engaged.

Testing the installation without power1. Disengage the gear train with the manual override button

and move the shaft from closed to open to closed. Ensurethat there is no binding and that the damper goes fullyopen and closes with 5° of actuator stroke left.

2. Correct any problems and retest.

General Information

Standard Mounting

If more torque is required than one GM can provide, a second actuator may be installed on the same shaft. See page 78 for wiring details.

Multiple Actuator Mounting

Preliminary steps1. Belimo actuators should be mounted indoors in a dry, relatively clean environment free from corrosive fumes. If the actuator is

mounted outdoors, a protective enclosure must be used to shield the actuator. 2. For new construction work, order dampers with extended shafts. Instruct the installing contractor to allow space for mounting the

Belimo actuator on the shaft.

For replacement of existing gear train actuators, there are two options: A. From a performance standpoint, it is best to mount the actuator directly onto the damper shaft. B. If the damper shaft is not accessible, mount the GM24-. . actuator with a ZG-GM2 crankarm kit, and a mounting bracket

(ZG-100, ZG-101, ZG-103, ZG-104)

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

23

4 6 8 105 7 9

Dam

per

Are

a (s

q. f

t.)


Torque LoadingChart









®

76

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.


WARNING The wiring technician must be trained and experi-enced with electronic circuits. Disconnect power supply beforeattempting any wiring connections or changes. Make all con-nections in accordance with wiring diagrams and follow allapplicable local and national codes. Provide disconnect andoverload protection as required. Use copper, twisted pair,conductors only. If using electrical conduit, the attachment tothe actuator must be made with flexible conduit.

Always read the controller manufacturer's installation liter-ature carefully before making any connections. Follow allinstructions in this literature. If you have any questions, contactthe controller manufacturer and/or Belimo.

Transformer(s)The GM24… actuators requires a 24 VAC class 2 transformer anddraws a maximum of 6 VA for the GM24 US and 7VA for theGM24-SR US. The actuator enclosure cannot be opened in thefield, there are no parts or components to be replaced orrepaired.


CAUTION: It is good practice to power electronic or digital con-trollers from a separate power transformer than that used foractuators or other end devices. The power supply design inour actuators and other end devices use half wave rectification.Some controllers use full wave rectification. When these twodifferent types of power supplies are connected to the samepower transformer and the DC commons are connected togeth-er, a short circuit is created across one of the diodes in the fullwave power supply, damaging the controller. Only use a singlepower transformer to power the controller and actuator if youknow the controller power supply uses half wave rectification.

Multiple actuators, one transformer Multiple actuators may be powered from one transformer pro-vided the subsequent rules are followed:1. The TOTAL current draw of the actuators (VA rating) is less

than or equal to the rating of the transformer.2. Polarity on the secondary of the transformer is strictly fol-

lowed. This means that all No. 1 wires from all actuatorsare connected to the common leg on the transformer and allNo 2 wires from all actuators are connected to the hotleg.Mixing wire No. 1 & 2 on one leg of the transformer will resultin erratic operation or failure of the actuator and or controls.

Multiple actuators, multiple transformersMultiple actuators positioned by the same control signal may bepowered from multiple transformers provided the subsequentrules are followed:1. The transformers are properly sized.2. All No. 1 wires from all actuators are tied together and tied

to the negative leg of the control signal. See wiring diagramon page 16.

Wire length for GM… actuatorsKeep power wire runs below the limits listed in Fig. 1 or 2. Ifmore than one actuator is powered from the same wire run,divide the allowable wire length by the number of actuators todetermine the maximum run to any single actuator. Example for GM24-SR US: 3 actuators, 16 Ga wire

500 Ft ÷ 3 Actuators = 166 Ft. Maximum wire run

Maximum wire length:GM24 US

Wire Size Max. Feet. Wire Size Max. Feet12 Ga 1500 Ft. 18 Ga 375 Ft.14 Ga 925 Ft. 20 Ga 200 Ft16 Ga 550 Ft. 22 Ga 100 Ft

Figure 1

GM24-SR US


Figure 2

Wire Type and Wire Installation TipsFor most installations, 18 or 16 Ga. cable works well with theGM24…actuators. Use code approved wire nuts, terminalstrips or solderless connectors where wires are joined. It isgood practice to run control wires unspliced from the actuatorto the controller. If splices are unavoidable, make sure thesplice can be reached for possible maintenance. Tape and/orwire tie the splice to reduce the possibility of the splice beinginadvertently pulled apart.

The GM24… proportional actuators have a digital circuit that isdesigned to ignore most unwanted input signals (pickup). Insome situations the pickup may be severe enough to causeerratic running of the actuator. For example, a large inductiveload (high voltage AC wires, motors, etc.) running near thepower or control wiring may cause excessive pickup. To solvethis problem, make one or more of the following changes:1. Run the wire in metallic conduit.2. Reroute the wiring away from the source of pickup.3. Use shielded wire (Belden 8760 or equal). Ground the

shield to an earth ground. Do not connect it to the actuatorcommon.

Reversing switch, “A/B”The GM… actuators have a reversing switch on the coverlabeled “A/B”. With the switch in position “A”, the GM24-SR USactuator rotates clockwise with an increase in voltage or cur-rent. With the switch in Position “B”, the actuator rotates coun-terclockwise with an increase in voltage or current.

The GM24 US, on-off, tri-state actuators when set for switchposition “A”, rotates clockwise when power is applied to wire#2, and counterclockwise when power is applied to wire #3.

The GM24 US, on-off, tri-state actuators when set for switchposition “B”, rotates counterclockwise when power is applied towire #2, and clockwise when power is applied to wire #3.


®

77

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

GM

General Wiring Instructions (continued)


General The GM Series actuators utilize brushless DC motor technolo-gy. The GM uses this motor in conjunction with an ApplicationSpecific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The ASIC monitors and con-trols the actuator’s rotation and a digital rotation sensing func-tion to prevent damage to the actuator.

Brushless DC motor operation Belimo’s brushless DC motor spins by reversing the poles ofstationary electromagnets housed inside of a rotating permanentmagnet. The electromagnetic poles are switched by a specialASIC circuit developed by Belimo. Unlike the conventional DCmotor, there are no brushes to wear or commutators to foul.

Overload protection The GM Series actuators are protected from overload at allangles of rotation. The ASIC circuit constantly monitors therotation of the DC motor inside the actuator and stops the puls-es to the motor when it senses a stall condition. The DC motorremains energized and produces full rated torque to the load.This helps ensure that dampers are fully closed and that edgeand blade seals are always properly compressed.

During checkout, the switch position can be temporarilyreversed and the actuator will reverse its direction. This allowsthe technician a fast and easy way to check the actuator opera-tion without having to switch wires or change settings on thethermostat. When the check-out is complete, make sure theswitch is placed back to its original position.

The Position Indicator can be reversed depending on thedesired direction of rotation of the damper.

1. Pull out the whitepointer.

2. Turn the positionindication card.

3. Replace the whitepointer.

Electrical Operation

GM24 US Series actuators have built-in brushless DC motors which provide better accuracy and longer service life.

The GM24-SR US is designed with a unique non-symmetrical deadband. The actuator follows an increasing or decreasing controlsignal with a 40 mV resolution. If the signal changes in the opposite direction, the actuator will not respond until the control signalchanges by 200 mV. This allows the GM24-SR US to track even the slightest deviation very accurately, yet allowing the actuator to“wait” for a much larger change in control signal due to control signal instability.


0.1.2

.3.4 .5 .6 .7

.8.91 0

.1.2

.3.4.5.6.7

.8.91

Satisfied Control Position

Satisfied Control Position

Minimum Control Resolution

Minimum Reversed Control Deadband


40 mV

200 mV

Actuator responds to a 40 mV signal when not changing direction from stop position.

Actuator responds to a 200 mV signal when reversing direction from stop position.

78

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

0

5

10

0

5

10

0

5

10

TOPTOP

70%

Rotation Limitation GM Series

Non-Direct Mounting Methods

1. Disengage gears with manual release button on casing(Manual operation).

2. Turn actuator clamp back to the “0” position for CW opera-tion when power is applied. “10” position for CCW operation

3. Pull out clamp after removing retaining clip. Note positionindicator is at 0. (A)

4. Locate the angle of rotation limiter (ZDB-GM) on the actua-

tor so that its mark sign lines up with the degree graduationon the actuator face which corresponds with the requiredrotation. (Every division represents approximately 10% ofthe angle of rotation). (B)Example: 3 divisions away from the end position means:100% - (3 divisions x 10%) = 70%

5. Position clamp onto actuator and refit retaining clip. (C)

ZG-GM2 with ZG-100 Universal Mounting Bracket, usinglinkage to operate the damper blade.

Actuator is mounted to a universal mounting bracket or field-fabricated bracket. Connect to inlet vanes with linkage.

ZG-GM2 Damper linkage kit

GM. . type actuator

Front ofactuator

Rear of actuator

➀

➃

➃

➄

➁

➂

ZG-GM2 Kit contains:➀ front fixing attachment➁ rear fixing attachment➂ crankarm➃ 2 bolts M6x16➄ 7 sheet metal screws

2 KG10 ball joints

Wall mounting

ZG-104

A B C


79

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

GM

Startup and CheckoutInstructions For GM24-SR US

Procedure



Turn reversing switch to the correctposition.


Check input signal with a digital voltmeter (DVM). Make sure the input iswithin the range of the actuator. ForGM24-SR US this is 0 to 10 VDC or0 to 20 mA. Note: The input signal must be abovethe 2 VDC or 4 mA to have the actu-ator move.

Use the manual override button tomove the damper by hand from fullyclosed to fully open.



Expected Response









Go To Step…



to driveStep 1





Step 6



See Note 2


Go To Step…




Step 4


Step 4


Step 4

Step 5



Find cause ofdamper jam and

repair.Step 1



Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.





GM24-SR US Electrical check-out procedure

®

80

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AM Series Direct Coupled Actuator

Areas of Application

Versatile and Powerful Minimum 160 in-lb torque in a compact package.

For damper areas up to 40 sq-ft*.

®

3/4" minAV1

1

2

3

4

5

5

4

1

3

1

Kit specification2 ball joints KG8 (20204)Spacer (22127)Crank arm (22165)Front mountingbracket (22167)Rear mountingbracket (20346)

2 Screws M6 x 16 (43600)7 Self-tapping screws 4,2 x 13 (43990)

2

Direct Coupledup to 3/4” standard shaftsor Jackshafts to 1.05”(with K4-1 Clamp)

Mounting withlinkage (ZG-AMaccessory kit)

Short shaftmounting (withAV1 clamp)

Fits Jackshafts also.

Torque: 160 in-lb 133in-lb

Power supply: 24 VAC/DC

Control signal: on-off/floating On/Off


Control signal: 0… 135Ω or Honeywell®

Electronic Series 900 to 20 V phasecut

Feedback: 2 to 10 VDC

Running time: 150 sec constant

Running time: 110 to 150 sec load dependent




Conduit fitting

Appliance cable

Built-in auxiliary switches

UL listed, CSA certified, CE

Auxiliary switches and feedback potentiometer ....................................(p.88- 90)Installation instructions ......(p. 91–95) General wiring ..............(p. 93) Start-up and checkout (p. 96)


AM

24 U

S (p

. 82)

AM

24-S

US

(p. 8

2)

AM

24-S

R U

S (p

. 84)

SM

24-S

US

(p. 8

8)

AM

24-P

C U

S (p

. 86)

AM Series – at a glance

81

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AM

AM Series Direct Coupled Actuator®


UL

20% more torque than SM.

Fits inside 4” damper frame.

Full stroke overload protection.

Electronic deadband for accuracy and stability (proportional models).

Easy direct coupled mounting, including jackshafts to 1.05”.

Check damper position with clear position indicator.

Set actuator to compensate for damper seal wear andcompression (proportional models).

Constant running time aids control loop tuning (proportional models).

Added flexibility with built-in mechanical stops.

Fully adjustable, built-in auxiliary switches (AM24-S US only).

Auxiliary switch add-on mounts on clamp,includes conduit fitting (SA1 US, SA2 US).

Push button manual override

Easily reverse control direction with switch on housing

3’ cable speeds installations

Micro processor controlled Brushless DC Motor





A CLOSER LOOK…

©

82

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AM24 (-S) US On-off/ floating point control, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V

ApplicationFor on-off and floating point control of dampers in HVAC sys-tems. Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with thedamper manufacturer’s specifications.

The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 3/4”in diameter by means of its universal clamp, or up to a 1.05”jackshaft with the optional K4-1 clamp. A crankarm and sever-al mounting brackets are available for applications where theactuator cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft.

OperationThe actuator is not provided with and does not require anylimit switches, but is electronically protected against overload.The angle of rotation is mechanically limited to 95°. Whenreaching the damper or actuator end position, the actuatorautomatically stops. The gears can be manually disengagedwith a button on the actuator cover. The position of the actua-tor is indicated by a visual pointer. The anti-rotation strap sup-plied with the actuator will prevent lateral movement.

The AM24-S US version is provided with two built-in auxiliaryswitches. These SPDT switches are provided for safety inter-facing or signaling. The switching function is adjustablebetween 0 and 95°.

Torque min. 160 in-lb, for control of air dampers.

AM24 USAM24-S US

Technical Data AM24 US, AM24-S US


Power consumption 2.5 W

Transformer sizing 4.5 VA (Class 2 power source)

Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA, appliance cable, 1/2” conduit connector


Angle of rotation 0-95° adjustable stops


Direction of rotation reversible with switch “CCW-CW”

Position indication clip-on indicator

Running time 110 to 150 sec. for 0 to 160 in-lb

Manual override external push button




Housing type NEMA 2 (IP54 with cable entry down)

Housing material rating UL94-5V (flammability rating)

Noise level less than 45 dB (A)




Weight 2.8 lbs [1.3 kg]

AM24-S US

Auxiliary switches adj. 0° to 95°, 2 x SPDT 3A (0.5A) @24 VAC

8.75" [222]

7.5" [191]1.81" [46]

3.62"[92]

.90"[23]

3.0"[76]

1.77"[45]

K4-2 US (supplied)




K4-1 US (optional)


K4 US (optional)




UL

AM24 US

®

D01

3

©

83

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AM

12

424 VAC Transformer


Blk (1) Common

Wht (2) +

Wht (3) +

AM24 (-S) USCCW CW

Line Volts

–

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

0° to 95°

0° to 95°

NO

NO

NC

NC

3

4

AM24 (-S) US

AM24 (-S) US On-off/ floating point control, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V

AM24 (-S) US - Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupled typewhich require no crank arm and linkage and be capable of directmounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter. Actuators shallbe UL and CSA listed, have a 5 year warranty, and be manu-factured under ISO 9001 International Quality ControlStandards. Actuators shall have reversing switch and manualoverride on the cover, and be protected from overload at allangles of rotation. If required, two adjustable SPDT auxiliaryswitches shall be provided (AM24-S US). Actuators shall be asmanufactured by Belimo.

Auxiliary switch wiring for AM24-S US

3

4

2


Actuators may also be powered by 24 VDC.

For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup,etc., AM24-S US incorporates two built-in auxiliary switch-es: 2 x SPDT, 3A (0.5A) @24 VAC, UL listed,adjustable between 0° and 95°.


Notes

Wiring diagrams

AccessoriesAV 1 Damper shaft extension for AM AV10-18 Universal shaft extensionK4 US On All Accessories lists in the bookK4-1 US Clamp for 3/4” to 1.05” jackshaftsK4-H Hex shaft clamp, for 3/8”-5/8” shaftsKH-AM CrankarmSA1 US, SA2 US Auxiliary switchesPA… US 140 Ω, 500 Ω, 1000 Ω, 2800 Ω feedback

potentiometers Tool-01 10 mm wrenchZG-AM Crank arm adaptor kitZG-100 Mounting bracket ZG-101 Mounting bracket ZG-103 Mounting bracket ZG-104 Mounting bracketZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)ZS-260 Explosion-proof housingZS-300 NEMA 4X housing

12

424 VAC Transformer

a opena closed


Blk (1) Common

Wht (2) +

Wht (3) +

AM24 (-S) USCCW CW

a

Line Volts

–

On-off control

Floating point or on-off control

®

W07

4

W07

6

W07

5

84

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AM24-SR US Proportional damper actuator, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V, for 2 to 10 VDC and 4 to 20 mA control signal

ApplicationFor proportional modulation of dampers in HVAC systems.Actual actuator sizing should be done in accordance with thedamper manufacturer’s specifications.

The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 3/4”in diameter by means of its universal clamp, or up to a 1.05”jackshaft with the optional K4-1 clamp. A crankarm and severalmounting brackets are available for applications where theactuator cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft.

OperationThe actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10 VDC, or, with theaddition of a 500Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input from anelectronic controller or positioner. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signalis provided for position indication or master-slave applications.

The actuator has a constant running time of 150 seconds. Afunctional test of the actuator-damper assembly may be doneby pressing in the manual override button, this will activate theactuators test mode and cycle the actuator fully closed andback to control point. The microprocessor will correct for com-pression of tight close-off gaskets with age, providing the actua-tor is not on its mechanical stops.

A 2 to 10 VDC feedback (U) is provided with full 8 volt outputrange proportional to the operational rotation of the damper. Adigital rotation sensing circuit protects the actuator in a stall any-where in its 95° operating range without the need of limit switches.Add on auxiliary switches are easily fastened directly onto theactuator body for signalling and switching functions.

8.75" [222]

7.5" [191]1.81" [46]

3.62"[92]

.90"[23]

3.0"[76]

1.77"[45]

K4-2 US (supplied)




K4-1 US (optional)


K4 US (optional)


Technical Data AM24-SR US

Power supply 24 VAC, ± 20%, 50/60 Hz 24 VDC, ±10%

Power consumption 2.5 W running, 1.2 W holding

Transformer sizing 5 VA (Class 2 power source)


Input impedance 100kΩ (0.1 mA), 500Ω for 4 to 20mA

Feedback output 'U' 2 to 10 VDC, 0.5 mA max



Torque min 160 in-lb (18 Nm)

Direction of rotation reversible with switch “CCW-CW”CW with a decrease in voltageCCW with a decrease in voltage

Position indication clip on indicator



Running time 150 secs. constant, independent of load

Run time stability ± 5%


Operating temperature -22 to +122° F (-30 to +50° C)

Storage temperature -40 to +176° F (-40 to +80° C)

Housing NEMA 2 (IP54 with cable entry down)

Housing material UL 94-5V (flammability rating)





Weight 2.8 lbs. (1.3kg.)




UL

AM24-SR US

®

D00

7

©

85

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AM

AM24-SR USProportional damper actuator, non-spring return, direct coupled,

24 V, for 2 to 10 VDC and 4 to 20 mA control signal

AM24-SR US - Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupledtype which require no crank arm and linkage and be capableof direct mounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter.Actuators shall be UL and CSA listed, have a 5 year warran-ty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001 International QualityControl Standards. The actuator must provide proportionaldamper control in response to a 2 to 10 VDC, or, with theaddition of a 500Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input froman electronic controller or positioner. Actuators shall havereversing switch and gear disengagement button on thecover, and be electronically protected from overload at allangles of rotation. Actuators shall respond to 2 to 10VDCoutput relative to position regardless of the amount of damperrotation. Run time shall be constant and independent oftorque. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal shall be provided forposition indication or master-slave applications. Actuatorsshall be as manufactured by Belimo.

Wiring diagrams

2




The ZG-R01 500Ω resistor converts the 4 to 20 mAcontrol signal to 2 to 10 VDC, up to 2 actuators may be connected in parallel.Only connect common to neg. (—) leg of control circuits.

4

5

3

AccessoriesAV 1 Damper shaft extension for AM AV10-18 Universal shaft extensionK4-1 US Clamp for 3/4” to 1.05” jackshaftsK4-H Hex shaft clamp, for 3/8”-5/8” shaftsKH-AM CrankarmSA1 US, SA2 US Auxiliary switchesPA… US 140 Ω, 500 Ω, 1000 Ω, 2800 Ω feedback

potentiometers PTA-250 Pulse width modulation interfaceTool-01 10 mm wrenchSGA24 Min. and/or man. positioner in NEMA 4 housingSGF24 Min. and/or man. positioner for flush panel mountingZAD24 Digital position indicationZG-R01 500Ω resistor for 0 to 20 mA control signalZG-AM Crank arm adaptor kitZG-100 Mounting bracket ZG-101 Mounting bracket ZG-103 Mounting bracket ZG-104 Mounting bracketZS-100 Weather shieldZS-150 Weather shieldZS-260 Explosion-proof housingZS-300 NEMA 4X housing

®

1

2

3

24 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) Hot +


Wht (5) U Output, 2 to 10V

AM24-SR US

Line Volts

2 to 10 VDC

Control Signal (–)

(+)

–

4

To other actuators

3

5

24 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) Hot +




(–)(+)


(–)(+)

Ω500Ω

2AM24-SR US

1

Line Volts

–

W07

7

AM24-PC US Proportional damper actuator, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V, for 0 to 20 V phasecut control signal

86

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

ApplicationFor proportional modulation of dampers in HVAC systems.Actual actuator sizing should be done in accordance with thedamper manufacturer’s specifications.

The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 3/4”in diameter by means of its universal clamp, or up to a 1.05”jackshaft with the optional K4-1 clamp. A crankarm and severalmounting brackets are available for applications where theactuator cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft.

OperationThe actuator operates in response to 0 to 10 V phasecut controlinput from an electronic controller or positioner. A 2 to 10 VDCfeedback signal is provided for position indication or master-slaveapplications.

The actuator has a constant running time of 150 seconds. Afunctional test of the actuator-damper assembly may be doneby pressing in the manual override button, this will activate theactuators test mode and cycle the actuator fully closed andback to control point. The microprocessor will correct for com-pression of tight close-off gaskets with age, providing the actua-tor is not on its mechanical stops.

A 2 to 10 VDC feedback (U) is provided with full 8 volt outputrange proportional to the operational rotation of the damper. Adigital rotation sensing circuit protects the actuator in a stall any-where in its 95° operating range without the need of limit switches.Add on auxiliary switches are easily fastened directly onto theactuator body for signalling and switching functions.

8.75" [222]

7.5" [191]1.81" [46]

3.62"[92]

.90"[23]

3.0"[76]

1.77"[45]

K4-2 US (supplied)




K4-1 US (optional)


K4 US (optional)


Technical Data AM24-PC US


Power consumption 2.5 W running, 1.2 W holding


Operating range Y 0 to 10 V, phasecut

Input impedance 8kΩ (50 mW)

Feedback output 'U' 2 to 10 VDC, 0.5 mA max



Torque min 160 in-lb (18 Nm)

Direction of rotation reversible with switch “CCW-CW”CW with a decrease in voltageCCW with a decrease in voltage




Running time 150 secs. constant, independent of load



Operating temperature -22 to +122° F (-30 to +50° C)


Housing NEMA 2 (IP54 with cable entry down)










UL

AM24-PC US

D00

7

©

®

AM24-PC USProportional damper actuator, non-spring return, direct coupled,

24 V, for 0 to 20 V phasecut control signal

87

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AM

AM24-PC US - Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupledtype which require no crank arm and linkage and be capableof direct mounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter.Actuators shall be UL and CSA listed, have a 5 year warran-ty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001 International QualityControl Standards. The actuator must provide proportionaldamper control in response to a 0 to 10 V phasecut controlinput from an electronic controller or positioner. Actuatorsshall have reversing switch and gear disengagement buttonon the cover, and be electronically protected from overload atall angles of rotation. Actuators shall respond to 2 to 10VDCoutput relative to position regardless of the amount of damperrotation. Run time shall be constant and independent oftorque. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal shall be provided forposition indication or master-slave applications. Actuatorsshall be as manufactured by Belimo.

Wiring diagrams

AccessoriesAV 1 Damper shaft extension for AM AV10-18 Universal shaft extensionK4-1 US Clamp for 3/4” to 1.05” jackshaftsK4-H Hex shaft clamp, for 3/8”-5/8” shaftsKH-AM CrankarmSA1 US, SA2 US Auxiliary switchesPA… US 140 Ω, 500 Ω, 1000 Ω, 2800 Ω feedback

potentiometers PTA-250 Pulse width modulation interfaceTool-01 10 mm wrenchSGA24 Min. and/or man. positioner in NEMA 4 housingSGF24 Min. and/or man. positioner for flush panel mountingZAD24 Digital position indicationZG-R01 500Ω resistor for 0 to 20 mA control signalZG-AM Crank arm adaptor kitZG-100 Mounting bracket ZG-101 Mounting bracket ZG-103 Mounting bracket ZG-104 Mounting bracketZS-100 Weather shieldZS-150 Weather shieldZS-260 Explosion-proof housingZS-300 NEMA 4X housing

1

2

3

24 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) Hot +

Wht (3) Y Input, 0 to 20V phasecut


AM24-PC US

Line Volts

2 to 20 VDC

Control Signal (–)

(+)

–

W18

5

1

2

3


Actuators may be connected in parallel. Power consumption and input impedance must be observed.


®

88

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

SM24-S US On-off, non-spring return, direct coupled, fast running, 24 V with built-in auxiliary switches

®

Technical Data SM24 -S


Power consumption AC Stand-by 1.2 W Full Load 9.5 W

Transformer sizing 12 VA

Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA cable 1/2" conduit connector


Torque at rated voltage 133 in-lb [15 Nm]

Direction of rotation reversible with switch A / B

Position indication 0 . . . 10 and reversible indicator

Running time Load Free approx. 16 secondsFull Load approx. 19 seconds

Auxiliary switch Open/Closed 2 SPST 2A, 24 V


Housing type NEMA type 2

Housing material rating UL 94V-0 (flammability rating)



Noise level 45 dB (A)


Service life minimum 10,000 operations

Weight 3.3 lbs. [1.5 kg]

Wiring diagram

+ +SM24-S

24 VAC/VDC

(–) (+)

1 2 3 4 5 6 Wire No

Parallel connection of severalactuators is possible:

The indication of direc-tion is valid for switch position A

For end position indication, interlock control,etc., SM24-S incorporates 2 built-in auxil-iary switches 2 x SPST (2A) 24 V UL listed

a open

a closed

a

CO

M


ApplicationFor on-off, fast-acting, control of dampersup to approximately 35 ft2 [3 m2] (based on4 in-lb per sq. ft.). Actual actuator sizingshould be done in accordance with thedamper manufacturer’s specifications.Control is on-off, two position, from an auxil-iary contactor or a manual switch.The direction of rotation is reversible by theuse of a switch located on the actuatorcover.

OperationThe actuator is, by means of a specialclamp, directly mounted onto the dampershaft.The universal mounting bracket suppliedwith the actuator will prevent lateral move-ment of the actuator. The damper actuatoris not provided with and does not requireany limiting switches, but is protectedagainst overloading.The angle of rotation is mechanically limitedto 95°. When reaching the damper or actua-tor end position, the motor stops automati-cally.The gears can be manually disengaged bysimply pressing down the spring loaded but-ton on the actuator cover. When the buttonis pressed down, the damper blades can beadjusted by hand. The position of the actua-tor is indicated by means of a scale reading0 . . . 10.For end position indication, interlock control,etc., two built-in, non-adjustable auxiliaryswitches are provided with the actuator.

AccessoriesZG-SM2 Crank arm adaptor kitZDB Angle of rotation limiterZG-100 Universal mounting bracketZG-101 Universal mounting bracketZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracketZG-H2 Actuator operator handleZS-100 Weather shield, metalZG-150 Weather shield, polycarbonate

Torque min. 133 in-lb, for control ofdamper surface up to 35 ft2.

80° 10°


UL

25/32 [20]

3/8 to 3/4 [10…20]3/8 to 5/8 [10…16]

21/32 [17]

2 9/16 [65]

4 27/32 [123]

1 3/

16 [

30]

7 23/32 [196]

8 15/16 [227]

D05

4

89

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AM

Mounting Instructions

1. Remove pointer assembly from the actuator. Press downthe manual override button and rotate the actuator fullycounter-clockwise.

2. Invert SA… US switch and turn the driver disk fully clock-wise as indicated.

3. Slide SA… US switch onto actuator and check for the cor-rect mating of the driver disk to the universal clamp. Securewith screw.

4. Adjust switch dials as necessary

5. Remount the white plastic pointer only onto SA… US switch.

Auxiliary Switches SA1 US, SA2 US For the direct coupled actuator AM2…

OperationThe SA1 US and SA2 US auxiliary switches are used to indi-cate when a desired position of a damper is reached or to inter-face additional controls for a specific control sequence. Theyare modular units that mount directly onto the AM type actua-tors and held in place with a prefitted screw. A driver disk isattached to the actuator clamp and offers direct transmission ofthe actuator position to the microswitch operating cams. Theswitching points can be set over the full scale of 0 to 1 simplyby adjusting the slotted discs.

®

Wiring Diagrams

SA2 US

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

SA1 US

NC

NO

S1

S2

S3

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

1

2 3 4 5

Voltage Resistive Inductive120 6.0 A 5.0 A250 6.0 A 2.5 A

Technical Data SA1 US SA2 US

No. of switches 1xSPDT 2xSPDT

Switching capacity 6 A (2.5A) 250 VAC

Switching point adjustable over full actuator rotation 0 to 1. Pre-setting with scale possible.



Ambient temperature -22° F to +122° F [-30° C to +50° C]

Storage temperature -40° F to +176° F [-40° C to +80° C]


Housing material rating UL 94-5VA (flammability rating)


Weight 8 oz [225 g] 9.3 oz [265 g]


90

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Feedback Potentiometer PA…US For the direct coupled actuator AM2…

®

ApplicationThe PA… US feedback potentiometers are used with AM actu-ators to provide a resistive signal which varies with damperposition. The PA… US units are applied with commercial pro-portional temperature controllers to provide feedback of thedamper position, or with electric or electronic meters to pro-vide position indication. The signal can also be used as apositioner for parallel operation of multiple actuators.

OperationThe PA… US feedback potentiometer is mounted onto thedamper actuator. A driver disk is attached to the actuatorclamp and offers direct transmission of the actuator to thepotentiometer.



2. Invert PA… US and turn the driver disk fully clockwise asindicated.

3. Slide PA… US onto actuator and check for the correct mat-ing of the driver disk to the universal clamp. Secure withscrew.

4. Remount the white plastic pointer only, from the pointerassembly, onto PA… US.Types

PA500 US Feedback potentiometer 500ΩPA1000 US Feedback potentiometer 1000ΩPA2800 US Feedback potentiometer 2800Ω

Technical Data PA… US

Resistance values as above

Output 1W

Tolerance ± 5%

Linearity ± 2%

Resolution min. 1%

Residual resistance max. 5% on both sides





Housing NEMA type 2

Housing rating UL94-5V (flammability rating)




Weight 8.8 oz [250 g]

Electrical protection Class 2 circuits

P1

P2

P3

PA…

0

10

Wiring diagram

1 2

3 4

91

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AM

AM Series… Installation InstructionsQuick-Mount Visual Instructions

1. Turn damper blade to its fully closed position. With manualoverride button depressed, rotate actuator clamp to about1/16” - 1/8” between actuator stop and clamp, depending ondamper seal design. Slide actuator over shaft and finger-tighten nuts.

2. Using a screwdriver, Select clockwise or counterclockwise rota-tion. (Example shown is for clockwise closing damper). Slideanti-rotation bracket up under actuator engaging center cut-outon actuator back. Secure bracket with self-tapping screws.

3. Tighten the two nuts on the universal clamp with 10 mmwrench, 6-8 ft-lb torque. (On dampers with edge seals, actuatorwill compress damper blades when reaching end position forair-tight damper.)

4. Adjust end stops, if required.

1 2

3 4

min. 48

10...16

10...20

min. 1.88” [48]

3/8”…3/4”3/8”…5/8”

R

L

M

M

1/4"

9 Nm

➀

➁ ➂

1/16" - 1/8"

®

Installation InstructionsActuator sizing/preliminary steps

Preliminary steps1. Belimo actuators should be mounted indoors in dry, relatively clean environment free from corrosive fumes. If the actuator is to

be mounted outdoors, a protective enclosure must be used to shield the actuator. (See Belimo Mechanical Accessories Doc. 5.2)2. For new construction work, order dampers with extended shafts. Instruct the installing contractor to allow space for mounting and

service of the Belimo actuator on the shaft.3. The AM Series actuator requires a minimum shaft length of 1.88”.

Use the AV1 for short shaft installations on 1/2” diameter shafts.

Replacement or mounting of optional mounting clamp1. Squeeze tabs of retaining ring and lift off of actuator.2. Remove clamp.3. Replacement clamp has an alignment mark.

Match this mark with the similar mark on the actuator and mount clamp.4. Squeeze tabs of retaining ring and fit it into the retaining slot.

Note: If retaining ring is not fully seated, the clamp may come loosefrom the actuator.

Alignmentpoints

92

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

®

AV1

AM actuators which maybe used on one shaft:

MaxQuantity

Model Per Shaft

AM24 (-S) US 4

AM24-SR US 4

93

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AM


WARNING The wiring technician must be trained and experi-enced with electronic circuits. Disconnect power supply beforeattempting any wiring connections or changes. Make all con-nections in accordance with wiring diagrams and follow allapplicable local and national codes. Provide disconnect andoverload protection as required. Use copper, twisted pair,conductors only. If using electrical conduit, the attachment tothe actuator must be made with flexible conduit.


Transformer(s)The AM Series actuators require a 24 VAC class 2 transformerand draw a maximum of 5 VA. The actuator enclosure cannotbe opened in the field, there are no parts or components to bereplaced or repaired.



Multiple actuators, one transformer Multiple actuators may be powered from one transformer pro-vided the following rules are followed:1. The TOTAL current draw of the actuators (VA rating) is less


lowed. This means that all No. 1 wires from all actuatorsare connected to the common leg on the transformer and allNo 2 wires from all actuators are connected to the hotleg.Mixing wire No. 1 & 2 on one leg of the transformer willresult in erratic operation or failure of the actuator and orcontrols.

Multiple actuators, multiple transformersMultiple actuators positioned by the same control signal may bepowered from multiple transformers provided the following rulesare followed:1. The transformers are properly sized.2. All No. 1 wires from all actuators are tied together and tied


Wire length for AM Series actuatorsKeep power wire runs below the limits listed in the Fig. 1. Ifmore than one actuator is powered from the same wire run,divide the allowable wire length by the number of actuators todetermine the maximum run to any single actuator.



Fig. 1

Example for AM… US: 3 actuators, 18 Ga wire 450 Ft ÷ 3 Actuators = 150 Ft. Maximum wire run.

Wire Type and Wire Installation TipsFor most installations, 18 or 16 Ga. cable works well with theAM24 type actuators. Use code approved wire nuts, terminalstrips or solderless connectors where wires are joined. It isgood practice to run control wires unspliced from the actuatorto the controller. If splices are unavoidable, make sure thesplice can be reached for possible maintenance. Tape and/orwire tie the splice to reduce the possibility of the splice beinginadvertently pulled apart.

Overload protection All Belimo actuators are electronically protected against over-load. In the AM series an electronic circuit maintains the cur-rent at a level which will not damage the motor while providingadequate holding torque.

Operational Information for AM Series Proportional Actuators (AM24-SR US)

InitializationThe proportional models of the AM series (AM24-SR US,) must gothrough an initialization procedure to learn the zero signal position.When the power is first applied to the actuator, or the gear releasebutton is depressed, the actuator will move to its zero signal position.After the actuator learns this, it will drive to its control position.

Note: If power is lost to the actuator, and the actuator is moved byuse of its manual override, the actuator must be re-initialized whenpower is returned, by pushing the override button.

Motor position detection Belimo brushless DC motors eliminate the need for potentiome-ters for positioning. Inside the motor are three “Hall Effect”sensors. These sensors detect the spinning rotor and sendpulses to the microprocessor which counts the pulses and cal-culates the position to within 1/3 of a revolution of the motor.

®

94

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Adjust angle-of-rotationin steps of 2.5°


Manual Override

Installation InstructionsFeature operation

Mechanical Angle of Rotation Limiting

The adjustable stops are needed when there is no damper stopor if you want the damper to stop rotating before it reaches itsstops. The AM actuator can be indefinitely stalled in any posi-tion without harm. 1. Loosen the two end stops with a No. 2 Phillips head screwdriver

being careful not to unscrew the captive nut under the slot.2. Move the stops (in 2.5° steps) to the desired position and re-

tighten the screws.

AM actuators have a reversing switch on the cover labeled“CW-CCW”. Switch position indicates start point. For theAM24-SR US, with the switch in position “CW”, the actuatorrotates clockwise with an decrease in voltage or current. Withthe switch in position “CCW”, the actuator rotates counterclock-wise with an decrease in voltage or current.

The AM24 (-S) US rotates clockwise when the switch is in the “CW”position and power is applied to wire #2. When power is applied towire #3 the actuator rotates counter clockwise.Rotating the “CW/CCW” switch to “CCW” reverses the controllogic.


CW M

CCW M

CW M

CCW M

2 VDC 10 VDC10 VDC 2 VDC

A button on the actuator cover disengages the gear train so thedamper shaft can be moved manually. Release the button and thegear train is re-engaged.

Use the manual override to test the installation withoutpower. For tight shut-off the damper should close with 5°of actuator stroke left.

CW M

CCW M

Gear release button

AM Series proportional actuators have built-in brushless DC motors which provide better accuracy and longer service life.

The AM Series actuators are designed with a unique non-symmetrical deadband. The actuator follows an increasing ordecreasing control signal with a 80 mV resolution. If the signal changes in the opposite direction, the actuator will not responduntil the control signal changes by 200 mV. This allows these actuators to track even the slightest deviation very accurately,yet allowing the actuator to “wait” for a much larger change in control signal due to control signal instability.







80 mV

200 mV

AM Actuator responds to a 80 mV signal whennot changing direction from stop position.

AM Actuator responds to a 200 mV signalwhen reversing direction from stop position.

AM24-SR US, AM24-SRS US

®

95

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AM

Installation Instructions and AccessoriesFeature operation and additional accessories

AV1 Short shaft adaptor

Used on 3/8” to 3/4" diametershafts that are shorter than1.875" and mounting space isminimal.

AV 10-18 Shaft extension

For damper shafts 3/8 to 11/16 in[10 to 18] dia or 3/8 to 9/16 in [10to 14] square.

Mounting brackets

SA…US Auxiliary switches, PA…US Feedback potentiometers

SGA24/SGF24

Minimum and/or manual positioner(electronic), SGA24 is enclosed ina NEMA 4 housing. The SGF24 isfor flush panel mounting.

240

SGA24SGF24

1

2

3

4

5

5

4

1

3

1

Kit specification2 ball joints KG8 (20204)Spacer (22127)Crank arm (22165)Front mountingbracket (22167)Rear mountingbracket (20346)

2 Screws M6 x 16 (43600)7 Self-tapping screws 4,2 x 13 (43990)

2

3/4" minAV1

9.44”

ZG-100 Mounting bracket ZG-101 Mounting bracket ZG-103 Mounting bracket ZG-104 Mounting bracket

R

L

M

M

1

. 8

. 6. 4

. 2

0

0. 2

. 4

. 6

. 81

R

L

M

M

1

.8

.6.4

.2

0

0.2

.4

.6.81

R

L

M

M

R

L

M

M

Adjustable Auxiliary Switches

The AM24-S US actuator is equipped with two adjustable auxiliaryswitches used to indicate damper position or to interface additionalcontrols or equipment. Switching positions can be set over the fullscale of 0 to 95° simply by setting switch on the actuator cover.

Method A1. Push the manual override button and rotate the clamp to the

“0” position.2. Set the desired switch position: example: 20% of rotation is

“.2” on the setting scale.3. Check the switch operation. As the indicator passes the “0”

switch position, the contact between S1 and S2, or S4 andS5, is broken and the contact between S1 and S3, or S5and S6 is made.

Method B1. Use manual override to position universal clamp to desired

switch position.2. Turn switch pointer to “0”.

(switch function may also be monitored by a meter for precise setting)

0% 100%

20%

1

0.2

.4.6.8

S4

S6S5

S4

S6S5

1

0.2.4.6

.8

S1

S3S2

S1

S3S2

Voltage Resistive load Inductive load

24 VAC 3 A 0.5 A

Switch Rating

Clamp is in the “0” position

Accessories

®

ZG-AM - Crank arm adaptor kit

For use when the actuator cannot be mounted directly to the damper shaft.

96

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Startup and Checkout ®

Procedure




Push manual override button. (Ifclamp is at min signal position, movedamper to fully closed position)


Check input signal with a digital voltmeter (DVM). Make sure the input iswithin the range of the actuator. ForAM24SR US this is 0 to 10 VDC or0 to 20 mA. Note: The input signal must be abovethe 2 VDC or 4 mA to have the actu-ator move.




Expected Response




Actuator will drive to 0 positionand back to control position






Go To Step…



to driveStep 1






Step 7



See Note 2


Go To Step…




Step 4


Step 4


Step 4

Step 5

Step 6




repair.Step 1



Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Note 1 Check that the transformer(s) are sized properly. • If a common transformer is used, make sure that polarity is observed on the secondary. This means connect all No. 1 wires to one leg of

the transformer and all No. 2 wires to the other leg of the transformer. • If multiple transformers are used with one control signal, make sure all No. 1 wires are tied together and tied to control signal negative (-).• Controllers and actuators must have separate 24 VAC/VDC power sources.


AM24SR US Electrical check-out procedure

97

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

AM

® Notes/Work Pad

98

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NM Series – at a glance

NM Series Direct Coupled Actuator ®


Medium Volume Control Dampers.

Damper is mountedthrough a wall with controlshaft exposed, but spacetoo tight to direct couple. Actuator mounted on field-

fabricated plate to controla cone-type VAV damper

KH-8 Crankarm -final position must bevertical when damperis fully open.

Mount actuatorat a 45° angleto allow for full90° crankarmrotation.

ZG-NM3

ZG-NM3

ZG-105

NM24…

ZG-NM4

NM24…

NM24…

NM

24 U

S (p

. 100

)

NM

24-S

R U

S (p

. 102

)

Torque 70 in-lb

Power supply 24 VAC

Control signal on-off/floating point

Control signal modulating - 2 to 10 VDC

Control signal pulse width modulating

Control signal start/span adjustable

Running time 75 to 150 sec for 0 to 70 in-lb

Running time 150 sec independent of load.


Angle of rotation limiting (mechanical)

External manual override

Auxiliary switches ..............(p. 104) Installation instructions ..(p. 105–110)General wiring ..................(p. 107) Start-up and checkout ..(p. 111)


Application Methods

99

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NM

A CLOSER LOOK…

NM Series Direct Coupled Actuator®


UL


Check damper position from a distance withclear position indicator.

Don’t worry about actuator burn-out. Belimo is overload-proof throughout rotation.

Enjoy added flexibility with easy mechanical stop to adjust angle of rotation.


Simple manual override button helps you getup and running faster.

Auxiliary switch accessory (SN1,SN2) is easy to use, offers feedback or signal for additional device.

3 ft. plenum rated cable eases installationConduit connector provided: one less detailto worry about.

Microprocessor-controlled brushless DC motor increases actuator life span and reliability, provides constant running time independent of load. (Proportional actuators)





©

100

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NM24 USOn-off, reversible, non-spring return, direct coupled, floating point, 24 V

®

ApplicationFor modulating or on-off control of dampers in HVAC sys-tems. Actual actuator sizing should be done in accor-dance with the damper manufacturer’s specifications.Control is on-off from an auxiliary contact of a fan motorcontactor, or a manual switch. The direction of rotation isreversible, for use with a floating point type control. Theactuator mounts directly to the damper operating shaft witha universal V-bolt clamp assembly.

OperationThe universal mounting bracket supplied with the actuatorwill prevent lateral movement of the actuator. The damperactuator is not provided with and does not require any limitswitches, but is protected against overloading. The angleof rotation is mechanically limited to 95°. When reachingthe damper or actuator end position, the motor stops auto-matically. The gears can be manually disengaged by sim-ply pressing down the spring loaded button on the actuatorcover. When this button is pressed down, the damperblades can be adjusted by hand. The position of the actua-tor is indicated by a visual pointer. Auxiliary switches are easily fastened directly onto theactuator body for signalling and switching functions.

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Damper shaft ExtensionSN1,SN2 Auxiliary switchesZG-H2 Actuator operator handleZG-NM3 Crank arm adaptor kit for ZG-105ZG-NM4 Crank arm adaptor kitZG-NMSA-1 Shaft adaptor for short shaftsZG-105 Mounting Bracket

Technical Data NM24 US




Electrical connection 3 FT, 18 GA plenum rated (UL CL2P) 1/2 in. conduit connector


Angle of rotation 0 to 95°, adjustable stops


Damper area (Note 1) 18 Sq Ft

Direction of rotation reversible with switch L/R


Manual override button on actuator

Running time 75 to 150 sec for 0 to 75 in-lb [0 to 8Nm] (0 to 90°)




Housing NEMA type 2



Noise level less than 35 db (A)


Quality Standard ISO 9001



Torque min. 70 in-lb, for control of air damperssurfaces up to 18 sq. ft.


UL

Note 1 Damper area is calculated using approximately 4 in-lb/sq ft of damper area. Thisis an average torque requirement for good quality dampers operating under a 1"WC pressure drop. Check damper specifications for exact torque requirements.

2 3/32"[58]

5/32"[9]

3 3/16"[81]

7/32"[5.2]

5 1/2" [140]

6 13/32'' [163]

1 1/16" [27]

7/8" [22]

3/8" to 3/4"

3/8" to 5/8"

D01

6

101

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NM

NM24 USOn-off, reversible, non-spring return, direct coupled, floating point, 24 V

®

Bulk packaging - NM24.1 US

The bulk packaging option for the NM… series has been discontinued as of October 2003

Part # 11333 (UOM:1)

T-Type bracketThese are included in the single-actuatorpackages.

L-Type bracket 21731

Part #: 12503-00001 (UOM:24)(includes 21731) shipped separately upon request.

NM24 US - Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupledtype which require no crank arm and linkage. Actuators shallbe UL and CSA listed, have a 5 year warranty, and be man-ufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality ControlStandards. Actuators shall have reversing switch and manu-al override on the cover, and be protected from overload atall angles of rotation. Actuators shall be as manufactured byBelimo.

12324 VAC Transformer

a opena closed

The indication of direction is valid for switch position R.

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

NM24 US L R

a

Line Volts

–

24 VAC Transformer


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

NM24 USL R

Line Volts

21 3

Wiring Diagrams

On-Off control of NM24 US Tri-State control of NM24 US

2

3


Actuators are provided with color coded wires. Wirenumbers are provided for reference.


Notes:

W15

0

W12

0

102

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NM24-SR USProportional damper actuator, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V, for 2 to 10 VDC and 4 to 20 mA control signal

®

ApplicationFor proportional modulation of dampers in HVAC sys-tems. Actual actuator sizing should be done in accor-dance with the damper manufacturer’s specifications.The actuator mounts directly to the damper operatingshaft with a universal V-bolt clamp assembly.

OperationThe actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10 VDC, 2 to10 V phasecut or, with the addition of a 500Ω resistor, a4 to 20 mA control input from an electronic controller orpositioner. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal is providedfor position indication or master-slave applications. A built-in microprocessor automatically tests for theamount of rotation required to modulate the damper fullyclosed to fully open. The actuator will self-adjust to runat a consistent running time of 150 seconds, and rescalethe input signal so the entire 8 volt control range is usedto provide maximum resolution of the control system.The microprocessor will also correct for compression oftight close-off gaskets with age, providing the actuator isnot on its mechanical stops. A functional test of the actu-ator-damper assembly may be done by pressing in themanual override button, this will activate the actuatorstest mode and cycle the actuator fully open and closed.A 2 to 10 VDC feedback (U) is provided with full 8 voltoutput range proportional to the operational rotation ofthe damper.A digital rotation sensing circuit protects the actuator in astall anywhere in its 95° working range without the needof limit switches.Auxiliary switches are easily fastened directly onto theactuator body for signalling and switching functions.

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Damper shaft extensionSN1,SN2 Auxiliary switchesZG-H2 Actuator operator handleZG-NM3 Crank arm adaptor kit for ZG-105ZG-NM4 Crank arm adaptor kitZG-NMSA-1Shaft adaptor for short shaftsZG-105 Mounting bracket

Technical Data NM24-SR US





Input impedance 100kΩ (0.1 mA), 500ΩFeedback output 'U' 2 to 10 VDC, 0.7 mA max

Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA plenum rated (UL CL2P) cable,1/2” conduit connector


Torque (Note 1) min 70 in-lb (8 Nm)

Damper area (Note 2) 18 sq ft

Direction of rotation reversible with Switch “L-R”L = CW with an increase in voltageR = CCW with an increase in voltage


Manual override button on actuator


Running time (35-95°) 150 seconds independent of max. angle ofrotation or torque

Running time (0-35°) 0-150 seconds proportional to max. angle ofrotation (Note 3)



Ambient temperature -4 to +122° F (-20 to +50° C)


Mounting position not sensitive to position

Housing NEMA 2







Note 1 Minimum torque is produced at minimum voltage, minimum temperature.

Note 2 Damper area is calculated using approximately 4 in-lb/sq ft of damper area. Thisis an average torque requirement for good quality dampers operating under a 1"WC pressure drop. Check damper specifications for exact torque requirements.

Note 3 The on board microprocessor measures the actuators full stoke on startup. It then adjusts the actuator speed to ensure 150 second run time for 35°-95°.Below 35° stroke, the speed is constant and run time varies with rotation angle.


Torque min. 70 in-lb, for control of air damperssurfaces up to 18 sq. ft.


UL

2 3/32"[58]

5/32"[9]

3 3/16"[81]

7/32"[5.2]

5 1/2" [140]

6 13/32'' [163]

1 1/16" [27]

7/8" [22]

3/8" to 3/4"

3/8" to 5/8"

D01

6

©

103

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NM

NM24-SR USProportional damper actuator, non-spring return, direct coupled,


®

1

42524 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) Y 2 to 10V Input

Grn (4) U 2 to 10V Output

NM24-SR USL R

Line Volts

2 to 10 VDCControl Signal

(–)(+)

1

4

25

3

6

24 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) Y 2 to 10V Input Grn (4) U 2 to 10V Output

NM24-SR USL R

Line Volts


(–)(+)


(–)(+)

Ω500Ω

Wiring diagrams

Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupledtype which require no crank arm and linkage. Actuators shallbe UL and CSA listed, have a 5 year warranty, and be man-ufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality ControlStandards. Actuators shall have reversing switch and geardisengagement button on the cover, and be electronically pro-tected from overload at all angles of rotation. Actuators shallrespond to 2 to 10VDC output relative to position regardless ofthe amount of damper rotation. Actuators shall have brushlessDC motor. Run time shall be constant and independent oftorque and angular rotation between 35° and 95°. A 2 to 10VDC feedback signal shall be provided for position indicationor master-slave applications. Actuators shall be as manufac-tured by Belimo.

2 to 10 VDC control of NM24-SR US 4 to 20 mA control of NM24-SR US with 2 to 10 VDC feedback output

2

1

3

4

5

6



Connect actuator common (Wire 1) to Negative (–) legof control circuits only.

Actuator and controller must have separate transformers.


The 500Ω resistor converts the 4 to 20 mA controlsignal to 2 to 10 VDC.

Bulk packaging - NM24-SR.1 US

The bulk packaging option for the NM… series has been discontinued as of October 2003

Part # 11533 (UOM:1)

Notes:

L-Type bracket 21731

W09

4

W09

5

Part #: 12503-00001 (UOM:24)(includes 21731) shipped separately upon request.

T-Type bracketThese are included in the single-actuatorpackages.

104

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.



2. Invert SN . switch and turn the driver disk fully clockwise asindicated.

3. Slide SN . switch onto actuator and check for the correctmating of the driver disk to the universal clamp. Securewith screw.

4. Adjust switch dials as necessary

5. Remount the white plastic pointer only onto SN . switch.

SN1, SN2 Auxiliary SwitchesFor the direct coupled actuator NM 2…

OperationThe SN1 and SN2 auxiliary switches are used to indicatewhen a desired position of a damper is reached or to interfaceadditional controls for a specific control sequence. They aremodular units that mount directly onto the NM type actuatorsand held in place with a prefitted screw. A driver disk isattached to the actuator clamp and offers direct transmissionof the actuator position to the microswitch operating cams.The switching points can be set over the full scale of 0 to 10simply by adjusting the slotted discs.

NOTE: will not mount to NM actuators manufactured priorto May 1994

Technical Data SN1 SN2

No. of switches 1xSPDT 2xSPDT

Switching capacity 6 A (2.5A) 250 VAC

Switching point adjustable over full actuator rotation 0 to 10. Pre-setting with scale possible.

Electrical connection 3 ft. 18 GA cable [1 m long 0.75mm2]


Ambient temperature -22° F to +122° F [-30° C to +50° C]

Storage temperature -40° F to +176° F [-40° C to +80° C]


Housing material rating UL 94-V0 (flammability rating)

Weight 4 oz [125 g] 5.6 oz [175 g]

®

Wiring Diagrams

SN2

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

SN1

NC

NO

S1

S2

S3

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

1

2 3 4 5

Voltage Resistive Inductive120 6.0 A 5.0 A250 6.0 A 2.5 A

105

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NM


®


1. Turn damper blades to their fully closed position. Slideactuator onto damper shaft. Tighten the nuts on the univer-sal clamp only finger-tight at this time.

2. Slide anti-rotation mounting strap up under actuator so thatit engages actuator at the center cut-out. Secure to duct-work with self-tapping screws.

3. Loosen nuts on clamp. Press manual override button.Rotate the clamp to about 5° from the closed position (1/16to 1/8" between stop and clamp). Tighten the two nuts onthe universal clamp with a 10 mm wrench using 4 to 6 ft-lb oftorque.


5. Mount actuator indoors. If mounted outdoors, use approvedprotective enclosure.

1

2 3

4

T- bracket

L-bracket

T- bracket

L-bracket

5°

min. 1.5”

3/16"

3/16"

106

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.


®

1. Remove the plastic position indicator from the actuator. Slipthe actuator's universal clamp over the damper shaft. Makesure that the bottom of the actuator (metal side) is towardthe duct and the controls on the cover are accessible.Place the actuator in the desired mounting position.

2. Turn the damper shaft until the blades are fully closed.3. Hand tighten the two nuts on the NM24 . . universal clamp. 4. Slide the stud of the anti-rotation bracket into the slot in the

bottom of the actuator. Bend the strap as needed to sup-port the rear of the actuator.

5. Fasten the strap to the duct with two screws. We recom-mend No. 8 self tapping sheet metal screws.

6. Loosen the two nuts on the universal clamp. Disengage theactuator gear train by pressing the “manual override button”(half round black button near the cable entry). Keeping thegears disengaged, and the damper fully closed, rotate theclamp until it is about 5° from the closed position or approxi-mately 1/16 to 1/8 of an inch between the mechanical stopand the universal clamp.

7. Tighten the two nuts on the clamp with an 10 mm wrench(Belimo Tool-01). Use 4…6 ft-lb of torque.

The damper is now fully closed but the actuator is 5° from fullyclosed. This is called “pre-loading” the actuator. When theactuator is powered and sent to the closed position: it will put its

full torque on the shaft compressing the edge and blade seals.This ensures that the damper will meet its leakage rating. The actua-tor is electronically protected from overload and will not be damaged.

Adjustable stopsThe adjustable stops are needed when there is no damper stopor if you want the damper to halt rotating before it reaches itsstops. The NM24. . actuator can be indefinitely stalled in anyposition without harm. 1. Loosen the two end stops with a No. 2 Phillips head screwdriv-

er being careful not to unscrew the captive nut under the slot.2. Move the stops to the desired position and re-tighten the screws.

Manual overrideThe Belimo NM24. . actuators have a black, half round “manualoverride button” located next to the cable entry. Press this buttonand the gear train is disengaged so the damper shaft can be movedmanually. Release the button and the gear train is re-engaged.

Testing the installation without power1. Disengage the gear train with the manual override button

and move the shaft from closed to open to closed. Ensurethat there is no binding and that the damper goes fullyopen and closes with 5° of actuator stroke left.

2. Correct any problems and retest.

General Information

Standard Mounting

Preliminary steps1. Belimo actuators should be mounted indoors in a dry, relatively clean environment free from corrosive fumes. If the actuator is

to be mounted outdoors, a protective enclosure must be used to shield the actuator. 2. For new construction work, order dampers with extended shafts. Instruct the installing contractor to allow space for mounting and

service of the Belimo actuator on the shaft. The damper shaft must extend at least 2" from the duct. If the shaft extends less than 2"or if an obstruction blocks access, the shaft can be extended with the AV 10-18 shaft extension or the ZG NMSA-1 for applicationswith minimal mounting area.

For replacement of existing gear train actuators, there are two options: A. From a performance standpoint, it is best to mount the actuator on the damper shaft. B. If the damper shaft is not accessible, mount the NM24-. . actuator with a ZG-NM4 linkage kit, to convert to a crankarm style

application or the ZG-105 mounting bracket with the ZG-NM3.

107

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NM


®

WARNING The wiring technician must be trained and experi-enced with electronic circuits. Disconnect power supply beforeattempting any wiring connections or changes. Make all con-nections in accordance with wiring diagrams and follow allapplicable local and national codes. Provide disconnect andoverload protection as required. Use copper, twisted pair,conductors only. If using electrical conduit, the attachmentmust be made with flexible conduit.


Transformer(s)The NM24 type actuator requires a 24 VAC class 2 transformerand draws a maximum of 3.5 VA per actuator. The actuatorenclosure cannot be opened in the field, there are no parts orcomponents to be replaced or repaired.






Multiple actuators, multiple transformersMultiple actuators positioned by the same control signal may bepowered from multiple transformers provided the following rulesare followed:1. The transformers are properly sized.2. All No. 1 wires from all actuators are tied together and tied


Wire length for NM type actuatorsKeep power wire runs below the limits listed in the Fig. 1. Ifmore than one actuator is powered from the same wire run,divide the allowable wire length by the number of actuators todetermine the maximum run to any single actuator. Example: 3 actuators, 16 Ga wire

1000 Ft ÷ 3 Actuators = 333 Ft. Maximum wire run.



Fig. 1

Wire Type and Wire Installation TipsFor most installations, 18 or 16 Ga. cable works well with theNM24 type actuators. Use code approved wire nuts, terminalstrips or solderless connectors where wires are joined. It isgood practice to run control wires unspliced from the actuatorto the controller. If splices are unavoidable, make sure thesplice can be reached for possible maintenance. Tape and/orwire tie the splice to reduce the possibility of the splice beinginadvertently pulled apart.

The NM24. . proportional actuators have a digital circuit that isdesigned to ignore most unwanted input signals (pickup). Insome situations the pickup may be severe enough to causeerratic running of the actuator. For example, a large inductiveload (high voltage AC wires, motors, etc.) running near thepower or control wiring may cause excessive pickup. To solvethis problem, make one or more of the following changes:1. Run the wire in metallic conduit.2. Reroute the wiring away from the source of pickup.3. Use shielded wire (Belden 8760 or equal). Ground the

shield to an earth ground. Do not connect it to the actuatorcommon.

Reversing switch, “L-R”The NM24-/SR US actuators have a reversing switch on thecover labeled “L-R”. With the switch in position “L”, the actua-tor rotates clockwise with an increase in voltage or current.With the switch in Position “R”, the actuator rotates counter-clockwise with an increase in voltage or current.

The NM24 US, on-off, tri-state actuators when set for switchposition “R”, rotate clockwise when power is applied to wire #3,and counterclockwise when power is applied to wire #2.



108

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Installation InstructionsOperational Information

®

Additional Operational Information for NM24-SR US Proportional Actuators

Controller types Belimo NM24-SR US actuator is compatible with virtually allelectronic controllers using a 2 to 10 VDC control signal. Andwill work with a 4 to 20 mA signal with the addition of a 500Ωresistor.

Microprocessor controlled brushless DC motorAn on board microprocessor monitors operation and controls abrushless DC motor. It also performs a self test upon power up.

Overload protectionThe Belimo NM24-SR US actuator is protected from overloadat all angles of rotation. The on board microprocessor con-stantly monitors the rotation of the DC drive motor inside theactuator and stops the pulses to the motor when it senses astall condition. The DC motor remains energized and producesfull rated torque to the load. This helps ensure that dampersare fully closed and that edge and blade seals are always prop-erly compressed.


Motor position detectionBelimo Brushless DC motors do not use potentiometers for posi-tioning. Inside the motor are three "Hall Effect" sensors. Thesesensors detect the spinning rotor and send pulses to the micro-processor which counts the pulses and calculates the position.

Initialization or function checkWhen a power source is applied to terminal 1 and 2 the motorcarries out an initialization of the actuator. If required, a functioncheck can also be made after connection of the supply voltageby pressing in the manual override button and then releasing it.The purpose of this initialization is to determine the mechanicalangle of rotation and to adapt the running time to the angle ofrotation. The function check can also be used to verify that thedamper, and linkage (if mounted) are running free and are cor-rectly adjusted.

The function check makes the motor run first to the clockwiseor counter-clockwise stop, depending on the selector switchposition. Thereafter it runs to the opposite stop. During thisoperation the output (U5) supplies 2 VDC.

Re-initializationWhenever the “manual override button” is pressed andreleased and the actuator is powered, the microprocessor will“re-initialize”. See “Initialization or function check” above.

Motor speed and run timeThe microprocessor also controls the speed of the motor. In aconventional DC motor, increased torque slows the motorspeed. Since the microprocessor determines the total rotationduring initialization, it can calculate how fast to turn the motorto insure a 150 second run time independent of the total rota-tion over a range of 35-95°. Below 35°, the motor runs at a con-stant speed and the run time is proportional to the angle.

Input ResolutionDuring initialization the microprocessor determines the maxi-mum rotation angle. It then divides this angle by the workingspan of the input signal and calculates how many degrees totravel for each volt change in control signal or pulse length.This means that the working span (Example: 8 V for a 2 to 10VDC Signal) is consistent for any angle of maximum rotationdown to as low as 35°. This greatly simplifies engineering andcheckout when dampers have differing maximum rotations.

Total Rotation Run Time Total Rotation Run Time95° 150 Sec. 35° 150 Sec.75° 150 Sec. 15° 64 Sec.55° 150 Sec. 5° 21 Sec.

Monitoring and self-adjustment of close-off positionThe purpose of this function is to correct the mechanical toler-ances within 4% which can change over time. It assures thatthe actuator always presses the damper blade with maximumpressure onto the seal. The end positions are automaticallychecked as soon as the actuator position comes within 3% ofthe total angle of rotation, at full open or full closed.

If the actuator registers a change of the end position of ≤ 4%,the angle of rotation will be modified. If the actuator registers achange of the end position > 4%, the actuator will consider it anerror and not modify the angle of rotation.

The actuator will self-adjust until it reaches its mechanical stops.

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extension Tool-01 10 mm wrench for tightening the universal clamp's nuts.Tool-03 #10 tamper proof Torx screwdriver required for

installation of ZG-NM3 or ZG-NM4 linkage kits.SGA24 Minimum and/or manual positioner (electronic) In

NEMA 4 enclosure for surface mounting.SGF24 Minimum and/or manual positioner (electronic)

For flush panel mounting.SN1 Auxiliary Switch, 1 x SPDTSN2 Auxiliary Switch, 2 x SPDTZG-NM4 Linkage kit. Includes 1 crankarm for the actuator,

2 ball joints and 1 mounting plate for the actuator.Customer needs to supply 5/16" connecting rod anda crank arm for the damper.

ZG-NM3 Linkage kit for use with the ZG-105 mountingbracket. Includes 1 crankarm for the actuatorand 2 ball joints.

ZG-NMSA-1 Shaft adaptor for short shaftsZG-H2 Actuator operator handle A heavy gauge steel

handle which attaches to the universal clamp.For use where frequent manual positioning ofdampers is required.

ZG-105 Mounting bracket, when direct coupled mountingis not possible.

109

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NM

AccessoriesAdditional accessories

®

ZG-H2 Actuator Operator Handle

Used when it is desirable to move or adjust damper by hand.Increases leverage and precision during set-up and testing.

ZG-NMSA-1 Shaft adaptor

Used on 1/2" diameter shafts that are shorter than 3/4" andmounting space is minimal.

AV 10-18 Shaft Extension

For damper shafts 3/8 to 11/16 in [10 to 18] dia or 3/8 to 9/16in [10 to 14] square.

ZG-NM3 - Crank arm adaptor kit

For use when the actuator cannot be mounted directly to thedamper shaft. Similar to ZG-NM4 (below) but without mountingplate. To be used with ZG-105 (right).

ZG-105 Mounting Bracket

ZG-NM4 - Crank arm adaptor kit

For use when the actuator cannot be mounted directly to thedamper shaft.

Mounting Instructions for ZG-NM4 Linkage Kit

1. Remove the four retaining screws ➀ in the base of theactuator.

Note: A # 10 tamper-proof Torx screwdriver is required.

2. Install the mounting plate ➁ to the base of the actuatorusing the four retaining screws from step #3.

3. Mount the actuator assembly in a convenient location bythe damper.

4. Insert the crankarm assembly ➂ into the universal clampand tighten in the desired position.

5. Adjust the crank arm linkage for proper damper operation

SGA24/SGF24

Minimum and/or manual positioner (electronic), SGA24 isenclosed in a NEMA 4 housing. The SGF24 is for flush panelmounting.

➀

➁

➂ (by others)

SGA24SGF24

110

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Non-Direct Mounting Methods®

Actuator mounted on a field-fabricated 16 ga. plate to con-trol a cone-type VAV damper

Universal mounting bracket or a field-fabricated 16 ga.angle iron or plate. Used when there is little clearancebetween the damper shaft and the wall.

Use this method when there is little clearance between thedamper shaft and the wall.

Damper is mounted through a wallwith control shaft exposed, butspace too tight to direct couple.

KH-8 Crankarm - finalposition must be verticalwhen damper is fullyopen.

Mount actuator ata 45° angle toallow for full 90°crankarm rotation.

ZG-NM3

ZG-NM3

ZG-105

NM24…

ZG-NM4

NM24…

NM24…

111

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

NM

Startup and CheckoutInstructions For NM24-SR US

®

Procedure

Connect signal Input to wires 1 & 3.Connect signal output (if used) towires 1 & 4Connect 24 VAC/VDC power toWires 1 & 2

Check power wiring. Correct anyproblems. Note 1

Turn reversing switch to the correctposition. Make sure the switch isturned all the way left or right. Press“Override Button” all the way downand release


Disconnect signal input from WiresNo. 1 & 3

Check input signal with a digital voltmeter (DVM). Make sure the input iswithin the range of the actuator. ForNM24-SR this is 2 to 10 VDC or4 to 20 mA (with 500Ω resistor).

Disconnect power from Wire No. 2.Reconnect signal input to Wires No.1 & 3. Reconnect power to Wire No. 2

Actuator does not drive


Expected Response

Actuator drives to the “NoSignal” position (usually closed),then to the “Maximum Signal”position (usually open) then tothe “Control Signal” position.




Actuator drives to the “NoSignal” position



Defective actuator

Actuator RespondsGo To Step ...



to driveStep 1



Step 6



Step 7


No ResponseGo To Step




Step 4


Step 8


Step 4

Step 5

Step 8



Step 8

Replace actuator

Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.




NM24-SR US

112

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LM Series Direct Coupled Actuator

Areas of Application

Small Yet Powerful Minimum 35 in-lb torque in a compact package.

For damper areas up to 8 sq-ft*.

®

Torque: 35 in-lb

Power supply : 24 VAC/DC

Brushless DC motor:


floating point

proportional 2 to 10 VDC


10kΩ feedback potentiometer

5kΩ feedback potentiometer

Run time, 95 sec

Run time, 80 to 110 sec for 0 to 35 in-lb

Run time, 25 to 35 sec for 0 to 18 in-lb

Left/Right rotation switch

Angle of rotation limiting (mechanical)

Angle of rotation limiting (electronic)

Plenum rated cable, 18 GA

Screw terminal strip

Manual override push-button




LM Series – at a glance

LM24

-3 U

S (p

. 114

)

LM24

-3-T

US

(p.1

14)

LM24

-T U

S (p

.118

)LM

24-S

US

(p.1

18)

LM24

US

(p.1

18)

LM24

-10P

US

(p.1

18)

LM24

-5P

0-T

US

(p.1

18)

LM24

-SR

-2.0

US

(p. 1

16)

LM24

-SR

-T-2

.0 U

S (p

. 116

)LM

C24

US

(p.1

20)

LMC

24-S

R U

S (p

.120

)LM

C24

-SR

-T U

S (p

.120

)

Rack and pinion type actuatorreplaced by direct coupled LM.

Replacement LM24 compatible with existing control system.

Replacement Belimoactuator (LM type)direct couples to VAVBy-Pass damper shaft.

Existing pneumatic actuator requires linkage.

VAV Units and Small Zone DampersQuiet Plus® VAV terminal unit byWarren Technology

113

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LM


UL

Brushless DC Motor for added accuracy and controllability.


Check damper position from a distance withclear position indication.

Don’t worry about actuator burn-out. Belimo is overload-proof throughout rotation.

Enjoy added flexibility with easy mechanical stops to adjust angle of rotation.(LM24-SR-2.0 US has electronic rotation limiting.)

Consistent running time independent of load.

Easily accessible manual override push-buttonhelps you pre-tension damper blades.


3 ft. plenum rated cable eases installation(external terminal strip also available)

Bulk Packaging Offers BigValue for Large Jobs,Stocking Orders.

LM Series Direct Coupled Actuator®





A CLOSER LOOK…

©

114

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

ApplicationFor on-off and floating point control of dampers in HVAC sys-tems. Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with thedamper manufacturer’s specifications. The actuator mountsdirectly to the damper operating shaft with a universal V-boltclamp assembly.

OperationThe actuator is not provided with and does not require any limitswitches, but is electronically protected against overload. Theangle of rotation is mechanically limited to 95°. When reachingthe damper or actuator end position, the actuator automaticallystops. The gears can be manually disengaged with a button onthe actuator cover. The position of the actuator is indicated bya visual pointer. The anti-rotation strap supplied with the actua-tor will prevent lateral movement.

The LM24-3 US and LM24-3-T US actuators use a BrushlessDC motor, which is controlled by an Application SpecificIntegrated Circuit (ASIC). The ASIC monitors and controls theactuator’s rotation and provides a digital rotation sensing (DRS)function to prevent damage to the actuator in a stall condition.

Accessories11533 T-type anti-rotation bracket22065 L-type anti-rotation bracket (included)ZG-LMSA Shaft adaptor for short shaftsTool-02 8 mm wrench

LM24-3 (-T) US On-off/ floating point control, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V


Torque min. 35 in-lb, for control of damper surfaces up to 8 sq ft.

LM24-3 USLM24-3-T US

LM24-3 US LM24-3-T US


UL

®

Technical Data LM24… on-off/floating point




Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA, UL CL2P plenum cable

Control On-off/Floating point


Input impedance 3900ΩAngle of rotation max 95°, adjust. with mechanical stops

Torque min 35 in-lb [4 Nm], Independent of load

Direction of rotation reversible w/switch CW/CCW (not on “-T” models)

Position indication clip-on indicator (not on “-T” models)

Running time 95 seconds





Housing type NEMA type 2 (-T models NEMA 1)

Housing material rating UL94-5V



Agency listings UL873 listed, CSA 22.2 No. 24 certified, CE



LM24-3-T.1 US

Electrical connection Screw terminal (for 26 to 14 GA wire)

Housing NEMA type 1

Direction of rotation Reverse wires terminals 2 and 3

©

L R

20%

100

%

1

1

0

0

3.47" [88]

4.53" [115]

3.68" [93.5]0.85" [21.5]

1.28" [32.5]

2.56" [65]

2.32" [58.9]

1/4" to 5/8" [6 to 16]

1/4" to 7/16" [6 to 11]

D01

4

115

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LM


a opena closed


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

LM24-3 (-T) US

L R

a

Line Volts

12

324 VAC Transformer


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

LM24-3 US

CCW CW

Line Volts

LM24-3 (-T) USOn-off/ floating point control, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V

LM24… on-off/floating - Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupledtype which require no crank arm and linkage. Actuators shallbe UL and CSA listed, have a 5 year warranty, and be man-ufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality ControlStandards. Actuators shall have Brushless DC motor tech-nology. Actuators shall have reversing switch and manualoverride on the cover, and be protected from overload at allangles of rotation. If required, actuator will be provided withscrew terminal strip for electrical connections (LM24-3-T US).Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

On-off control

Line Volts

1 Common

2 +

3 +

24 VAC Transformer

LM24-3-T US

6

512

Floating point or on-off control of LM24-3-T US

3

2

5

6




The LM24-3-T US actuators are provided with a num-bered screw terminal strip instead of cable.

Switch wires 2 and 3 to change rotation direction ofLM24-3-T US (does not have CW/CCW external switch).


Bulk packaging

Bulk Pack No. Actuator Type Quantity/Pack

LM24-3.1 US LM24-3 US 32

LM24-3-T.1 US LM24-3-T US 48

®

Notes

T-Type bracketThese are included in the single-actuator packages and are available at no extra cost in the bulk packages upon request.

Part # 11533 (UOM:1)

L-Type anti-rotation bracket.Included with each bulk packaged actuator.

W08

0

W08

2

W08

1

To have better control of job site inventory and reduce theenvironmental impact of unnecessary packing material.

Part #: 22065 (UOM:1)12502-00002 (includes 22065: UOM:16) shipped with bulk pack option.

116

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LM24-SR (-T) -2.0 US Proportional control, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V, for 2 to 10 VDC and 4 to 20 mA control signal

ApplicationFor proportional modulation of dampers in HVAC systems.Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the dampermanufacturer’s specifications. The actuator mounts directly tothe damper operating shaft with a universal V-bolt clampassembly. The actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10 VDCor, with the addition of a 500 Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA input sig-nal from an electronic controller or positioner. A 2 to 10 VDCfeedback signal is provided for position indication or masterslave applications. (Not available on “-T” versions)The LM24-SR-2.0 US provides an electronic angle of rotationadjustment to limit the actuators rotation 20% to 100% while stillusing the full input signal and feedback control range. (Notavailable on LM24-SR-T-2.0 US)

OperationThe anti-rotation strap supplied with the actuator will prevent lat-eral movement of the actuator. The damper actuator is not pro-vided with and does not require any limit switches, but is pro-tected electronically against overload. The angle of rotation ismechanically limited to 95°. When reaching the damper or actu-ator end position, the actuator automatically stops. The gearscan be manually disengaged by pressing a button on the actua-tor cover. The position of the actuator is indicated by a visualpointer. The LM24-SR-2.0 US and LM24-SR-T-2.0 US actuators use aBrushless DC motor, which is controlled by an Application SpecificIntegrated Circuit (ASIC). The ASIC monitors and controls theactuator’s rotation and provides a digital rotation sensing (DRS)function to prevent damage to the actuator in a stall condition.

Accessories11533 T-type anti-rotation bracket22065 L-type anti-rotation bracket (included)ZG-LMSA Shaft adaptor for short shaftsTool-02 8 mm wrenchZG-R01 500Ω resistor for 4 to 20 mA



LM24-SR-2.0 USLM24-SR-T-2.0 US

®

LM24-SR-T-2.0 USLM24-SR-2.0 US


UL

©

Technical Data LM24-SR-2.0 US




Electrical connection LM24-SR-2.0 US: 3 ft, 18 GA, ULCL2P plenum cable



Input impedance 100 kΩ (0.1 mA), 500ΩFeedback output ‘U’ 2 to 10 VDC (max. 0.7 mA )

(not available on LM24-SR-T-2.0 US

Angle of rotation max 95°, electronically adjustable 20 to 100% on LM24-SR-2.0 US

Torque min 35 in-lb, Independent of load

Direction of rotation reversible with switch CW/CCWCW = with an increase in voltageCCW = with an increase in voltage

Position indication clip-on indicator (not on “-T” models)

Running time 95 seconds





Housing type NEMA type 2 (-T models Nema type1)

Housing material rating UL 94-5V



Agency listings UL 873 listed, CSA 22..2 No. 24 certified, CE



LM24-SR-T-2.0.1 US

Electrical connection Screw terminals (for 26 to 14 GA wire)

Angle of rotation max 95°, adjust. with mechanical stops

Housing NEMA type 1

Feedback No feedback with the LM24-SR-T-2.0 US

L R

20%

100

%

1

1

0

0

3.47" [88]

4.53" [115]

3.68" [93.5]0.85" [21.5]

1.28" [32.5]

2.56" [65]

2.32" [58.9]

1/4" to 5/8" [6 to 16]

1/4" to 7/16" [6 to 11]

D01

4

117

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LM

LM24-SR (-T) -2.0 US Proportional control, non-spring return, direct coupled,



Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot



LM24-SR-2.0 USCCW CW

Line Volts



(–)(+)

(–)(+)

6


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot



LM24-SR-2.0 USCCW CW

Line Volts



(–)(+)

(–)(+)

6

8Ω

500Ω

2 to 10 VDC control of LM24-SR-2.0 US

4 to 20 mA control of LM24-SR-2.0 US with 2 to 10 VDC feedback output

2

4

5

6

7

8



The LM24-SR-T-2.0 US is provided a screw terminalinstead of cable.

The LM24-SR-T-2.0 US does not have feedback.



A 500Ω resistor (ZG-R01) must be added for 4 to 20mA control.


1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y 2 to 10V Input

LM24-SR-T-2.0 USCCW CW

Line Volts

4 to 20 mA

Control Signal

w/500Ω resistor

(–)(+)

6

8Ω

500Ω2 to 10 VDC

5

2 to 10 VDC and 4 to 20 mA control of LM24-SR-T-2.0 US

®

Bulk packaging LM24SR-2.0 US and LM24SR-T-2.0 US

LM24-SR (-T) 2.0 US - Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupledtype which require no crank arm and linkage. Actuators shallbe UL and CSA listed, have a 5 year warranty, and be man-ufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality ControlStandards. Actuators shall have Brushless DC motor.Actuators shall have reversing switch and gear disengage-ment button on the cover, and be electronically protected fromoverload at all angles of rotation. Actuators shall respond to 2to 10VDC output relative to position regardless of the amountof damper rotation. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal shall beprovided for position indication or master-slave applications.Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.An electronic angle of rotation adjustment shall be provided toreduce the actuators rotation from 100 to 20% while still usingthe full input signal and feedback control range. (LM24-SR US)If required, actuator will be provided with screw terminal strip forelectrical connections (LM24-SR-T US).

Notes


LM24-SR-2.0.1 US LM24-SR-2.0 US 32

LM24-SR-T.-2.0.1 US LM24-SR-T-2.0 US 48

T-Type bracketThese are included in the single-actuator packages and are available at no extra cost in the bulk packages upon request.

Part # 11533 (UOM:1)

W08

3W

084

W08

5

To have better control of job site inventory and reduce theenvironmental impact of unnecessary packing material.

L-Type anti-rotation bracket.Included with each bulk packaged actuator.

Part #: 22065 (UOM:1)12502-00002 (includes 22065: UOM:16) shipped with bulk pack option.

118

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

ApplicationFor on-off control of dampers in HVAC systems. Actuator siz-ing should be done in accordance with the damper manufac-turer’s specifications. The actuator mounts directly to thedamper operating shaft with a universal V-bolt clamp assem-bly.

OperationThe actuator is not provided with and does not require anylimit switches, but is electronically protected against overload.The angle of rotation is mechanically limited to 95°. Whenreaching the damper or actuator end position, the actuatorautomatically stops. The gears can be manually disengagedwith a button on the actuator cover. The position of the actua-tor is indicated by a visual pointer. The anti-rotation strap sup-plied with the actuator will prevent lateral movement.

AccessoriesLM-P T-type anti-rotation bracketZG-LMSA Shaft adaptor for short shaftsTool-02 8 mm wrench

LM24 (-T) US On-off control, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V


LM24 USLM24-S USLM24-10P USLM24-5P0-T USLM24-T US

LM24-S US LM24-T US


UL

Technical Data LM24… on-off/floating point Power supply 24 VAC ± 20% 50/60 Hz 24 VDC ± 10%Power consumption 2 W Transformer sizing 3 VA (Class 2 power source) Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA, UL CL2P plenum cableControl On-offOverload protection Electronic throughout 0 to 95° rotationAngle of rotation max 95°, adjust. with mechanical stopsTorque min 35 in-lb [4 Nm]Direction of rotation reversible w/switch L/R (not on “-T” models)Position indication clip-on indicator (not on “-T” models)Running time 80 to 110 sec. for 0 to 35 in-lb Manual override external push button Humidity 5 to 95% RH, non-condensingAmbient temperature -22°F to +122°F [-30°C to +50°C]Storage temperature -40°F to +176°F [-40°C to +80°C]Housing type NEMA type 2 (-T models NEMA 1)Housing material rating UL94-5V Noise level less than 35 dB (A)Servicing maintenance freeAgency listings UL 873 listed, CSA C22.2 No.24 certified, CEQuality standard ISO 9001Weight 1.2 lbs [0.55 kg]LM24-S US Control On-offAuxiliary switch Adj. 0° to 95°, SPDT 6 A (2.5A) @ 24 VACLM24-10P US Control On-off/Floating pointFeedback 10 kΩ, 1W potentiometerLM24-5P0-T.1 US (bulk pack only)Control On-off/Floating pointFeedback 5 kΩ, 1W potentiometerHousing NEMA type 1Direction of rotation Reverse wires terminals 2 and 3LM24-T.1 US (bulk pack only)Control On-offElectrical connection Screw terminal (for 26 to 14 GA wire)Housing NEMA type 1Direction of rotation Reverse wires terminals 2 and 3

®


1

1

0

0

3.47" [88]

4.53" [115]

3.68" [93.5]0.85" [21.5]

1.28" [32.5]

2.56" [65]

2.32" [58.9]

1/4" to 5/8" [6 to 16]

1/4" to 7/16" [6 to 11]

D01

5

119

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LM


a opena closed


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

LM24 -T USLM24 (-S) US

LM24-10P US

L R

a

Line Volts

12

3

4

24 VAC Transformer


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

LM24-10P US

L R

Line Volts

LM24-S US

S1

S2

S3

NC

NO0° to 95°

LM24 (-T) US On-off control, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V

LM24… on-off - Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupled typewhich require no crank arm and linkage. Actuators shall be ULand CSA listed, have a 5 year warranty, and be man-ufacturedunder ISO 9001 International Quality Control Standards.Actuators shall have reversing switch and manual override onthe cover, and be protected from overload at all angles of rota-tion. If required, actuator will be provided with screw terminal stripfor electrical connections (LM24-T US and LM24-5P0-T US). Ifrequired, one adjustable SPDT auxiliary switch shall be provided(LM24-S US). If required, actuators shall be provided with a built-in 10 kΩ feedback potentiometer (LM24-10P US) or 5kΩ (LM24-5P0-T) for use in modulating (floating point) applications.Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

On-off control

Line Volts

1 Common

2 +

3 +

24 VAC Transformer

LM24-5P0-T US

64

512

3

LM24-10P US LM24-5P0-T US

0

10/5

10kΩ/5kΩ Feedback potentiometer

7

5

4

7

Org (P1)

Blue (P2)

Yel (P3)

Floating point or on-off control Feedback potentiometer wiring for LM24-10P US and LM24-5P0-T US

Auxiliary switch wiring for LM24-S US

3

2

4

5

6

7




For position indication, the LM24-10P US is provided witha 10 kΩ feedback potentiometer and the LM24-5P0-T USis provided with a 5 kΩ feedback potentiometer.

The LM24-T US and LM24-5P0-T US are provided witha numbered screw terminal strip instead of cable.

Switch wires 2 and 3 to change rotation direction ofLM24-T US and LM24-5P0-T US (does not have L/Rexternal switch).

Value based on resistance between (P1) and (P2).indicates direction of rotation of actuator.


Bulk packaging LM24 on-off/floating


LM24.1 US LM24 US 32

LM24-T.1 US LM24-T US 48

LM24-5P0-T.1 US LM24-5P0-T US 48

L-Type anti-rotation bracket. Included with each actuator.

Part #: 22065

Notes

®

W08

6

W08

9

W08

7W

088

W09

0

120

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

ApplicationFor on-off control of dampers in HVAC systems (LMC24 US).For proportional modulation of dampers in HVAC systems(LMC24-SR-T US). Actuator sizing should be done in accor-dance with the damper manufacturer’s specifications. The actuator mounts directly to the damper operating shaft with a universal V-bolt clamp assembly.

The LMC24-SR-T US actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10VDC or, with the addition of a 500 Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA inputsignal from an electronic controller or positioner. A 2 to 10 VDCfeedback signal is provided for position indication or masterslave applications. The LMC24-SR US provides an electronicangle of rotation adjustment (not available in the LMC24-SR-T US) tolimit the actuators rotation 20% to 100% while still using the fullinput signal and feedback control range.

OperationThe actuator is not provided with and does not require any limitswitches, but is electronically protected against overload. Theangle of rotation is mechanically limited to 95°. When reachingthe damper or actuator end position, the actuator automaticallystops. The gears can be manually disengaged with a button onthe actuator cover. The position of the actuator is indicated by avisual pointer. The anti-rotation strap supplied with the actuatorwill prevent lateral movement.

AccessoriesLM-P T-type anti-rotation bracketIRM-100 Input scaling module (For LMC24-SR-T US only)ZG-LMSA Shaft adaptor for short shaftsPTA-250 Pulse width modulating interface

(For LMC24-SR-T US only)SGA24 Min. and/or manual positioner in NEMA 4 housing

(For LMC24-SR-T US only)SGF24 Min. and/or manual positioner for flush panel mount

(For LMC24-SR-T US only)Tool-02 8 mm wrenchZAD24 Digital position indication (For LMC24-SR-T US only)ZG-R01 500Ω resistor for 4 to 20 mA

(For LMC24-SR-T US only)

LMC24 (-SR) (-T) USNon-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V, 25 to 35 sec. running time

Torque min. 18 in-lb, for control of damper surfaces up to 4.5 sq ft.

LMC24 US (on/off)LMC24-SR US (proportional)LMC24-SR-T US (proportional)

LMC24 US LMC24-SR US


UL

®

Technical Data LMC24 (-SR) US… Power supply 24 VAC ± 20% 50/60 Hz 24 VDC ± 10%

Power consumption LMC24 US 2.0 W LMC24-SR (-T) US 2.5 W

Transformer sizing LMC24 US 3 VA LMC24-SR (-T) US 4 VA

Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA, UL CL2P plenum cable

Control On-off (LMC24 US)


Angle of rotation max 95°, adjust. with mechanical stops(LMC24 US), electronically adjustable 20 to 100% on LMC24-SR US only


Operating range Y 2 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA (LMC24-SR (-T) US)

Input impedance 100 kΩ (0.1 mA), 500Ω (LMC24-SR (-T) US)

Feedback output ‘U’ 2 to 10 VDC (max. 0.7 mA )(LMC24-SR-T US)

Direction of rotation reversible with switch “CCW-CW”LMC24-SR-T US:CW with a decrease in voltageCCW with a decrease in voltage


Running time 25 to 35 sec. for 0 to 18 in-lb






Housing material rating UL94-5V






LMC24-SR-T US

Electrical connection Screw terminals (for 26 to 14 GA wire)

Angle of rotation max 95°, adjust. with mechanical stops

Housing NEMA type 1

Feedback No feedback with the LMC24-SR-T US

Note: Actuators do not have Brushless DC Motor


1

1

0

0

3.47" [88]

4.53" [115]

3.68" [93.5]0.85" [21.5]

1.28" [32.5]

2.56" [65]

2.32" [58.9]

1/4" to 5/8" [6 to 16]

1/4" to 7/16" [6 to 11]

D01

5

121

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LM


a opena closed


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

LMC24 USCCW CW

a

Line Volts

LMC24 (-SR) (-T) US Non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V, 25 to 35 sec. running time

LMC24… - Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupledtype which require no crank arm and linkage. Actuators shallbe UL and CSA listed, have a 5 year warranty, and be man-ufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality ControlStandards. Actuators shall have reversing switch and manualoverride on the cover, and be protected from overload at allangles of rotation. Actuator shall have a nominal running timeof 30 seconds for 95° rotation. Proportional actuators shallrespond to 2 to 10VDC output relative to position regardless ofthe amount of damper rotation. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback sig-nal shall be provided for position indication or master-slaveapplications. An electronic angle of rotation adjustment(LMC24-SR US only) shall be provided to reduce the actuatorsrotation from 100 to 20% while still using the full input signaland feedback control range. Actuators shall be as manufac-tured by Belimo.

On-off control

3

2

4

5

6


Actuators may also be powered by 24 VDC



A 500Ω resistor (ZG-R01) must be added for 4 to 20 mAcontrol.

LMC24-SR-T US does not have a cable. Numbersshown are terminal numbers.

L-Type anti-rotation bracket. Included with each actuator.

Part #: 22065

®

Notes


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot



LMC24-SR (-T) USCCW CW

Line Volts



(–)(+)

(–)(+)

4

6


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot



LMC24-SR (-T) USCCW CW

Line Volts



(–)(+)

(–)(+)

4

65Ω

500Ω

2 to 10 VDC control of LMC24-SR (-T) US

4 to 20 mA control of LMC24-SR (-T) US with 2 to 10 VDC feedback output

W15

1

W15

3W

154

122

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Preliminary steps1. Belimo actuators should be mounted indoors in dry, relatively clean environment free from corrosive fumes. If the actuator is to

be mounted outdoors, a protective enclosure must be used to shield the actuator. (See Belimo Mechanical Accessories Doc. 5.2)2. For new construction work, order dampers with extended shafts. Instruct the installing contractor to allow space for mounting and

service of the Belimo actuator on the shaft.3. The LM Series actuator requires a minimum shaft length of 1.5”.

Use the ZG-LMSA for short shaft installations on 1/2” diameter shafts.

Installation InstructionsQuick-mount visual instructions

®

1. Turn damper blade to its fully closed position.2. With manual override button depressed, rotate actuator

clamp to about 1/16” - 1/8” between actuator stop andclamp, depending on damper seal design. Slide actuatorover shaft and finger-tighten nuts.

3. Slide anti-rotation bracket up under actuator engaging cen-ter cut-out on actuator back. Secure bracket with self-tap-ping screws. Tighten the two nuts on the universal clamp with8 mm wrench, 3-5 ft-lb torque. (On dampers with edge seals,actuator will compress damper blades when reaching end posi-tion for air-tight damper.)


1

2 3

4

L-bracket

L-bracket

min. 1.5” [38]


WARNING The wiring technician must be trained and experi-enced with electronic circuits. Disconnect power supply beforeattempting any wiring connections or changes. Make all con-nections in accordance with wiring diagrams and follow allapplicable local and national codes. Provide disconnect andoverload protection as required. Use copper, twisted pair,conductors only.


Transformer(s)The LM Series actuators require a 24 VAC class 2 transformerand draw a maximum of 4 VA. The actuator enclosure cannotbe opened in the field, there are no parts or components to bereplaced or repaired.






Multiple actuators, multiple transformersMultiple actuators positioned by the same control signal may bepowered from multiple transformers provided the following rulesare followed:

1. The transformers are properly sized.2. All No. 1 wires from all actuators are tied together and tied


Wire length for LM Series actuatorsKeep power wire runs below the limits listed in the Fig. 1. Ifmore than one actuator is powered from the same wire run,divide the allowable wire length by the number of actuators todetermine the maximum run to any single actuator.


Wire Size Max. Feet. Wire Size Max. Feet16 Ga 1225 Ft. 20 Ga 400 Ft18 Ga 725 Ft. 22 Ga 200 Ft

Fig. 1

Example for LM… US: 3 actuators, 18 Ga wire 725 Ft ÷ 3 Actuators = 241.6 Ft. Maximum wire run.

Wire Type and Wire Installation TipsFor most installations, 18 or 16 Ga. cable works well with theLM24 type actuators. Use code approved wire nuts, terminalstrips or solderless connectors where wires are joined. It isgood practice to run control wires unspliced from the actuatorto the controller. If splices are unavoidable, make sure thesplice can be reached for possible maintenance. Tape and/orwire tie the splice to reduce the possibility of the splice beinginadvertently pulled apart.

LM Series Actuators with Terminal StripLM…-T actuators feature an external screw terminal strip onthe top of the actuator housing (instead of cable). Connectionsare numbered and a wiring schematic is shown next to the ter-minal strip. The terminals are designed for 26 to 14 GA wire.

Overload protection All Belimo actuators are electronically protected against over-load. In the LM series an electronic circuit maintains the cur-rent at a level which will not damage the motor while providingadequate holding torque.


123

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LM

®

0 1

Manual Override

A button on the actuator cover disengages the gear train so thedamper shaft can be moved manually. Release the button and thegear train is re-engaged.

Use the manual override to test the installation withoutpower. For tight shut-off the damper should close with 5°of actuator stroke left.

0 1

Gear releasebutton

AF

124

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

0 1

Adjust angle-of-rotation in steps of 2.5°

Installation InstructionsFeature Operation

Mechanical Angle of Rotation Limiting (LM Series, On-Off/Floating and LM24-SR-T-2.0 US)

The adjustable stops are needed when there is no damper stopor if you want the damper to halt rotating before it reaches itsstops. The LM actuator can be indefinitely stalled in any posi-tion without harm. 1. Loosen the two end stops with a No. 2 Phillips head screwdriv-

er being careful not to unscrew the captive nut under the slot.2. Move the stops (in 2.5° steps) to the desired position and re-

tighten the screws.

LM actuators have a reversing switch on the cover labeled “CW-CCW”. Switch position indicates start point. For the LM24-SR (-T)2.0 US, with the switch in position “CW”, the actuator rotates clock-wise with an increase in voltage or current. With the switch in posi-tion “CCW”, the actuator rotates counterclockwise with an increasein voltage or current.

The LM24-3-T US does not have a switch. They rotate clock-wise when power is applied to wire #3, and counterclockwisewhen power is applied to wire #2.


CW

CCW

0 1

CW

CCW

0 1

10 VDC2 VDC 2 VDC10 VDC

Direction of rotation switch. Position indicates start point.

Electronic Angle of Rotation Limiting (LM24-SR-2.0 US)

With the LM24-SR-2.0 US proportional actuator, you canadjust the angle of rotation (95°) anywhere between 20% and100% using an external adjustment. A potentiometer limitsrotation while allowing the full control input and feedback range(2 to 10 VDC), providing higher control resolution within the lim-ited angle of rotation.

CCW

0 1

CW

CW

CCW

2 VDC

10 VDC

45°/50% Limit

Feedback signal will alsobe adjusted 2 to 10 VDC

0 1

2 VDC

10 VDC

45°/50% Limit

0 1

20% 100%

100%20%

Limitation set at 50%Angle of rotation = 45°Control signal = 10 VDC

Direction of Rotation Switch (All LM except LM24-3-T US)

®

125

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

LM

®

Procedure





Check input signal with a digital voltmeter (DVM). Make sure the input iswithin the range of the actuator. ForLM24SR (-T) US this is 0 to 10 VDC or0 to 20 mA. Note: The input signal must be abovethe 2 VDC or 4 mA to have the actua-tor move.




Expected Response









Go To Step…



to driveStep 1





Step 6



See Note 2


Go To Step…




Step 4


Step 4


Step 4

Step 5




repair.Step 1



Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.





LM24-SR (-T) 2.0 US Electrical check-out procedure

Startup and Checkout

126

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

For detailed installation instructions call 800-543-9038 • See the Belimo MOUNTING METHODS GUIDE for application information.

Mechanical Accessories ®

Applications

IndexCLAMPS/POSITION INDICATORIND-AF2 Damper Position Indicator for AF/NF Actuators ................128 IND-LF Damper Position Indicator for LF Actuators.........................128 K4-1 US Jackshaft Clamp for AF/NF and AM Actuators ...................128K4-H Hex Shaft Clamp for AF/ NF and AM Actuators .......................128

LINKAGE ACCESSORIESKH-AF Crankarm for AF/NF Actuators ...............................................128KH-AF-1 Crankarm for Jackshaft Applications

for AF/ NF Actuators .........................................................................128KH-AFV V-Bolt Kit for KH-AF (-1) Crankarms ..................................128 KH-LF Crankarm for LF Actuators......................................................128 KH-LFV V-Bolt Kit for KH-LF Crankarms ..........................................128 KH6 Universal Crankarm ...................................................................129KH8 Universal Crankarm ...................................................................129 KG6 Ball Joint ...................................................................................129 KG8 Ball Joint ...................................................................................129 KG10 Ball Joint for KH6 .....................................................................129 SH8 Push Rod for KG6, KG8 Ball Joints, 5/16” diameter .................129 SH10 Push Rod for KG10 Ball Joints, 3/8” diameter..........................129 ZG-DC1 Damper Clip for Damper Blade ............................................130 ZG-DC2 Damper Clip for Damper Blade ............................................130

CRANKARM ADAPTOR KITSZG-AF US Crankarm Adaptor Kit for AF/ NF Actuators ...................130 ZG-AF108 Crankarm Adaptor Kit for AF/ NF Actuators ...................130 ZG-LF112 Crankarm Adaptor Kit for LF Actuators ...........................130 ZG-LF2 Crankarm Adaptor Kit for LF Actuators ...............................130ZG-LFC114 ..........................................................................................131ZG-NM4 Crankarm Adaptor Kit for NM Actuators.............................109ZG-NM3 Crankarm Adaptor Kit for NM Actuators.............................109 ZG-AM Crankarm Adaptor Kit for AM Actuators.................................94 ZG-GM2 Crankarm Adaptor Kit for GM Actuators ..............................78

BRACKETSZG-100 Universal Mounting Bracket for SM, AM, GM, AF, NF Actuators ..134ZG-101 Universal Mounting Bracket for SM, AM, GM, AF, NF Actuators ..135

ZG-102 Multiple Actuator Mounting Bracketfor SM, AM, GM, AF Actuators .........................................................136

ZG-103 Universal Mounting Bracket for SM, AM, GM, Actuators....137 ZG-104 Universal Mounting Bracket for SM, AM, GM, Actuators....138 ZG-105 Universal Mounting Bracket for NM Actuators ....................139 ZG-106 Universal Mounting Bracket for AF/ NF Actuators ..............140 ZG-107 Universal Mounting Bracket for AF/ NF Actuators ..............140 ZG-108 Universal Mounting Bracket for AF/ NF Actuators ..............141 ZG-109 Mounting Bracket for ZS-200/250 Housings ........................146 ZG-110 Mounting Bracket for ZS-200/250 Housings ........................146 ZG-112 Mounting Bracket for LF Actuators.........................................65

SHAFT ADAPTORSAV1 Shaft Extension for damper operating shafts with AM actuators ....131 AV10-18 Universal Shaft Extension for damper operating shafts ....131 ZG-JSA(-1,2,3) Jackshaft Adaptors for hollow jackshafts ...............132ZG-LMSA Shaft Adaptor for LM Actuators ........................................131 ZG-NMSA-1 Shaft Adaptor for NM Actuators ....................................131

ROTATION LIMITERSZDB Angle of Rotation Limiter for SM Actuators .............................131ZDB-GM Angle of Rotation Limiter for GM Actuators ......................131 ZDB-AF2 Angle of Rotation Limiter for AF/ NF Actuators ...............132

MISCELLANEOUSZG-H2 Actuator Operator Handle for SM, GM, NM Actuators..........132

PROTECTIVE HOUSINGSZS-100 Weather Shield-Steel for SM, AM, GM, AF, NF Actuators .......143ZS-101 Base for ZS-100......................................................................143ZS-150 Weather Shield-Polycarbonate

for SM, AM, GM, AF, NF Actuators ..................................................144 ZS-260 Explosion-Proof Housings

for SM, AM, GM, AF and NF Series Actuators.................................145ZS-300(-1) NEMA 4X Housing

for SM, AM, GM, AF, NF and LF Series Actuators ..........................147

9080

7060

50

40

30

20

100

-5

908070

6050

4030

20

10

0-5

908 90

L RIND-2

ZDB-AF2

Crankarm Adaptor Kits

Rotation Limiting

Front

Back

Bolt Housing

Conduit Holes3/4-14 NPT

Rear Shaft Location Plug

Anti-Rotation Strap

Pan

ZS-260

Housings

127

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Mec

hani

cal A

cces

sorie

s

Mechanical Accessories®

We’ll help solve any application problem with a widerange of accessories and unparalleled customer service.

A CLOSER LOOK…





128

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Special Clamps / Position Indicator

Linkage accessoriesWhen the actuator is not mounted to the damper shaft

®

K4-1 US Jackshaft ClampFor AF, NF and AM Series Actuators

Fits jackshafts up to 1.05”. Retaining ringfixes clamp to actuator teeth.

K4-H Hex Shaft clampFor AF, NF and AM Series Actuators

Fits hex shafts 3/8” to 5/8”. Retaining ringfixes clamp to actuator teeth.

IND-AF2 Damper Position IndicatorFor AF and NF Series Actuators

For damper position indication in short-shaft installations.

IND-LF Damper Position IndicatorFor LF Series Actuators. Similar to IND-AF2

KH-AF CrankarmFor AF and NF Series Actuators

Fits round shafts to 3/4”. Retaining clipfixes clamp to actuator teeth.

KH-AF-1 Crankarm for JackshaftApplicationsFor AF and NF Series Actuators

Fits round shafts to 1.05”. Retaining clipfixes clamp to actuator teeth.

KH-AFV V-Bolt Kit For AF/NF Crankarms

Allows direct coupling with KH-AF, KH-AF-1. Contains 3/4” V-bolt, 1” V-bolt. 2Nuts and Washers.

KH-LFV V-Bolt Kit For LF Crankarms

Allows direct coupling with KH-LF.Contains V-bolt and 2 nuts.

KH-LF CrankarmFor LF Series Actuators

Fits shafts to 1/2”. Retaining clip fixesclamp to actuator teeth.


K4-1 US

K4-H

KH-AF / KH-AF-1

KH-AFV

KH-LFV

KH-LF

K4-1 US

IND-AF2

IND-LF

129

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Mec

hani

cal A

cces

sorie

s

Linkage Accessories®

KH6 Universal Crankarm

Zinc plated steel, for damper shafts 3/8”to 11/16” dia. (10 to 18mm) or 3/8” to9/16” square (10 to 14mm). Slot width 1/4”(6.2mm). Uses KG6 or KG10 ball joint.

KH8 Universal Crankarm

Zinc plated steel, suitable for dampershafts 3/8” to 11/16” dia. (10 to 18mm) or3/8” to 9/16” square (10 to 14mm). Slotwidth 21/64” (8.2mm). Uses KG8 or KG10ball joint.

KG6 Ball JointFor KH6 Universal Crankarm

Zinc plated steel. For 5/16” dia. rod(8mm).

The KG6 ball joint is only recommendedup to 70 in-lbs.

KG8 90° Ball JointFor KH8 Universal Crankarms

Zinc plated steel. For 5/16” dia. rod(8mm). 90° angle.

KG10 Ball JointUsed with the following Crankarms:

KH6 = 1/4”KH8 = 5/16”

SH8 Push RodFor KG6 and KG8 Ball Joints

36” length. 5/16” dia.

SH10 Push RodFor KG10 Ball joints

36” length. 3/8” dia.

KH6/ KH8

KG6

KG10

KG8

SH8

SH10

5/16”

1/4”

The bolt portion of theKG10 fits both a 5/16”slot and 1/4” slot.

130

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

ZG-LF2

Linkage Accessories

Crankarm adaptor kitsWhen the actuator is not mounted to the damper shaft

®

ZG-DC1 Damper ClipMounts to damper blade - 3.5”

ZG-DC2 Damper ClipMounts to damper blade - 6”

The ZG-DC1 and ZG-DC2 damper clipsare designed to mount to damper bladesand work as crankarms in damper linkageapplications. The ZG-DC1 is designed tobe used in applications where the actua-tor is located in front of the damper. TheZG-DC2 is designed to be used when theactuator is located above or below thedamper.

ZG-AF Crankarm Adaptor KitFor AF and NF Series Actuators

Kit contains: 1 KH-AF crankarm with retaining ring

2 stand-off brackets4 mounting feet2 bolts with nuts2 self-tapping metal screws2 KG8 ball jointsInstructions

ZG-AF108 Crankarm Adaptor KitFor AF and NF Series Actuators

Kit contains: 1 KH-AF crankarm with retaining ring

1 ZG-108 mounting bracket(see page 10)

4 bolts with nutsNote: May require crankarm and balljoints.

ZG-LF112 Crankarm Adaptor KitFor LF Series Actuators

Kit contains: 1 KH-LF crankarm with retaining ring

1 ZG-112 mounting bracket(see page 63)

2 bolts with nutsNote: May require crankarm and balljoints.

ZG-LF2 Crankarm Adaptor KitFor LF Series Actuators

Kit contains: 1 KH-LF crankarm with retaining clip1 mounting bracket3 bolts with nutsInstructions

Note: May require crankarm and balljoints.

ZG-DC1

ZG-DC2

ZG-AF US

ZG-AF108

ZG-LF112

ZG-DC2clip

ZG-DC1 clip

ZG-AF US

ZG-106 orZG-107 withKH-AF

ZG-112

KH-LFcrankarm

131

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Mec

hani

cal A

cces

sorie

s

Shaft Adaptors®

AV10-18 Universal Shaft ExtensionFor damper operating shafts

Approx. 9 1/2” (240mm) extension for shafts3/8” to 11/16” dia. (10 to 18mm), or 3/8” to9/16” square (10 to 14mm).

AV1 Shaft Extension for AM SeriesActuators

Approx. 3” (75mm) extension for shafts 3/8”to 3/4” dia. (10 to 20mm), or 3/8” to 9/16”square (10 to 14mm).

ZG-NMSA-1 Shaft AdaptorFor NM Series Actuators

For 1/2” dia. shafts shorter than 3/4”. 3”long, 13/16” outside dia. 2 set screws. Shaftextends 1” inside ZG-NMSA-1.

ZG-LMSA Shaft AdaptorFor LM, LF Series Actuators

For 1/2” dia. shafts shorter than 3/4”. 3”long, 5/8” outside dia. 2 set screws. Shaftextends 3/4” inside ZG-LMSA.

ZDB Angle of Rotation LimiterFor SM Series Actuators

Remove nuts on V-bolt and install ZDB toclamp assembly with indicator in 0 position.Remove clip holding clamp assembly toactuator. Pull out clamp assembly androtate to the number of graduations youwould like to limit rotation by. Each gradua-tion is 9°. Reinstall clamp assembly.

ZDB-GM Angle of Rotation LimiterFor GM Series Actuators

Disengage gears with manual release andturn clamp indicator to 0 position. Pull outretaining clip and remove clamp. LocateZDB-GM at desired graduation (eachapprox. 10°). Reinstall clamp.

ZG-LFC114

AV10-18

AV1

ZG-NMSA-1

ZG-LMSA

ZDB

ZDB-GM

Rotation limiters

min. 3/4"AV1

ZG-LFC114

ZG-LFC114 Mounting KitSpecifically for Trane Voyager unit retrofit

Kit contains: 1-Mounting bracket1-Shaft adaptor2-Actuator mounting bolts

and nuts4-Mounting bracket screws

132

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Rotation Limiters ®

9080

7060

50

40

30

20

100

-5

908070

6050

4030

20

10

0-5

908 90

L R

9080

7060

50

40

30

20

100

-5

908070

6050

4030

20

10

0-5

908 90

L RIND-2

ZDB-AF2

K4 (-1)

ZDB-AF2ZDB-AF2 Angle of Rotation LimiterFor AF and NF Series Actuators

The ZDB-AF2 is used in conjunction withthe tab on the universal clamp or IND-AF2position indicator which comes with theZDB-AF2. In order to function properly, theclamp or indicator must be mounted correct-ly. The ZDB-AF2 may not work in certainmounting orientations using the ZG-106 orZG-107 mounting brackets. It will not workwith the ZG-108 mounting bracket. Limitingthe damper rotation must be accomplishedby adjusting the crankarm linkage.

1. Determine damper rotation required.

2. Locate the ZDB-AF2 on the actuatorso that its edge lines up with thedegree graduation on the actuatorface which corresponds with therequired rotation.

3. Make sure the locating “teeth” on theZDB-AF2 are engaged into the locat-ing holes on the actuator.

4. Pierce the actuator label at the crosshair showing through the slot on theZDB-AF2. Fasten to the actuatorusing the self tapping screw provided.

ZG-H2 Actuator Operator HandleFor SM, AM (with 3/4” clamp), GM andNM Series Actuators

Rotation Limiting with ZDB-AF2 in standard shaftmounting.

Rotation Limiting with ZDB-AF2 in short shaft mount-ing requires IND-AF2 Position Indicator. Actuator’sstandard clamp faces damper.

ZDB-AF2

ZG-H2

Miscellaneous

133

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Mec

hani

cal A

cces

sorie

s

ApplicationThe ZG-JSA jack shaft adaptors aredesigned to be inserted into hollow jackshafts which have an outside diametergreater than 3/4 inch and provide a 3/4inch shaft for mounting Belimo actuators.

Installation1. Check the inside edge of the jack shaft

for burrs. Use a file if necessary toremove any burr which would preventthe ZG-JSA from being inserted into thejack shaft.

2. The inside surface of the jack shaftshould be clean. If necessary, cleanthe jack shaft to remove any oil, grease,or dirt.

3. Loosen the tension nut on the ZG-JSAenough to allow the diameter of theholding wedge to be in line with the twoother sections of the adaptor.

4. Insert the ZG-JSA into the jack shaft.Care must be taken to make sure thatthe wedge section of the adaptor is aminimum of 1 1/2 inches from any jackshaft holding bushing. If the holdingwedge section is too close to a bushing,the adaptor may lock the jack shaft tothe bushing or the bushing may bedamaged.

5. Tighten the tension nut on the ZG-JSAto expand the holding wedge section,fixing the adaptor to the jack shaft.

6. Mount the specified actuator to the 3/4inch section of the adaptor.

Jack Shaft Adaptors ZG-JSA- . To adapt hollow jack shafts to fit Belimo actuators

Technical Data ZG-JSA-1 ZG-JSA-2 ZG-JSA-3

Jack shaft size

Outside dia. 1.00 " 1 5/16" 1.05"

Inside dia. 3/4 " 1 3/32" 27/32"

Weight 1.3 lbs. 2.3 lbs. 1.6 lbs.

Material Cold rolled steel, nickel plated

Dimensions

ZG-JSA-.

A B C D

ZG-JSA-1 3/4 3/4 – 10 3/4

ZG-JSA-2 1 1/16 3/4 6 12 1/2

ZG-JSA-3 13/16 3/4 6 12 1/4

Adia. B

dia.

DApproximate

Holding wedge Tension nut

C

®

ZG-100 Universal Mounting Bracket For SM, AM, GM, NF, and AF series actuators

ApplicationThe ZG-100 universal mounting bracket is designed for appli-cations where the actuator cannot be mounted directly to thedamper shaft, and no proper mounting surface is available. Itmay be used for outside or inside the duct mounting, fastenedto the ductwork or directly to the damper assembly. It mayalso be used to mount to other surfaces rather than the duct.

The ZG-100 is provided with prepunched hole patterns for theSM, GM, NF and AF series actuators and their associatedcrankarm adaptor brackets. The hole pattern layout allowsmounting these actuators in three, different, mounting orienta-tions. The ZG-100 may also be field drilled for special ormore exact mounting of linkage components.

Installation1. Mount the appropriate set of crankarm adaptor kit brackets

and crankarm to the actuator to be used. When using springreturn actuators, care must be taken to select the propermounting orientation for the correct fail-safe operation.

ACTUATOR CRANKARMSERIES KIT FOR ZG-100

SM ZG-SM2AM ZG-AMGM ZG-GM2NF ZG-AFAF ZG-AF

Note: Follow the instructions for mounting the adaptor kitsto the actuator or the actuator may be damaged.

2. Position the ZG-100 mounting bracket in the planned mount-ing location. If possible, do not fasten at this time. TheZG-100 can be mounted by using either the four 1/4 inchdiameter holes on its base or five 1/4 x 5/8 inch oval holeson its edge. Additional holes may be drilled if necessary.

3. Position the actuator/adaptor assembly in the desired mount-ing location against the ZG-100 and see if one of the existinghole patterns can be used for the actuator mounting. If theexisting hole patterns cannot be used, mark the correct holepositions and drill the desired holes. Do not mount.

4. With the actuator mounting position established, positionthe ZG-100 bracket in the best position for propercrankarm/linkage alignment. Fasten the ZG-100 to themounting surface.

5. Mount the actuator/adaptor assembly to the ZG-100.

6. Install the crankarm linkage between the actuator and damper.

7. Cycle the actuator through its operational range to verifycorrect linkage setup. The SM, GM, and AF actuatorseries may be manually operated without power available.

OTHER UNIVERSAL MOUNTING BRACKETS

MODEL ACTUATOR USED WITHZG-101 SM, AM, GM, NF, AFZG-103 SM, AM, GMZG-104 SM, AM, GMZG-105 NMZG-106 NF, AFZG-107 NF, AFZG-108 NF, AF

134

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

®

135

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Mec

hani

cal A

cces

sorie

s

ZG-101 Universal Mounting Bracket For SM, AM, GM, NF, and AF series actuators

®

ApplicationThe ZG-101 universal mounting bracket is designed for appli-cations where the actuator cannot be mounted directly to thedamper shaft, and no proper mounting surface is available. Itmay be used for outside or inside the duct mounting. Thebracket is designed to mount to the damper base, providinggreater strength than mounting to the sheet metal or fiber-board duct only. It may also be used as a standard right anglemounting bracket where more contact area is desired. Thelarger contact area spreads the torsional load created by theactuator/damper operation over a wider area.

The ZG-101 is provided with prepunched hole patterns for theSM, GM, NF and AF series actuators and their associatedcrankarm adaptor brackets. The hole pattern layout allowsmounting these actuators in two, different, mounting orienta-tions.


and crankarm to the actuator to be used. When using springreturn actuators, care must be taken to select the propermounting orientation for the correct fail-safe operation.


SM ZG-SM2AM ZG-AMGM ZG-GM2NF ZG-AFAF ZG-AF


2. Position the ZG-101 mounting bracket in the plannedmounting location. If possible, do not fasten at this time.The ZG-101 can be mounted by using at least three of thenine 1/4 x 5/8 inch oval holes. Additional holes may bedrilled if necessary.

3. Position the actuator/adaptor assembly in the desired mount-ing location against the ZG-101 and see if one of the existinghole patterns can be used for the actuator mounting. If theexisting hole patterns cannot be used, mark the correct holepositions and drill the desired holes. Do not mount.




7. Cycle the actuator through its operational range to verifycorrect linkage setup. The SM, GM, and AF actuatorseries may be manually operated without power available.


MODEL ACTUATOR USED WITHZG-100 SM, AM, GM, NF, AFZG-103 SM, AM, GMZG-104 SM, AM, GMZG-105 NMZG-106 NF, AFZG-107 NF, AFZG-108 NF, AF

136

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

ZG-102 Multiple Actuator Mounting Bracket For GM and AF series actuators

®

ApplicationThe multiple actuator mounting bracket is designed for caseswhere it is necessary to mount two actuators to one shaft toprovide extra torque.The dual mounting bracket is typically used with the AF andGM series actuators. This is due to the fact that each ofthese series are the highest torque range available.

Installation1. Determine if the second actuator will mount on top of

(Figure A) or 180° opposed to (Figure B) the first actuator.2. Mount the first actuator as you would normally; but, do

not wire at this time. Make sure the shaft clamp assem-bly on the actuator is positioned correctly for properdamper operation.

3. Mount the actuator rear mounting bracket to the top ofthe multiple actuator mounting bracket. There are twolocations for the mounting of this bracket. Hole set A isthe preferred location. Hole set B is to be used if addi-tional clearances are required to route flexible conduit tothe actuators.

4. Loosen the three locking screws located in the slots ofthe mounting bracket.

5. Adjust the top section of the bracket to a height whichclears the top of the first actuator by approximately 1/8". Tighten the three locking screws.

6. Mount the second actuator on the shaft and slide themounting bracket under the second actuator so the rear mounting bracket stud engages the slot at the rear of theactuator.

7. Transfer the thru hole locations from the multiple actuatormounting bracket base to the mounting surface.

8. Drill the three holes. (Use a No. 2 drill if you are using theNo. 8 sheet metal screws provided.)

9. Fasten the multiple mounting bracket.10. After verifying the correct orientation of the shaft clamp

assembly of the second actuator, tighten the fastening nuts on the clamp.

11. Wire the actuators in parallel to the controller.12. Power the actuators and check for proper operation.

AccessoryAV10 - 18 Universal shaft extension

Hole set B Hole set A

7"

3 3/8"

5 3/4"

1 15/16"

Material: 12 GA Galvanized

Weight: 1.8 lbs.

Note: The majoradvantage with thismethod is it requiresless mounting area.The manual override,if available, cannotbe used in this configuration.

Note: The major advantagesare that a shorter shaft isrequired and a lower profileis achieved.

Figure A Figure B

137

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Mec

hani

cal A

cces

sorie

s

ZG-103 Universal Mounting Bracket For SM and GM series actuators

ApplicationThe ZG-103 universal mounting bracket is designed for appli-cations where the actuator cannot be mounted directly to thedamper shaft, and no proper mounting surface is available. Itmay be used for outside or inside the duct mounting. TheZG-103 is designed to mount the SM and GM series actua-tors in the same mounting locations as common foot mount-ed, crankarm style actuators.

The ZG-103 is provided with prepunched hole patterns for theSM, and GM series actuators and their associated crank-armadaptor brackets. The hole pattern layout allows mountingthese actuators in two, different, mounting orientations.


and crankarm to the actuator to be used. When usingspring return actuators, care must be taken to select theproper mounting orientation for the correct fail-safe operation.


SM ZG-SM2AM ZG-AMGM ZG-GM2


2. Position the ZG-103 mounting bracket in the plannedmounting location. If possible, do not fasten at this time.The ZG-103 can be mounted by using at least two of thesix 1/4 inch diameter holes in it base. Additional holesmay be drilled if necessary.

3. Position the actuator/adaptor assembly in the desiredmounting location against the ZG-103 and locate the exist-ing hole pattern for the actuator mounting. If the existinghole patterns cannot be used, mark the correct hole posi-tions and drill the desired holes. Do not mount.

4. With the actuator mounting position established, positionthe ZG-103 bracket in the best position for propercrankarm/linkage alignment. Fasten the the ZG-103 to themounting surface.



7. Cycle the actuator through its operational range to verifycorrect linkage setup. The SM, and GM actuator seriesmay be manually operated without power available.


MODEL ACTUATOR USED WITHZG-100 SM, AM, GM, NF, AFZG-101 SM, AM, GM, NF, AFZG-104 SM, AM, GMZG-105 NMZG-106 NF, AFZG-107 NF, AFZG-108 NF, AF

13"

2 3/4"

7"


Weight: 2.9 lbs.

®

138

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

ZG-104 Universal Mounting Bracket For SM, AM and GM series actuators

ApplicationThe ZG-104 universal mounting bracket is designed for appli-cations where the actuator cannot be mounted directly to thedamper shaft, and no proper mounting surface is available. Itmay be used for outside or inside the duct mounting. TheZG-104 is designed to mount the SM, and GM series actua-tors in the same mounting locations as common foot mount-ed, crankarm style actuators.

The ZG-104 is provided with prepunched hole patterns for theSM and GM series actuators and their associated crankarmadaptor brackets. The hole pattern layout allows mountingthese actuators in 2, different, mounting orientations.


and crankarm to the actuator to be used. When usingspring return actuators, care must be taken to select theproper mounting orientation for the correct fail-safe operation.


SM ZG-SM2AM ZG-AMGM ZG-GM2


2. Position the ZG-104 mounting bracket in the plannedmounting location. If possible, do not fasten at this time.The ZG-104 can be mounted by using at least three of thenine 1/4 inch diameter holes in it base. Additional holesmay be drilled if necessary.

3. Position the actuator/adaptor assembly in the desiredmounting location against the ZG-104 and locate the exist-ing hole pattern for the actuator mounting. If the existinghole patterns cannot be used, mark the correct hole posi-tions and drill the desired holes. Do not mount.




7. Cycle the actuator through its operational range to verifycorrect linkage setup. The SM, and GM actuator seriesmay be manually operated without power available.


MODEL ACTUATOR USED WITHZG-100 SM, AM, GM, NF, AFZG-101 SM, AM, GM, NF, AFZG-103 SM, AM, GMZG-105 NMZG-106 NF, AFZG-107 NF, AFZG-108 NF, AF

13"

6 1/8"

4"


Weight: 3.0 lbs.

®

139

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Mec

hani

cal A

cces

sorie

s

ZG-105 Universal Mounting Bracket For NM series actuators

4"

2"

8"


Weight: 0.7 lbs.

ApplicationThe ZG-105 universal mounting bracket is designed for appli-cations where the actuator cannot be mounted directly to thedamper shaft, and no proper mounting surface is available. Itmay be used for outside or inside the duct mounting. The ZG-105 is designed to mount the NM series actuators in the samemounting locations as common foot mounted, crankarm styleactuators.

The ZG-105 is provided with prepunched hole patterns for usewith the NM series actuators with the ZG-NM3 crankarmadaptor kit. The hole pattern layout allows mounting theseactuators in two, different, mounting orientations.

Installation1. Position the ZG-105 mounting bracket in the planned

mounting location. If possible, do not fasten at this time.The ZG-105 can be mounted by using the three 9/64 inchdiameter holes in its base. Additional holes may be drilledif necessary.

2. Using a number 10 tamper-proof torx screwdriver, removethe four torx head screws on the base of the actuator.

3. Position the actuator in the desired mounting locationagainst the ZG-105 and locate the existing hole pattern forthe actuator mounting.

4. Align the screw holes in the base of the actuator to theselected hole set in the ZG-105 and fasten the actuator tothe bracket using the four screws removed in step 2.

5. Mount the NM crankarm into the universal mounting clampat the desired starting angle. Fasten the ZG-105 to themounting surface.

6. Install the crankarm linkage between the actuator anddamper.

7. Cycle the actuator through its operational range to verifycorrect linkage setup. The NM actuator series may bemanually operated without power available.


MODEL ACTUATOR USED WITHZG-100 SM, GM, NF, AFZG-101 SM, GM, NF, AFZG-103 SM, GMZG-104 SM, GMZG-106 NF, AFZG-107 NF, AFZG-108 NF, AF

AccessoryTOOL-03 #10, Tamper-proof TORX screwdriver

®

140

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

ZG-106 / ZG-107 Universal Mounting Bracket For AF and NF series actuators

ApplicationThe ZG-106 and ZG-107 universal mounting brackets aredesigned for applications where the actuator cannot bemounted directly to the damper shaft. They may be used foroutside or inside the duct mounting. The ZG-106 and ZG-107are designed to mount the NF and AF series actuators in thesame mounting locations as common foot mounted, crankarmstyle actuators. Hole patterns in the base match commonHoneywell™ and Johnson Controls™ actuators for easy retro-fit. The ZG-106 and ZG-107 are designed with different actua-tor mounting heights. The ZG-106 is designed to place the KH-AFcrankarm in the same relative position as the Honeywell™Mod IV actuators. The ZG-107 will place the crankarm in thesame relative position as the Honeywell™ Mod III actuators.

The ZG-106 and ZG-107 are provided with hole patterns tomount the NF and AF series actuators in either a horizontal orvertical position to meet space requirements. The KH-AFcrankarm is required to fully convert the NF or AF forcrankarm operation.

Installation1. When using spring return actuators, care must be taken to

select the proper mounting orientation for the correct fail-safe operation.

2. If this is a new installation, position the ZG-106 or ZG-107mounting bracket in the planned mounting location. Do notfasten at this time.

If this a retrofit installation replacing common Honeywell™or Johnson Control™ actuators, and the bolt pattern of thebracket matches the pattern of the previous actuator, fas-ten the bracket to the mounting surface. Mount the KH-AFcrankarm to the actuator. Proceed to step 6.

3. Position the actuator in the desired mounting position (hori-zontal or vertical) in the ZG-106 or ZG-107. Slide in themounting bolts to temporarily hold the actuator to the bracket.

4. Mount the KH-AF crankarm to the actuator in the requiredoperating position.

5. Position the bracket/actuator assembly in the best positionfor proper crankarm/linkage alignment. Mark the bracketposition. Remove the actuator. Fasten the bracket to themounting surface.

6. Mount the actuator to the bracket using the 2 mountingbolts and lock nuts.

7. Install the linkage assembly between the damper and actuator.

8. Cycle the actuator through its operational range to verifycorrect linkage setup. The AF actuator series may be man-ually operated without power available.


MODEL ACTUATOR USED WITHZG-100 SM, GM, NF, AFZG-101 SM, GM, NF, AFZG-103 SM, GMZG-104 SM, GMZG-105 NMZG-108 NF, AF

5 1/2"

A

2 1/4"

B

MODEL NO. A B ZG-106 1.50" 1.02" ZG-107 2.25" 1.77"

MODEL NO. A B ZG-106 1.50" 1.02" ZG-107 2.25" 1.77"


Weight: ZG-106 0.7 lbs.ZG-107 0.9 lbs.

®

141

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Mec

hani

cal A

cces

sorie

s

ZG-108 Universal Mounting Bracket For AF and NF series actuators

ApplicationThe ZG-108 universal mounting bracket is designed for appli-cations where the actuator cannot be mounted directly to thedamper shaft. It may be used for outside or inside the ductmounting. The ZG-108 is designed to mount the NF and AFseries actuators in the same mounting locations as commonfoot mounted, crankarm style actuators. Hole patterns in thebase match common Honeywell™, Siebe™ (Barber Colman™)and Johnson Controls™ actuators for easy retrofit.

The ZG-108 is provided with hole patterns to mount the NFand AF series actuators in either a horizontal or vertical posi-tion to meet space requirements. The KH-AF crankarm isrequired to fully convert the NF or AF for crankarm operation.

Installation1. When using spring return actuators, care must be taken to

select the proper mounting orientation for the correct fail-safe operation.

2. If this is a new installation, position the ZG-108 mountingbracket in the planned mounting location. Do not fasten atthis time.

If this is a retrofit installation replacing common Honeywell™,Siebe™ (Barber Colman™) or Johnson Control™ actuators,and the bolt pattern of the bracket matches the pattern ofthe previous actuator, fasten the bracket to the mountingsurface. Mount the KH-AF crankarm to the actuator.Proceed to step 6.

3. Position the actuator in the desired mounting position (hori-zontal or vertical) on the ZG-108. Slide in two of themounting bolts and loosely tighten the lock nuts to tem-porarily hold the actuator to the bracket.

Note: The ZG-108 has hole patterns for three mountingheights for the crankarm location, choose the best heightfor the application.

4. Mount the KH-AF crankarm to the actuator in the requiredoperating position.

5. Position the bracket/actuator assembly in the best positionfor proper crankarm/linkage alignment. Mark the bracketposition. Remove the actuator. Fasten the bracket to themounting surface.

6. Mount the actuator to the bracket using the four mountingbolts and lock nuts at the same height location as deter-mined in step 3. Or, if a retrofit application, select the cor-rect hole set so the crankarm location matches thecrankarm of the actuator being replaced.

7. Install the linkage assembly between the damper and actuator.

8. Cycle the actuator through its operational range to verifycorrect linkage setup. The AF actuator series may bemanually operated without power available.


MODEL ACTUATOR USED WITHZG-100 SM, GM, NF, AFZG-101 SM, GM, NF, AFZG-103 SM, GMZG-104 SM, GMZG-105 NMZG-106 NF, AFZG-107 NF, AF

5 7/8"

2"

5 1/2"


Weight: 1.0 lbs.

®

142

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

ZG-108 Universal Mounting Bracket Mounting Positions for Typical Replacements

Barber Colman™ MA Type - Vertical Barber Colman™ MA Type - Horizontal (left) Barber Colman™ MA Type - Horizontal (right)

Honeywell™ Mod. IV Type- Vertical Honeywell™ Mod. IV Type - Horizontal (left) Honeywell™ Mod. IV Type - Horizontal (right)

Johnson Control™ 100 Series Type and Honeywell™ Mod. III Type

Vertical


Horizontal (left)


Horizontal (right)

Black holes represent correct bolt locations.

®

143

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Mec

hani

cal A

cces

sorie

s

® ZS-100 Weather ShieldFor all damper actuators


Weight: 3.5 lbs.

Note: The ZS-100 is supplied disassembled

3/16" dia.10 holes

ApplicationThe ZS-100 weather shield provides mod-erate protection to actuators which aremounted outdoors. This product is notdesigned as a water tight enclosure. Theweather shield will work with all damperactuators.

InstallationThe ZS-100 weather shield is supplieddisassembled. Supplying it in this manormakes it applicable to a wider range offield applications.It may be assembled with 2 sides, 2 endsand the cover to completely conceal theactuator. A hole punch can be used toprovide a hole to mount a wire conduit. Afoam gasket is also provided to achieve abetter seal between the cover and sidesor from the base to the mounting surface.If desired, a side or end can be deletedfrom the assembly to provide easy accessfrom the bottom of the enclosure.

General Instructions:1. The actuator mounting strap must be

shortened by 1 1/8 inches on both ends. (At the closest oblong slot to the end).

2. Install the actuator following the instructions for the actuator used.

3. Determine which side of the enclosurerequires holes for wiring. To ease installation, holes should be made in the housing prior to assembly.

4. Assemble the ends and sides together first, then attach the cover.

5. If using the gasket, peel off the backing from the gasket and lay it onto the surface without stretching it. If stretched, it may pull loose with age.

6. Thread the wiring temporarily throughthe wiring hole(s).

7. Center the housing over the actuator and mount the housing to the mounting surface with self-drilling screws.

8. Remove the cover from the housing and install conduit/fittings to the housing.

9. Check the operation of the actuator prior to re-installing the cover.

10. Re-install the cover.

AccessoriesZS-101 Base mounting plate

14 3/8"

6"

13" 8"

9 1/2"

144

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

®ZS-150 Weather ShieldFor all damper actuators

ApplicationThe ZS-150 weather shield provides moder-ate protection to actuators which are mount-ed outdoors. This product is not designedas a water tight enclosure. The one piece,smoke tinted, polycarbonate housing allowseasy mounting over all damper actuators.The tinted, clear housing allows easy view-ing of the actuator in operation.

InstallationThe ZS-150 weather shield is supplied as aone piece enclosure. Two 7/8 inch wiringholes are pre-drilled to allow easy connec-tions of conduit to the housing. If connec-tions must be made to a different spot onthe enclosure or only one hole is required,two plastic plugs are provided to seal theholes. A foam gasket is also provided toachieve a better seal between the base ofthe enclosure to the mounting surface.

General Instructions:1. The actuator anti-rotation strap must be

shortened by 2 inches on both ends.2. Install the actuator following the

instructions for the actuator used.3. If using the gasket, peel off the backing

and lay it onto the housings flange sur-face without stretching it. If stretched, itmay pull away with age.

4. Attach the conduit fitting(s), if used, tothe housing and thread the cable(s)through the fitting(s).

5. Center the housing over the actuatorand fasten the housing to the mountingsurface with self-drilling screws.

12 3/4" [324]

8 3/8"[213]

4"[102]

5 1/4" [146]

7/8" dia. [22.2]

2 holes

3/16" dia. [4.8] 6 holes

16" [406]

Material: Polycarbonate

Color: Clear, smoke tinted

Weight: .8 lbs [.4 kg]

145

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Mec

hani

cal A

cces

sorie

s

ZS-260 Explosion-proof HousingFor GM…, AM…, SM…, AF…, NF…, LF… actuators

®


Application

The ZS-260 explosion-proof housing may be used with theGM…, AM…, SM…, AF…, NF…, LF… series actuators. Thishousing is not designed for direct coupling. It is for use inClass I, II and III hazardous locations, and to meet the require-ments for NEMA 4, 7 & 9 type enclosures.

OperationThe ZS-260 enclosure is designed so that the required actua-tor may be easily field mounted into the enclosure. The actua-tor is fastened on to the internal portion of the operating shaftand secured at the end with an anti-rotation strap. A crank-arm, such as the KH8, is mounted to the external portion ofthe operating shaft for connection to connection to the damperlinkage. ZG-109 right angle, and ZG-110 standoff mountingbrackets may be used (see back).

The ZS-260 is designed so that the operating shaft can bemounted on either the front or rear side of the housing.

AccessoriesKH8 Universal crankarmKG8 Universal ball jointKG10 Universal ball jointZG-109 Right angle mounting bracketZG-110 Stand-off mounting bracket

Technical Data ZS-260Material Housing: cast, copper-free, aluminum,

Cover bolts: stainless steelOperating shaft: stainless steel

Conduit holes 3/4”–14 NPT (2 supplied) see Note 1

Operating shaft diameter 1/2 inchOperating shaft location Front or rear side of housing

(Field selected)Approved applications UL & CSA, Class I, II & III;

Group B, C, D, E, F & GNEMA 7, Class I, Groups B, C & DNEMA 9, Class II, Groups E, F & GNEMA 4

Weight 31.0 lb. (14.0 kg) without actuator

Note 1: Fittings that meet the requirements of the hazardouslocation must be used. All applications must comply withapplicable local and/or national electric code.

Note: Since conditions of use of this product are outside thecontrol of Belimo, the purchaser should determine suitability ofthe product for their intended use, and assumes all risk andliability in connection therewith.

8 1/4

3 3/16

16.00

9.500

10.000

8

6.435 (REF)

2 3/8 (REF)

0.690 (REF)

0.690 (REF)

146

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

ZS-260 Explosion-proof Housing ®

Drive Shaft

Front

Back

Bolt Housing

Conduit Holes3/4-14 NPT

Rear Shaft Location Plug

Anti-Rotation Strap

Pan

10

7

8

4

6

5

2

3

9

–AM

–LF

–SM

–GM

–AF/NF

–FM

ZS-260 Mounting Instructions

1. Determine proper operating shaft location.

2. Remove threaded plug from the hole in which theoperating shaft will be mounted.

3. Install the anti-rotation strap, mounting plate, to theside of the housing where the operating shaft will bemounted.

4. From the inside surface of the housing, insert the oper-ating shaft, short length first, into the mounting hole.

5. Hand tighten the shaft bushing into the housing untilthe star nut/seal is in contact with the face of thehousing.

6. Using a screw driver blade, drive the star nut/sealclockwise until the bushing is locked into place.

7. Install the anti-rotation strap into the mounting plateat the designated holes for the actuator to be used.

8. Install actuator

9. Wire actuator (per electrical code).

10. Bolt housing together

KH8 Crankarmwith Ball Joint (KG8 or KG10)(order separately)

Push Rod (SH8 or SH10)

(order separately)

ZG-109

ZS-260 Housing

Mounting Hardware(included with ZG-109)

Duct

–AM

–LF

–SM

–GM

–AF/NF

–FM

ZS-260 Shaft Thru Front

Typical Mounting Sequence

Nut

Washer Casting

WasherBolt

LockWasher

KH8 Crankarmwith Ball Joint (KG8 or KG10)(order separately)

Push Rod (SH8 or SH10 )

(order separately)

ZG-110

ZS-260 Housing(shaft through rear)

Mounting Hardware(included with ZG-110)

Typical ZG-110 MountingTypical ZG-109 Mounting

147

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Mec

hani

cal A

cces

sorie

s

Technical Data ZS-300 (-1) (-5)

Material All 304 stainless steel housing, door, (with neoprene gasket),shaft, coupling, universal mounting plate, and hardware.

Conduit holes Field drilled as required. U.L. listed electrical fittings forNEMA 4X conditions must be used.

Operating shaft 1/2” by 5 15/16” long 304 stainless steel with integral cou-pling for direct mounting to 1/2” round or hexagonal driveshafts. Square head set screws are 304 stainless steel.

Optional shafts ZS-300-C1 1/2” shaft adaptor (standard with housing)ZS-300-C2 3/4” shaft adaptorZS-300-C3 1” shaft adaptor

Rotating shaft seal Machined PVC hub, bronze oilite bearings, 10 PSI,Nitrile, bi-rotational, hydrodynamic, radial lip Wave seal.

Industry standards The Belimo ZS-300 NEMA 4X enclosure and Belimo modelSM, GM, AM, AF, NF and LF are U.L. listed as an assem-bly. These enclosures conform to the NEMA standard forType 4X (water-, dust-tight and corrosion resistant).

Weight 11 lbs. [5 kg] without actuator or mounting brackets.

2 holes 5/16" dia. typ.

5"

3"2"

8 3/4"

17 1/4" 3 3/8" max.

4 1/8"

Drive Shaft/Coupler

15 7/8"

4 7/16"

5 1/2"

4"

1 1/2"

2 1/2" Adjustment

Optional AdjustableMounting BracketTop and Bottom

FRONT VIEW

SIDE VIEW

PLAN VIEW

Bearing and Shaft Seal

7 1/4"

ZS-300 ZS-300 NEMA 4X HousingFor AM, SM, GM, AF, NF, LF Series Actuators

ApplicationThe ZS-300 (-1) NEMA 4X enclosuresmay be used with SM, GM, AM, AF, NFand LF Belimo actuators. They areintended for use primarily to provide pro-tection against corrosion, windblown dustand rain, splashing water, hose-directedwater; undamaged by the formation of iceon the enclosure. Type 304 stainlesssteel enclosures resist moisture, dust, salt,and corrosive chemicals, and are easy tokeep clean for sanitary applications.

OperationThe ZS-300 enclosures are designed sothat the required actuator may be easilymounted in the enclosure. The operatingshaft and coupling are inserted from thebackside through the rotating shaft seal.The actuator is fastened on the end of theoperating shaft and secured at the endwith an anti-rotation strap. Adjustablemounting brackets, if supplied, areassembled to the fixed mounting holes atthe top and bottom of the enclosure withstainless steel nuts, bolts and lock wash-ers. The direct drive coupling is designedfor a 1/2” round or hexagonal shaft andsecured with two square head set screws.Mounting brackets are adjusted andsecured in place.

Ordering InformationZS-300 Housing with mounting bracketsZS-300-1 Housing without mounting

bracketsZS-300-5 316L enclosures, custom

mounting brackets and operating shaft/couplings are available. Consult Belimo.

AccessoriesZS-300-BK Mounting bracket setZS-300-C1 1/2” shaft adaptor

(standard with housing)ZS-300-C2 3/4” shaft adaptorZS-300-C3 1” shaft adaptor

ZS-300 Protective Housing®

(Ordered separately)

148

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

ZS-300 Mounting instructions

1. The damper operating shaft should extend approximately 1 1/2 inches from the damper assembly or duct side. Mount thedrive shaft/coupler ➀ to the damper operating shaft ➁ . Fasten the coupler to the damper operating shaft by tightening thetwo 3/8 inch square head set screws ➂ .

2. Determine the housing mounting orientation for the application.

3. Locate the housing hole position(s) for the control wiring of the actuator.

4. Make the necessary holes in the housing for the electrical fittings. All fittings must be rated for use in NEMA 4X applications.

5. Install (if ordered with) the 2 mounting brackets ➃ to the housing using the four 1/4-20 screws, washers, and nuts ➄ . Do nottighten.

6. Carefully slide the housing over the drive shaft.

7. Place the housing in the desired mounting position. Transfer the mounting hole locations from the mounting bracket to themounting surface.

8. Drill the 4 holes and fasten the brackets to the surface.

9. Install the anti-rotation strap to the housing in the correct location for the actuator which is being used.

10. Mount the actuator to the drive shaft using the instructions for the actuator being used. Finger tighten the nuts of the universalclamp. Make sure the back of the actuator is parallel to the back of the housing.

11. The operating shaft must pass through the mounting clamp at least 3/8 of an inch. It must not extend beyond the front of thehousing. Slide the actuator/housing assembly in the mounting brackets to obtain the proper position.

12. Tighten the mounting brackets to the housing. Verify that the back of the actuator is still parallel to the back of the housing.Tighten the nuts on the universal clamp.

13. Make all of the required electrical connections.

14. Test the actuator/damper operation.

15. Fasten the housing cover ➅ using the 6 swivel clamps.

ZS-300 (-1, -5) NEMA 4X, stainless steel, corrosion resistant enclosures for SM…, GM…, AF…, and NF… actuators

®

SMLF

GMAF/NFFM/SF

Anti-Rotation Strap Mounting Locations

1

2

3

4

56

Inner plate, see detail below.

Swivel clamps (6)

149

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Mec

hani

cal A

cces

sorie

s

Notes/Work Pad®

150

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

S1,

S2

Au

xilia

ry S

wit

ch

P…

Fee

db

ack

Po

ten

tio

met

er

SG

A24

, SG

F24

Po

siti

on

ers

PT

A-2

50 P

uls

e W

idth

Mo

du

lati

on

Inte

rfac

e

IRM

-100

Inp

ut

Res

calin

g M

od

ule

AD

S-1

00 A

nal

og

to

Dig

ital

Sw

itch

NS

V24

Bat

tery

Bac

k-u

p M

od

ule

ZG

-R01

Res

isto

r F

or

4 to

20

mA

Co

nve

rsio

n

ZG

-R02

50%

Vo

ltag

e D

ivid

er

ZG

-R03

, ZG

-R05

, ZG

-R06

Res

isto

r K

its

(Fo

r m

ult

iple

act

uat

ors

wit

h H

on

eyw

ell S

erie

s 90

co

ntr

olle

rs.)

ZG

-X40

Tra

nsf

orm

er

ZG

-HT

R T

her

mo

stat

/Hea

ter

Kit

LM24 (-S) US

LM24-SR US

LM24-MFT US

NM24 US

NM24-SR US

NM24-MFT US

AM24 (-S) US

AM24-SR US

AM24-MFT US

GM24 US

GM24-SR US

GM-24-MFT US

LF24 (-S) US

LF24-SR (-S) US

LF24-3 (-S) US

LF24-MFT US

NF24 (-S) US

NF24-SR US

NF120 (-S) US

NF24-MFT US

AF24 (-S) US

AF24-SR (-S) US

AF24-MFT US

AF24-MFT95 US

AF120 (-S) US

AF230 (-S) US

• •• • • • • • • •• • • • • • •

• •• • • • • • • •• • • • • •

• •• • • • • • • •• • • • • •

• • • •• • • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • •

• •• • • • • • • • •

• •• • • • • • •

• •• • • • • • • •

•• • • • • • •

• •• • • • • • • •• • • • • • •

• • •••

152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 159 159 161 162

BELIMO ACTUATOR

BE

LIM

O E

LE

CT

RO

NIC

AC

CE

SS

OR

Y

See Page No.

Electronic Accessory Usage Chart ®

151

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Elec

troni

c Ac

cess

orie

s

Electronic Accessories®

We’ll help solve any application problem with a wide rangeof accessories and unparalleled customer service.

A CLOSER LOOK…





152

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

S1, S2 Auxiliary SwitchesFor the direct coupled actuator SM2…/ GM2…

®

ApplicationThe S1 and S2 auxiliary switches are used to indicate when adesired position of a damper is reached or to interface addi-tional controls for a specific control sequence.

OperationThe S1 and S2 auxiliary switches are mounted onto the directcoupled actuator. A spindle transmits the rotary motion of theactuator positively to the switching segments. Any switchingpoint on the micro-switches over the full scale of 0 to 10 canbe selected by means of the slotted disc, which can be lockedby the fixing screw in the hub of the disc. The position of theswitch can be read at any time.If required, the S1 and S2 can also be mounted on a P…feedback potentiometer, but 2 auxiliary switch units cannot bemounted on top of each other.

AssemblyUse the 4 long bolts, where a S1, S2 auxiliary switch ismounted on top of a P… potentiometer.

Switch setting1, Turn actuator by hand to the 0 setting.2. Loosen fixing screw in the center of the slotted disc.3. Select the desired switching point on the scale marked 0 to

10 by rotating the slotted disc.4. Re-lock the fixing screws.5. Check the switching points by turning the actuator by hand.

The slotted disc follows rotation. The micro-switches oper-ate when the arrow passed the positions 0 or 10 (whiteline). The switching symbols indicate the actual switchingpositions.

Note: with the S1, S2 auxiliary switches, the reversible indi-cator cannot be used. Use the 4 long bolts when the S1, S2auxiliary switches are used with the SM24-SR US or GM24-SR US.

Technical Data S1 S2

Number of switches 1 SPDT 2 SPDT

Switching capacity 7A (2.5 A) 250 VAC

Switching point adjustable over full actuator rotation 0to 10. Pre-setting with scale possible.Set switching points lockable.

Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cable




Housing NEMA type 2



Agency listings CE


Weight 5.3 oz [150 g] 7.4 oz [210 g]

Wiring diagram

S2

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

S1

NC

NO

S1

S2

S3

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

Voltage Resistive Inductive120 7 A 5.0 A250 7 A 2.5 A

153

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Elec

troni

c Ac

cess

orie

s

P… Feedback Potentiometer For the direct coupled actuator SM2…/ GM2…

®

ApplicationThe P… feedback potentiometers are used for continuousdamper control in conjunction with normal commercial P–con-trollers with feedback signals. The P… units can also be usedin conjunction with moving coil instruments for position indica-tion, or they can serve as a positioner for parallel operatingactuators when used with normal commercial controllers.

OperationThe P… feedback potentiometer is mounted onto the damperactuators. A spindle transmits the rotary motion of the motorpositively to the potentiometer, and no adjustments whatsoev-er are necessary. If required, 2 potentiometer units P… canbe mounted on top of each other.

AssemblyUse the 4 long bolts, where 2 P… units are mounted on top ofeach other.

Types

P500 Feedback potentiometer 500ΩP1000 Feedback potentiometer 1000ΩP2800 Feedback potentiometer 2800Ω

Technical Data P…

Resistance values as above

Output 1W

Tolerance ± 5%

Linearity ± 2%

Resolution min. 1%

Residual resistance max. 5% on both sides





Housing NEMA type 2




Weight 5.3 oz [150 g]

P1

P2

P3

P…

0

10

Wiring diagram

154

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

3 5/16 [84]

SQ

2 5/16 [59.5]

1 7/8 [48]

SQ

SGA24

Technical Data SGA24, SGF24



Control signal Y .5 to 10 VDC; 2 to 10 VDC (switchable)

Power output up to 10 actuators (1 mA max)

Degree of protection (SGA24 only NEMA 4 [1P54])

Connection Terminals (14 ga. wire max)


SGF24

1/4 [6]

11/16 [27]

3/64 to 13/64 [1 to 5]Panel thickness

Y = 0 to 10 VDC

SGA24SGF24

Y = 2 to 10 VDC

SGA24SGF24

SGA24, SGF24 Positioners For proportional actuators with a working range of 0 to 10 VDC or 2 to 10 VDC

®

ApplicationThese positioners are intended for the remote control of mod-ulating actuators or for use as a minimum positioner (providinga minimum limit for the output signal from a modulating con-troller). The control range is 0 to 100% of the angle of rotationof the actuator.

Positioner SGA24 is for surface mounting with a NEMA 4housing included. Positioner SGF24 is for flush mounting.

OperationThe positioner receives its supply voltage through terminals 1and 2. A rotary knob is turned, producing a proportional con-trol signal (Y) at the output (terminal 3) of either .5 to 10 VDCor 2 to 10 VDC and therefore a proportional change in theposition of the actuator between 0 and 100%. When used fora minimum limit, the positioner works as a higher of 2 signalselector. This function allows only the signal from the con-troller or positioner, whichever is greater, to go to the actuator.

FunctionThe changeover from 2 to10 V to 0 to 10 V is selected bymeans of a slide switch on the printed circuit board.The angle of rotation of the knob can be limited mechanically,by moving the adjustable stops under the knob.

AccessoryZG-SGF Mounting plate for single gang wiring box

Wiring diagram

Dimensions All ratings in brackets are metric.

Drilling template for SGF24 (flush mount)

Changeover switch

ø .136 [3.4]# 29 drill

ø 1/4 [6.4]

1 7/8 [48]

SQ

1.10 [28]

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 +

3 + Y

…SR US

A

B

1 Common

2 +

3 + Y

4 + Z

SGA24 SGF24

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 +

3 + Y

…24-SR US

1 Common

2 +

3 + Y

4 +

SGA24 SGF24

(–)

(+)


A Boff off 0%off on 0%on off 0 to 100%on on 100%

Override controlDamper control

SGA24 SGF24

Minimum Position Setting


Override switches are optional.

A 500Ω resistor (ZG-R01) must be added for 4 to 20 mA control

1

3

3

1

1

2

2

2

Ω 500Ω

155

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Elec

troni

c Ac

cess

orie

s

P250

1=COM2=24VHOT3=PULSE+4=PULSE—5=AUXV6=SIG. OUT

A

B

1 0P1

P2

NORM

TRIAC

1 2 3 4 5 6

2 3/

8"

2 1/4" 1"

ApplicationThe PTA-250 converts a single pulse-width modulated input to ananalog, 2 to 10 VDC, output to modulate a Belimo -SR actuator.The PTA-250 is available for replacement of existing installations.The …MFT product can replace 100% of the PTA-250 applica-tions, more effectively.

OperationA timed contact or solid state closure from the controlling micro-processor controller is converted to a linear analog output with 256steps of resolution. The last output is held until the PTA-250receives the end of the next pulsed output. The PTA-250’s outputwill not wrap around if an excessively long input pulse is received.Four input pulse clock rates are jumper selectable. Normal/Triacinput positions are also jumper selectable. The input signal can beoptically isolated from the PTA-250 circuit and can accept either posi-tive or negative polarity. A red LED indicator is provided to indicatethat power is applied to the PTA-250 and that the microprocessor isfunctioning. A green LED indicator is provided to indicate the pres-ence of a pulse from the controller.

Note: The onboard zero and span adjustments are not forfield use.

42

5

5

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 + Signal Input

4 – Signal Input

5 Aux. Power Output

6 Output 0 to 10 VDC

PTA-2501

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y1

4 Y2

5 U

…-SR US

3

2



Consult controller instruction data for more detailedinstallation information.

To reverse control rotation, use the reversing switch.

The PTA-250 and actuator may be powered from thesame transformer.

3

4

See controlinterface

diagramsbelow.

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 AC

4 AC5

6

PTA-250To …-SR Actuator

Triac, common pulsed signal (non-isolated circuit)

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 AC

4 AC5

6


Triac, hot pulsed signal (non-isolated circuit)

24 VAC Transformer

BASPower

PTAPower

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 AC

4 AC5

6


Triac, pulsed signal (isolated circuit)

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 + Signal Input

4 – Signal Input

5 Aux. Power Output

6


N.O.

Relay pulsed signal (non-isolated circuit)

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 + Signal Input

4 – Signal Input

5

6


N.O.

Relay pulsed signal (isolated circuit)

Separatepower supply12 to 24VDC/VAC

Pulse Width Modulation Interface PTA-250 To convert a pulse width modulated signal to a 2 to 10 VDC signal for Belimo proportional actuators.

(Series 3)

®

Technical Data PTA-250

Power supply 24 VAC ±15%24 VDC ±15%

Power consumption <1 W


Inputisolation: optically isolated (when wired as such)

type: normal or triac, jumper selectable

trigger level: 12 to 24 VAC/VDC or dry contact to com

time between 12.5 milliseconds mintrigger pulses:

impedance: VAC - 500 Ω, VDC - 10 KΩpulse duration/ four selectable ranges, in secondsresolution: of dry contact or SSR closure ± 40%

of signal increment

Range 1: 0.0235 to 6 seconds/in 0.0235 sec increments

Range 2: 0.0196 to 5 seconds/in 0.0196 sec increments

Range 3: 0.1 to 25.5 seconds/in 0.100 sec increments

Range 4: 0.59 to 2.93 seconds/in in 0.0092 increments

Output - voltage: 2 to 10 VDC- current: 15 mA max- accuracy: ± 2%

Electrical connection wire terminals, 14 gauge max

Ambient temperature -20°F to +150° F [-30°C to +65° C]

Operating humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing

Mounting Snap-Track (provided)

Dimensions - board: 2 3/16” x 2 3/16” x 9/16”

- with Track: 2 3/8" x 2 1/4" x 15/16"

Weight 1.5 oz

Wiring diagram

A

B

1 0

A

B

1 0A

B

1 0

Range 1 Range 2

Range 3 Range 4

A

B

1 0

Pulse timing selection Normal/Triac input selection

PTA-250

Dimensions

Control interface drawings

NORMAL

P2

TRIAC

156

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

SE

OU

TP

UT

T

SP

AN

Zero Offset adjustment

Span adjustment

1 2 3 44= O

UT

PU

T

PO

TS

= IN

CR

EA

SE

OU

TP

UT

1= C

OM

2

= 2

4V H

OT

3= IN

PU

T

BE

LIM

O I

RM

-100

SP

AN

4/20M

IRM-100

2 3/8"

1 7/8" 15/16”

ApplicationThe IRM-100 input rescaling module is designed to change non-standard voltage or current signal levels into a 2 to 10 VDC out-put to modulate Belimo -SR type actuators. The IRM-100 is avail-able for replacement of existing installations. The …MFT productcan replace 100% of the IRM-100 applications, more effectively.

OperationThe IRM-100 is installed between a controller and a Belimo...-SR actuator. The module can be adjusted to work with azero offset of 0 to 18 VDC and a span range of 2.6 to 17 VDC.The IRM-100 has a 2 pin jumper mounted to the circuit board.When the jumper is connected between these 2 pins, a 4 to20 mA signal can be fed directly into the IRM. The resultbeing the conversion of a wide range of analog control signalsto a 2 to 10 VDC range.

The IRM-100 may also be used to sequence several actuatorsfrom one signal source. This is done by adjusting the IRMunits to work at different input ranges. (Example: 2 to 5 VDC,5 to 8 VDC, 8 to 11 VDC, etc.)

Calibration1. Attach a variable signal source to the input and power wires

to the IRM-100.2. Apply power.3. Input the minimum signal level.4. Adjust the offset potentiometer to produce a 2 VDC signal

at the output. A clockwise rotation of the potentiometerscrew will increase the output signal.

5. Input the maximum signal level.6. Adjust the span adjustment to produce a 10 VDC signal at

the output. A clockwise rotation of the potentiometer screwwill increase the output signal.

7. Double check the input-output calibration and install.

2

To otheractuators

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

Control Signal

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Signal Input

4 Output, 2 to 10 VDC

IRM-100

1

1

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y1

4 Y2

5 U

…-SR US

(–)(+)

3

2


The controller should be powered from a separatetransformer.

The actuator and IRM-100 may be powered from thesame transformer.



3

4

5

5

4

IRM-100 Input Rescaling Module To adjust the zero start point and working span of Belimo proportional ( . . –SR) actuators.(Series 3)

®

Technical Data IRM-100

Power supply supply voltage: 24 VAC ± 15%24 VDC ± 15%

Power consumption < 1 watt


Input voltage: max voltage: 25 VDCzero (starting point): 0 to 18 VDCspan adjustment: 2.6 to 17 VDCimpedance: 400 KΩ0 to 20 mAimpedance: 500 Ω

Output voltage: 2 to 10 VDC current: 15 mA max

Electrical connection wire terminals, 14 gauge max

Ambient temperature -20° F to +150°F [-30° C to +65° C]



Dimensions board: 1 3/16" x 2 3/16" x 9/16"

w/Snap-Track: 1 7/8" x 2 3/8" x 15/16"

Weight .9 oz.

Wiring diagram

Dimensions

Jumper not connected toboth pins forvoltage appli-cations (asshipped)

Jumper onboth pins for4 to 20 mAapplications

current:

157

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Elec

troni

c Ac

cess

orie

s

ApplicationTo control reheat coils and/or a fan stage in a fan-poweredterminal unit. The ADS-100 is controlled by a 2 to 10 VDCreheat output of a temperature controller. (TRS-M)

OperationThe ADS-100 is designed to switch up to three independentstages of reheat on and off, according to a 2 to 10 VDC sig-nal. The three output stages are furnished with a triac output.Each stage can be adjusted independently from each otherover the 0 to 2.4° F throttling range of the TRS-M temperaturecontroller.The ADS-100 is shipped pre-adjusted, as shown in the follow-ing table. (Based on differential from setpoint)

If desired, each stage may be field readjusted for specialrequirements. Three red LED indicators are provided to verifywhen the stages are energized.

Setpoint readjustmentTools required: small screwdriver, voltmeter.To readjust the output stages, the following procedure is used:Connect the voltmeter to the desired switchpoint referencesignal output and terminal 1 (COM). Readjust the switch pointreference signal output with the corresponding potentiometerto your desired switch point.The adjustment range is 2.5 to 9.5 VDC. If you go below or abovethese values the ADS-100 may not switch off or on properly.If this occurs you have to increase or decrease your switchinglevel until the ADS-100 works correctly.

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Signal Input

4 Contactor

5 Ref. signal

6 Contactor

7 Ref. signal

8 Contactor

9 Ref. signal

ADS-100COM

∩ ∩∩

∩ ∩∩

∩ ∩∩

Reheat output(2 to 10 VDC)

from TRS-Mthermostat or

other controller

Reheat stage(24 VAC con-tactors 10 VAmax. per stage)

5,7,9 = Switch point reference signal for manualadjustment of stages 1,2, & 3 respectively.


Stage 1

#1

#2

#3

1

1

Stage 2Stage 3

2

(–)(+)

2

Analog to Digital Switch ADS-100 For Belimo proportional ( . . –SR) actuators.

®

Wiring diagram

Dimensions

1st. stage 2nd. stage 3rd. stageSwitch ON -0.45°F -1.35°F -2.25°FSwitch OFF -0.15°F -1.05°F -1.95°FSwitch ON 2.8V 5.8V 8.8VSwitch OFF 0.4V 0.2V 0.4V

ADS-100

3 7/16"

2" 1 3/8"

12

34

56

78

9

24 VAC Transformer

s1 Common

2 + Hot

3

45

6

7

8

9

ADS-100

– +

Voltmeter

ReferenceSignalVDC

Reheat stage turn on from setpoint

Switchpoint adjustment drawings

Technical Data ADS-100

Power supply 24 VAC ± 20% 50/60 HZ


Transformer sizing 3 VA (not including contactors)

Electrical connection 9 pole wire-terminal

Control input 2 to 10 VDC

Input impedance 100 K ΩAdjusting range 2.5 to 9.5 VDC

Dead band .3°F fixed

Switching capacity 24 VAC 10 VA max. (voltage sinking triac)


Dimensions 3 1/4" x 2" (3 7/16" x 2" w/snap-track)

158

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

2 3 10 9

1 11 NSV 24

max4A (T)

SM24 US( + ) ( + ) ( – )~ ~ COM

3 2 1

+

–

NSV-BAT (2) or equiv.

24 VACCOM ~

2 3 10 9

1 11 NSV 24

+

–

max4A (T)

SM24-SR US ( + ) ( – ) HOT COM

3 2 1

NSV-BAT (2) or equiv.

Y1

24 VACCOM ~

Wiring diagram

ApplicationSeveral Belimo damper actuators can be used either with 24VAC or 24 VDC.In case of a power failure, the NSV24 battery back-up unitswitches the damper actuator from its main AC power supplyover to the 24 VDC battery to drive the actuators to their safe-ty position.For easy maintenance, the battery back-up system is placedin the control panel, not in the actuator.Several actuators may be powered by one back-up module.The batteries are separate from the NSV24.

OperationThe NSV24 is connected to the same 24 VAC power source as the damper actuators. It alsocharges the 24 V (2-12 volt batteries) storage battery. Itscharge current is limited to 150 mA maximum, and the maxi-mum charge voltage is temperature compensated.In case of a power failure, the NSV24 switches immediatelyover to the battery power source, and according to the controlfunction, the actuators will move to their safety position.After 250 seconds, the batteries are disconnected from theactuators to prolong battery life. Because of this, a safe bat-tery back-up can be provided for several short-term failures.The main power source operation is indicated by a greenLED, and the battery power source by a red LED.

Connectable ActuatorsModel Maximum per moduleGM24 US 20GM24-MFT US 15GM24-SR US 15AM24 US 30AM24-MFT US 30AM24-SR US 30NM24 US 30NM24-MFT US 30NM24-SR US 30LM24-3 US 30LM24-MFT US 30LM24-SR-2.0 US 30

AccessoriesNSV-BAT 12 VDC 1.3 Ah battery (2 required)

Battery Back-up Module NSV24 ®

3" 2 5/16"

3 3/

16"

1"

Dimensions

Technical Data NSV24

Power supply 24 VAC ± 20% 50/60 Hz

Fusing 4A slow blow fuse

Power consumption Min. 5W (without actuator load)

Transformer 8 VA

Batteries 24 V Nominal 1.2 Ah (2-12 volt lead-acid batteries; batteries not suppliedwith module)

Maintenance The batteries should be checkedannually (approximate life is 6 years)

Charging circuit Charge current max. 150 mACharge voltage 24-27 V, temperaturecompensated

Battery back-up operation 24 V nominal 1.2 Ah, max. 60 Wauto shut off after 250 seconds

Indication LED Green - Main power source operation(battery will be charged)Red - Battery back-up operation

Mounting Mounted in the control panel with an11 terminal plug-in base (not suppliedwith module)

Ambient temperature 14°F to +122°F [-10°C . . . +50°C]

Note: Fail-safe direction must havenormally closed contact.

AM24-SR US

AM24 USThis diagram is shown in the“failed” mode and prior to the250 sec time-out function.

ApplicationThe NSV-BAT battery is for use with the NSV24 battery back-up module. It is a sealed, maintenance free, lead-acid battery.Two NSV-BAT batteries are required for one NSV24.

NSV-BAT 12 V Battery

Dimensions

Technical Data NSV-BAT

Battery type Lead-acid

Voltage 12VDC

Nominal capacity 1.2 AH

Connections .187 male spade

Weight 1.32 lb [.6 kg]

®

2.13"[54]

2"[51]

3.82"[97]

1.65"[42]

+

–

ApplicationThe ZG-R01 is a 499 Ω Resistor which has been encased in asection of heat shrink tubing with short sections of hook upwire.The ZG-R01 is used to convert a 4 to 20mA signal into a2 to 10 VDC control signal.

ZG-R01 Resistor for 4 to 20 mA conversions

Dimensions

Approx. 9"

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y1 Input, 0 to 10 V

4

5

Ω ZG-R01

ApplicationThe ZG-R02 is a voltage divider designed so that when connectedto a 100 KΩ input impedance, the output signal is 50% if theinput signal. The voltage divider circuit is encased in a short sec-tion of heat shrink tubing with three short sections of hook up wire.

ApplicationFor use with the AF24-MFT95 US or SM24-SR94 US actuators and Honeywell® controllers

ZG-R03 - see table to leftZG-R05 - see table to leftZG-R06 - see table to left

ZG-R02 50% voltage divider

Dimensions

Resistor kits for multiple actuator applications

Approx. 10"

1

1

ZG-R02Ω

Output0 to 10 VDC TypeSignal Input

COMCOM

Grey

Black

White

The impedance of the device attached must be 100kΩ.

Number of ResistanceActuators Ω

2 1403 71.54 47.55 37.56 28

135 Ω OperationNumber of ResistanceActuators Ω

1 2372 1503 1244 1135 1056 97.6

4 to 20 mA Operation

Number of ResistanceActuators Ω

2 13003 9104 768

For Honeywell®ElectronicSeries 90 Circuits

(W7100, W973, T775)

Resistor Kit No. ZG-R03 Resistor Kit No. ZG-R05 Resistor Kit No. ZG-R06

159

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Elec

troni

c Ac

cess

orie

s

160

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

ApplicationThe ZG-CBNS US accessory is used when the applicationrequires the wiring terminations to be made at the actuator.

OperationThe ZG-CBNS US serves as an electrical junction box. Theproducts that can be used with this accessory are as follows:

NF24 US, NF24-S US, NF120 US NF120-S USNF24-SR US, NF24-MFT US

AF24 US, AFR24 US, AFR24-S USAF120 US, AFR120 US, AFR120-S USAF230 USAF24-SR US, AFR24-SR US. AF24-MFT US

Due to the internal volume of this junction box, according toUL requirements, The ZG-CBNS US CANNOT be used withthe following products:

NF24-S2 USAF24-S USAF120-S USAF230-S US

Technical Data ZG-CBNS US

Voltage rating 250 VAC

Electrical connection Maximum 5 line voltage connection

Housing rating UL94 5V

Material type FR/ABS CYCOLAC KJW4051

Ambient temperature -22°F to+122°F [-30°C to +50°C]


Agency listing UL 873 (pending)

Quality standards ISO 9001

Weight <.5 lbs

ZG-CBNS US Junction Box for NF…(-S) and AF…*Actuators

®

ZG-CBNS US Junction box

Assembly and Installation1. Remove supply voltage from the actuator and / or the auxil-

iary switch.2. Remove the plastic insert from the actuator conduit fitting.

(1)3. Cut the actuator cable (s) to approximately 6 inches.

Remove approximately 4 inches of the black cable insula-tion. Be sure not to damage the insulation of the conduc-tors inside. This will void the actuators warranty.

4. Insert the actuator cable (s) into the junction box holes (Aand B). Slide the housing towards the actuator.

5. Insert the cable (s) through strain relief assembly (3),thread strain relief assembly to the actuator conduit fitting(1) and tighten. Thread the nut (4) over the cable andtighten. Repeat process for the second cable. If no secondcable is present, use the plug (5) with the nut (4). The sec-ond strain relief assembly is required to properly secure thehousing to the actuator.

6. Assemble the cover and gasket: Knock out the appropriateconduit hole in the junction box cover (7). Pull field wiringthrough the hole in the cover and install the field suppliedconduit fitting. Optional, knockouts are available at thesides of the junction box.

7. When wiring connections are completed, secure the boxcover in place with the supplied screws (8).

8. Install the actuator.

161

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Elec

troni

c Ac

cess

orie

s

ApplicationThe PS-100 power supply and signal simulator is designed tooperate most proportional, floating, and on-off style actuatorswithout the presence of a controller.The PS-100 can produce 24 VAC on-off and floating controlsignal along with a 0 to 10 VDC and 135Ω proportional sig-nal. A multi-function digital display is provided which can readeither the 0 to 10 VDC output or a 0 to 10 VDC feedback sig-nal either as voltage or percentage of control.The PS-100 comes with a 120 to 24 VAC, plug into the walltransformer for power. Both the PS-100 and transformer aresupplied in a black fabric carrying case.

Replacement Power Supply: PS-XFMR

3.75"[9.5]

2" [5]6.25"[16]

2.75" [7]

Dimensions

Power supply, signal simulator PS-100

Technical Data PS-100

Power supply 120 VAC 50/60 Hz

Power consumption < 4 W without actuator

Transformer Primary: 120 VAC, 35 WSecondary: 24 VAC, Class 2 trans.PN: PS-XFMR

Terminal outputs Push-button, wire terminals (12)On-off, Floating Point135Ω, 0 to 10 VDC

Input 0 to 10 VDC

Display LCD

Readouts, Output 0 to 10 VDC in volts or percentagebased on a 2 to 10 VDC control span

Readouts, Input 0 to 10 VDC in volts or percentagebased on a 2 to 10 VDC control span

Weight 3 lbs [1.4 kg] with case

Wiring diagram

ApplicationThe ZG-X40 is a 40 VA, 120 to 24 VAC transformer. It isdesigned so that both the primary and secondary leads exitthrough the same side of a 4 1/4" square outlet box cover.With this design, all wiring can be done inside a standard J-box with a minimum amount of labor.

Wire Specification

No. 18 AWG leads, 6 1/2" lengthTermination ColorPrimary White-BlackSecondary Yellow-Yellow

Maximum Number of Like Actuators per Transformer

Transformer ZG-X4040 VA, 120 to 24 VAC Transformer

ZG-X40

120 VAC 24 VAC

Yellow

Yellow

White

Black

4 1/4

4 1/4

2 3/4

Technical Data ZG-X40

Primary Voltage 120 VAC 50/60 Hz

Secondary Voltage 24 VAC

Max VA Rating 40 VA

Connections 6 1/2" leads with stripped ends

Type Class 2

Mounting Method 4 1/4" square outlet box cover

Agency Approvals UL 1585, CSA 22.2 #66

®

Model # QtyNM24 US 11NM24-SR US 13AM24 US 8SM24-S US 3AM24-SR US 8SM24-SR94 US 8GM24 US 6

Model # QtyGM24-SR US 5AF24. . US 4NF24 (-S) US 5NF 120 (-S) US 5NF24-SR US 6LF24 US 8LF24-SR US 8

Dimensions

Refers to appropriate actuator documentation for specific VA ratings.

162

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

ZG-HTR NF/AF Thermostat/heater Kit For NF/AF Series actuators

ApplicationThe ZG-HTR Thermostat/Heater kit is designed to be fieldinstalled to the NF and AF series actuators. The ZG-HTR pro-vides a thermostatically controlled heater which allows theNF/AF actuators to be used below their normal low ambienttemperature rating. At approximately 10° F [-12° C] the heaterenergizes to maintain the actuators internal temperature towithin working limits. The rubberized heating element has anadhesive back which attaches to the side of the actuator hous-ing. The thermostat assembly mounts to the rear of the actua-tor and provides for the connection of the 24 VAC supply volt-age. The actuator/heater assembly should be contained in ahousing, similar to the ZS-100 Weather Shield, to achieve bestresults.

Instructions1. Determine which side of the NF/AF actuator the heater

element will be fastened to.

2. Clean the mounting surface to remove any dust, oil film,etc. which may prevent the heater from attaching secure-ly. A cleaning solvent which leaves no residue is recom-mended.

3. Carefully peel back the clear plastic backing from theheater element. Care must be taken not to handle theadhesive back or have it make contact with any surfaceprior to mounting it to the actuator side.

4. Without making contact between the actuator and heater,position the heater element so that the wire end istowards the rear of the actuator. The edge by the wireshould line up with the center of the 1/4 bolt hole on thetop of the actuator as indicated in the drawing at the left.Center the heater element so it is equally spaced from topto bottom on the actuator side.

Warning: Once the adhesive back makes contact withthe actuator surface, it should not be removed.

5. Carefully make contact with the top side of the heater andgradually roll the heater element to make full contact withthe actuator side.

Technical Data ZG-HTR

Power supply 24 VAC ± 20% 50/60 Hz


Heater output 35 watts

Actuator low ambient rating with enclosure: -40° F [-40° C]enclosure with1” insulation: -58° F [-50° C]

Weight 11 oz [320 g]

ZG-HTR H

eater

To 24 VDC

Wiring Box

Thermostat/CoverAssembly

Wire Nut

3/8” to 3/4”

3/8” to 5/8”

3/4” to 1.05”

Standard:

Optional*

*with K4-1 US clamp


AF/NFactuator

1/4” BoltHole

ZG-HTR Heater

®

163

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Elec

troni

c Ac

cess

orie

s

6. If a conduit fitting is supplied with the actuator, on the sideof the actuator which will have the wiring box, remove anddiscard the 2 screws which fasten the conduit fitting to theactuator.

7. Position the wiring box at the rear of the actuator. Mountthe wiring box to the rear of the actuator using only theleft screw, the one shown without a washer.

Note: If the conduit fitting is not provided on the modelactuator being used, use the nuts provided to secure thewiring box to the actuator.

8. Feed the cable from the heater element through the slotat the rear of the actuator into the hole in the bottom ofthe wiring box.

9. Slip the cable through the wire clamp removing any slackin the wire from the heater to the fastening point in thewiring box. Fasten the clamp to the actuator using theremaining screw and washer.

10. Determine which conduit fitting hole in the wiring box willbe used to provide the power source to the heater circuit.

11. Remove the desired knock-out in the wiring box and, ifused, fasten the conduit fitting.

12. Install the actuator following the actuator installationinstructions.

13. Fasten one of the red heater wires to one of the blackthermostat wires using the wire nut supplied.

14. Connect 24 VAC power to the remaining wires.

15. Fasten the thermostat/cover assembly to the wiring box.

NF/AF tThermostat/heater Kit ZG-HTRFor NF/AF Series actuators

Wiring diagram

2

2

3

31

1

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts


The ZG-HTR may be wired to the same transformer asthe actuator. Total VA ratings must be observed.

Power to the ZG-HTR must be applied continuouslyduring the heating season. Do not wire the ZG-HTR tothe on-off control signal when on-off type actuators arebeing used.

ZG-HTR HEATER STRIP

Thermo-stat

COM

HOT

To other actuators

®

164

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Application Information ®

Special Control Range Applications

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Input, 2 to 6 V

4 Output

(–)

(+)

Control Signal0 to 10 VDC

4

2

3

1

IRM-100

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Input, 6 to 10 V

4 Output

3

500Ω

IRM AAdjusted for 2 to 6 VDC range.

IRM BAdjusted for 6 to 10 VDC range.

IRM-100

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U

3

…-SR US

…-SR US

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U

3

ACTUATOR AAdjusted for 2 to 6 VDC range.

ACTUATOR BAdjusted for 6 to 10 VDC range.

mA VDC4 25 2.56 37 3.58 49 4.510 511 5.512 613 6.514 715 7.516 817 8.519 9.520 10

IRM-100Voltage Settings

Based on 4 to 20 mA

2


Actuator and controller must have separatetransformers.

Consult controller instruction data for moredetailed installation information.

500Ω resistor if signal provided is 4 to 20 mA

3

4

Control Signal Belimo Actuator Accessory Notes1 to 5 VDC LM24-MFT US None Preset at factory or use MFT Handy device

NM24-MFT US Set start point for 1 VDC, span for 4 VDCAM24-MFT USGM24-MFT USNF24-MFT USAF24-MFT USLF24-MFT US

4 to 20 mA Any -MFT,-SR Actuator ZG-R01, or Wire the ZG-R01 across the wires #1 and #3500Ω, 1/2 w resistor

10.5 to 13.5 VDC LM24-MFT US None Preset at factory or use MFT Handy deviceNM24-MFT US Set start point for 10.5 VDC, span for 3 VDCAM24-MFT USAM24-MFT USGM24-MFT USNF24-MFT USAF24-MFT USLF24-MFT US

14 to 17 VDC LM24-MFT US None Preset at factory or use MFT Handy deviceNM24-MFT US Set start point for 14 VDC, span for 3 VDCAM24-MFT USSM24-MFT USGM24-MFT USNF24-MFT USAF24-MFT USLF24-MFT US

Pulse Width LM24-MFT US None Preset at factory or use MFT Handy deviceModulation NM24-MFT US

AF24-MFT USAM24-MFT USSM24-MFT USNF24-MFT US AF24-MFT USLF24-MFT US

*Preset at factory or use MFT Handy device IRM-100 Calibrate the IRM-100 for an input range of 1 to 5 VDC. Calibrate IRM-100 2-10 in 2 to 10 out for signal amplification.

Sequencing Two or More Actuators With One Control Signal using the IRM-100

165

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Elec

troni

c Ac

cess

orie

s

Application Information®

IRM-100 used as a current amplifierIn some applications, the capacity of a controller output maynot have current available to control multiple end devices. Anexample would be a controller which has an output current of.5 mA maximum. If 10 AFR24-SR US actuators have to bedriven from the same output, the current requirement wouldbe I = E/R = (10 volts)/(100000 Ω) = .1 mA for each actuator.For the 10 actuators, 1 mA of current would be necessary toproperly control the actuators.

The IRM-100 may be used as an interface to provide a highercurrent capacity to the system. The IRM-100 has an outputcapacity of 15 mA. This higher level output can handle agreater number of actuators. By calibrating the IRM-100 for a2 to 10 VDC input to achieve a 2 to 10 VDC output, IRM-100provides this added capacity for the system.

The same circuit will also work if a 4 to 20 mA signal is used.A 500 Ω resistor is placed across terminal #1 and #3 whichconverts the 4 to 20 mA to 2 to 10 VDC.

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2 Output, 2 to 10 V

(–)

(+)


4

2

3

1

IRM-100

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U

3

500Ω

…-SR US

2


Actuator and controller must have separatetransformers.

Consult controller instruction data for moredetailed installation information.

500Ω resistor if signal provided is 4 to 20 mA

3

4

Signal to OtherActuators

ADS-100 used as an auxiliary switchThe ADS-100 was originally designed as an accessory to switchon stages of electric reheat from an electronic thermostat.However, it can also function as an electronic auxiliary switchfrom any device which can provide 0 to 10 VDC signal, such asany feedback wire 5 from any …SR or …MFT type actuator.

The ADS-100 has 3 triac outputs rated at 10 VA maximum eachwhich will turn on, in sequence, with an increasing voltage.

1

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Signal Input

4 Contactor

5 Ref. signal

6 Contactor

7 Ref. signal

8 Contactor

9 Ref. signal

ADS-100

∩ ∩∩

∩ ∩∩

∩ ∩∩


Provide overload protection and disconnect asrequired.


Stage 1

#1

#2

#3

1

Stage 2Stage 3

2

(–)(+)

2

…SR US…MFT US

166

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Notes/Work Pad ®

167

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Spec

ial W

iring

AF24-S

NO

24 VAC TransformerLine Volts

1 Common2 + Hot

3 Input, 0 to 10 V4 Output

(–)

(+)


4

2 3

1

IRM-100

1 Common2 + Hot

3 Input, 0 to 10 V4 Output

3

500Ω

IRM AAdjusted for 2 to 6 VDC range.

IRM BAdjusted for 6 to 10 VDC range.

IRM-100

1 Common2 + Hot

3 Y1 Input, 0 to 10 V4 Y25 U

3

LM24-SR USGM24-SR USNF24-SR USAF24-SR US

1 Common2 + Hot

3 Y1 Input, 0 to 10 V4 Y25 U

3

ACTUATOR AAdjusted for 2 to 6 VDC range.

ACTUATOR BAdjusted for 6 to 10 VDC range.

LM24-SR USGM24-SR USNF24-SR USAF24-SR US

mA VDC4 25 2.56 37 3.58 49 4.5

10 511 5.512 613 6.514 715 7.516 817 8.519 9.520 10

IRM-100Voltage SettingsBased on 4 to 20 mA Signal

2

1 Provide overload protection and disconnect as

required.Actuator and controller must have separate

transformers.Consult controller instruction data for more

detailed installation information.500Ω resistor if signal provided is 4 to 20 mA

3

4

Wiring Guide

Application Informationand Wiring Diagrams forBelimo Products.

A CLOSER LOOK…


Basic Electricity

Understanding Wiring Diagrams

Analog Outputs

Wiring Diagrams for Belimo Products

Applications


1 Common2 + Hot

AF24 USNF24 USLF24 US


1 Blk Common2 Red +

3 Wht +

L R

The indication of direction is

valid for switch position R. (position

A on GM24 US and SM24-S US)

aa opena closed

LM24 US NM24 US GM24 US

A

B

24 VAC Transformer

2 to 10 VDC Feedback signal

Line Volts

Blk (1) CommonRed (2) + Hot

Wht (3) Y1 Input, 2 to 10 V(4) Y2Grn (5) U Output 2 to 10V

(–)(+)


Standard Wiring

4

CCW(L) CW(R)A

B

2 3

1

5

168

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Wiring Guide ®

INDEX

I. BASIC ELECTRICITYA. Abbreviations .....................................................................................................................169B. Current ...............................................................................................................................169C. Voltage ...............................................................................................................................169D. Resistance .........................................................................................................................169E. Ohm’s Law .........................................................................................................................169F. Power .................................................................................................................................169G. Power Calculations ............................................................................................................169H. Series Connection of Resistors..........................................................................................170I. Parallel Connection of Resistors........................................................................................170J. Impedance .........................................................................................................................170K. Power Consumption...........................................................................................................170L. Wire Sizing .........................................................................................................................171M. Multi-conductor Wire Types ...............................................................................................172N. Ground Loops ....................................................................................................................172

II. UNDERSTANDING WIRING DIAGRAMSA. Electrical Symbols..............................................................................................................173B. Compatibility of Different Power Supplies..........................................................................173C. Connection of Actuators.....................................................................................................174D. Long Distance Wiring.........................................................................................................176E. Wiring Mistakes..................................................................................................................176

III. ANALOG OUTPUTSA. 2 to 10 V Analog Output ....................................................................................................177B. Sourcing 4 to 20 mA Analog Output ..................................................................................177C. Sinking 4 to 20 mA Analog Output ....................................................................................177D. Parallel Operation ..............................................................................................................178E. Master-Slave Operation .....................................................................................................178F. Remote Position Monitoring...............................................................................................178G. One Output/Multiple Transformer ......................................................................................178

IV. WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR BELIMO PRODUCTSA. Spring Return, on/off .........................................................................................................179B. Non-Spring-Return on/off ..................................................................................................180C. Floating Point ....................................................................................................................180D. Proportional .......................................................................................................................182F. Auxiliary Switch Wiring.......................................................................................................183G. Accessories:

Mid position Switch, Feedback Potentiometer ...............................................................................190Positioner, Range Controller ..............................................................................................190Input Rescaling Module, Analog to Digital Switch .............................................................190Pulse Width Modulation Interface, Digital Position Indicator .............................................191Transformer, Battery Backup Module ................................................................................191Resistor Kits .......................................................................................................................191

V. APPLICATIONSA. Wiring for Multiple Actuators on a Single Shaft .................................................................186E. Floating Point Control Using Proportional Spring Return Actuators ..................................188F. Operating Two 2 to 10 VDC Actuators with the Higher of Two Control Signals ...............188G. Minimum Position with 0 to 10 VDC Actuators ..................................................................188H. Wiring to Johnson Controls A350P Controller ...................................................................188I. Wiring to Honeywell T775 Controller .................................................................................189

169

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Spec

ial W

iring

® Basic Electricity

I. BASIC ELECTRICITY

I-A. Abbreviations

DC = Direct CurrentAC = Alternating CurrentVDC = Direct Current VoltageVAC = Alternating Current Voltage

I-B. Current

A = AmperemA = Milliampere = Thousandths of an ampere. (Example: 12mA = 12/1000 = .012A)I = The symbol for current in mathematical formulas.

I-C. Voltage

V = Volt*mV = Millivolt = Thousandths of a volt. (Example: 5mV = 5/1000 = .005V)E = The symbol for voltage in mathematical formulas.

I-D. Resistance

Ω = Ohm = ResistancekΩ = Kilo ohm = Thousands of ohms. 1kΩ = 1,000ΩMΩ = Megohm = Millions of ohms. 1MΩ = 1,000kΩ = 1,000,000ΩR = The symbol for resistance in mathematical formulas.

I-E. OHM's Law

E = Voltage I = Current R = Resistance

E = I x R Example: I = 20mA, R = 500Ω Therefore, E = .020 x 500 = 10V

R = E/I Example: E = 1.35V, I = 10mA Therefore, R = 1.35/.010 = 135Ω

I = E/R Example: E = 120V, R = 50Ω Therefore, 120/50 = 2.4A

I-F. Power

W = Watt*mW = Milliwatt = Thousandths of a watt (Example: 7mW = 7/1000 = .007W)kW = Kilowatt = Thousands of watts (Example: 1kW = 1,000W)

I-G. Power Calculations

W = E x I Example: V = 24V, I = 260mA Therefore, W = 24 x .260 = 6.24W

W = R x I2 Example 1: R = 100Ω, I = 3AW = 100 x 32 = 100 x 3 x 3 = 900W

Example 2: R = 500Ω, I = 20mA = .020AW = 500 x .0202 = 500 x .020 x .020 = 500 x .0004 = .2W or 200mW.

W = E2/R Example: V = 24V, R = 100, Therefore, W = 242/100 = 24 x 24/100 = 5.76W

* I.S.O. standard indicates “U” be used for voltage and “P” for power.

170

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

I-H. Series Connection of Resistors

Resistors that are connected in series have a total resistance value that is equal to the sum of all the resistance values of the resis-tors.

Example: R1 = 200Ω R2 = 250Ω R3 = 1.0kΩ RTotal = R1 + R2 + R3 = 200Ω + 250Ω + 1.0KΩ = 1.45kΩ

I-I. Parallel Connection of Resistors

If all the resistors have the same resistance value, the total resistance will be equal to the resistance value of one resistor dividedby the number of resistors.

Example: Five equal resistors R = 100k are con-nected in parallel. The total resistance RTotal = R/5 = 100/5 = 20k

If the resistors that are connected in parallel have different values, the following formula must be used:

Example: R1 = 200 R2 = 250 R3 = 1.0k

I-J. Impedance

The expression “impedance” is used in the BELIMO literature in the following way:• Input impedance: The input circuit of a control device, based on its circuitry, has a certain electrical resistance. The value of

this resistance determines how much current the device will draw from the controller. This value must be taken into consider-ation when connecting any device to a controller output. Example: “Input impedance 100 kΩ.” This means that the DC resist-ance between the input (Y or Y1) and common (COM) is 100 kΩ (100,000 ohm). When the signal is 10 VDC, using Ohm’s Law (I=E/R), the current draw on the output of the controller will be (10V/100,000 Ω) = .0001A = .1 mA for each actuator that isconnected to the signal. The combined input impedance must be higher than the controller output impedance.

• Output impedance: The output of a controller has a limited amount of current capacity to supply to the devices it is control-ling. The capacity can be given in one of 2 ways. One way is by stating it as “Maximum output current .2 mA.” The other isby giving its output impedance. The output impedance must always be lower than the combined input impedance of the devicesbeing controlled.Example I: “Output impedance 1000Ω minimum.” This means that the combined input impedance of the devices being con-trolled must be greater than 1000Ω.Example II: “Maximum output current .2 mA.” Based on a 0 to 10 VDC control signal, the output impedance would be equalto R=E/I or (10V)/(.0002A) = 50kΩ

In general, the higher the input impedance, the lower the current draw, therefore less strain on the controller output. The lowerthe output impedance, the more current available; the more current available, the more devices can be controlled.

I-K. Power Consumption (W) / Volt Amperes (VA)

When a device is powered with direct current (DC), or alternating current (AC) into a pure resistive load (bulb, heater, etc.), the ratedpower consumption is watts (W) and is the product of the current (I) and voltage (E), (W = E x I).

R1=200Ω R TOTAL = 1.45kΩR2=250Ω R3=1.0kΩ

The total resistance is always larger than the largest single resistor!

100k 100k 100k 100k 100kR TOTAL = 20k

R1R TOTAL R2 R3

1 1 1 1_______ = ____ + ____ + ____R1 R2 R3RTOTAL

1 1 1 1_______ = ____ + ____ + ____200 250 1000RTOTAL

RTOTAL RTOTAL = 100Ω= 100Ω

.005 + .004 + .001 = .01

1

.01

=

=

The total resistance is always smaller thanthe smallest single resistor!

Basic Electricity ®

171

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Spec

ial W

iring

When an actuator is powered with alternating current (AC), the actual power consumption in watts (W) inside the actuator will remainthe same. However, due to the inductive and capacitive character of the load, a shift between current and voltage occurs (phaseshift). This results in an “apparent” power consumption, which is higher than the actual power consumption. The “apparent” powerconsumption is expressed in volt-amperes (VA), which is the product of AC volts and the current (VA = V x I x efficiency.)

The size of a transformer is expressed in volt-amperes (VA) and not in watts (W). The VA rating of a transformer must beat least as large as the combined VA rating of all the actuators connected to the transformer.

Example: Actuator AM24 US. Power consumption: 2.5 W. Transformer sizing: 4.5 VA

If five (5) AM24 US are connected to one transformer, the VA rating of the transformer must be 5 x 4.5 VA = 22.5 VA, or larger.

It is better to use a number of small transformers than one large one.

The Belimo products are designed to be powered from Class II transformers for UL applications. These transformers haveinternal power limitation. A Class II transformer must not provide more than 30 V and no more than 100 VA output. Do notuse a Class I transformer and fuse, because it does not constitute a Class II power source!

I-L . Wire SizingUsing the correct wire size is importantwhen long wire runs are used. Using toosmall of a wire increases the resistivelosses of the run. The result of this maybe too low of a voltage at the actuator tooperate correctly. The above chart canbe used to determine the correct wiresize to use for an application.

Example I: Three AM24-SR US actua-tors are powered from the same wire.The wire run is 100 feet.

Step #1. Calculate the total powerrequired.The AM24-SR US requires 5VA, 3 actuators are beingused. 3 x 5 = 15 VA Total.

Step #2. Locate 15 VA on the verticalaxis of the chart and 100 feeton the horizontal axis.

Step #3. Find the intersection of 15VAand 100 Ft (Point “A”)

Step #4. Read the diagonal line to theright of point “A”. It is the 18ga. wire gauge line. Use 18ga. or larger wire.

Note: A low gauge number = a thicker wire; A high gauge number = a thinner wire.

Example II: The maximum wire length for a 10 VA power consumption using different wire gauges.

Point “B” 22 Ga Max. 60 FT Point “E” 16 Ga Max. 350 FTPoint “C” 20 Ga Max. 120 FT Point “F” 14 Ga Max. 550 FTPoint “D” 18 Ga Max. 220 FT Point “G” 12 Ga Max. 900 FT

Chart 1

100908070

60

50454035

30

25

20

15

1098

7

6

5

4

3

2

1.5

1

15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 125

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1250

1500

2000

FT

WIR

E

VA

47 Ft

100

Ft

Example II

A

B C D E F G

12Ga

14Ga

16 Ga

18 Ga

20 Ga

22 Ga

Example I 15 VA

® Basic Electricity

172

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

I-M. Multi-Conductor Wire Types

• “BELL WIRE” has parallel wires, which may act as an antenna and is therefore sensitive to elec-trical noise. This type of wire should not be used for control circuits.

• “TWISTED PAIR” cancels out most of the electrical noise because the wires alternate their posi-tions. This is the type of wire that is used for most control circuits.

• “SHIELDED WIRE” is a twisted pair that is surrounded by a metal foil or wire mesh which acts asa shield and prevents electrical noise from reaching the wires inside.

Shielded wires are used for the BELIMO actuators only if the electrical noise is very severe. Normally twisted pairs are sufficient.Remember! The shield must be grounded in one point only!

I-N. Ground Loops

If a shield is grounded at both ends of a shielded wire, a ground loop is created. Ground loops will defeat the purpose of shielding,and aggravate the electrical noise problem.

Ground loops can also be created by using more than one wire for signal common (COM ⊥ ). The (-) signal common terminals on thecontroller are usually interconnected. Therefore, a ground loop is formed when two or more signal common terminals of the controllerare wired to the same transformer. (See Fig. 11-5 and 11-6, page 175.)

Signal common (COM ⊥ ) is necessary, as a reference, but only one connection should be used.

Redundant signal common terminals should not be connected.

A ground loop acts as an antenna and will pick up electrical noise. This should be avoided, by using the correct wiring practice.

BELL WIRE

TWISTED PAIR

SHIELDED WIRE

SHIELDED WIRE

SHIELDED WIRE

SHIELDED WIRE

GROUND IN ONE POINT ONLY!(CONNECT THE SHIELD TO GROUND)

GROUND ONE END ONLY! AT EACH JOINT, THE SHIELD HAS TO BE GROUNDED. (BUT IN ONE END ONLY!)

THIS IS WRONG! THE SHIELD MUST BE GROUNDED IN ONE END ONLY, OTHERWISE THERE WILL BE A GROUND LOOP.

GROUND LOOP!

Basic Electricity ®

173

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Spec

ial W

iring

Understanding Wiring Diagrams ®

II-B. Compatibility of Different Power Supplies

Power Supply with Half-Wave Rectifier

Half-wave rectifiers offer the advantage of using the same connectionfor the AC common and DC common. Therefore, the common of dif-ferent devices using half-wave rectifiers can be interconnected anduse the same power source.

Some devices, typically DDC controllers, have full-wave rectifiers. In this case, always use a separate transformer for the controller.

Power Supply with Full-Wave Rectifier

Full-wave rectifiers provide more current capacity. Their disad-vantage is that the AC and DC sides cannot be interconnected.

Every device which has a full-wave rectifier must be powered fromits own separate transformer, if the COM ⊥ wire is connected tothe Common of other devices.

Note: If a device with a full-wave rectifier is powered from the same transformer as a device with a half-wave rectifier, a short cir-cuit will result if the commons (COM ⊥) are interconnected.

The Belimo products use half-wave rectifiers. Therefore, they may be connected to the same transformer as long as all commons(COM ⊥ ) are connected to the same leg of the transformer. However, anytime actuators are connected to a controller a separatetransformer should be used for the controller power supply unless you know that the controller also uses a half-wave rectifier.

+ DC Voltage

COM ⊥

2

1

24 VAC

DIODE

CAPACITOR

DIODE

DIODE

DIODE

DIODE

CAPACITOR

+ DC Voltage

COM ⊥

24 VAC

II-A. Electrical Symbols

U.S. Electrical Symbols for Contacts International Symbols for Contacts

Traditional Electronic Symbols for Contacts Belimo Proportional Actuators- Wire Symbols and Numbers

If a feedback is available at the actuator, we recommend that thissignal be brought back to the control panel. Even if it is notrequired for the control sequence, it is a useful signal to haveavailable for possible troubleshooting in the future.

N.O.(NORMALLY OPEN)

N.C.(NORMALLY CLOSED)

N.O. N.C.SWITCHING

NORMALLY OPEN NORMALLY CLOSED SWITCHING

NORMALLY OPEN NORMALLY CLOSED

SWITCHING TRI-STATEFLOATINGCENTER OFF

1

2

3

4

5

BELIMOACTUATOR

COMMON

24VAC POWER

0…10VDC SIGNAL

0…20V Phase-cut Signal

2…10VDC Feedback Signal

⊥

Not applicable for NM24 SR

and NM24 SRS

1

2

3

4

NM24 SRor

NM24 SRS

COMMON

24VAC POWER

0…10VDC SIGNAL

2…10VDC Feedback Signal

⊥

II. UNDERSTANDING WIRING DIAGRAMS

174

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.


II-C. Connection of Actuators

0 to 10 V Control Signals

Signal Loss

Due to the high input impedance (100kΩ) of the actuators, the current through the signal wire is very low. Therefore, the loss of signal will be negligible, even if with long wire runs.Example: Three actuators are connected via a 330 ft. (100 meters) long pair of 22 Ga. wires. Each wire has a resistance of 5Ω.The current draw from each actuator is (I = E/R) 10/100,000 = 0.1 mA, when the signal is 10 VDC.The current in the wire will be 3 x 0.1 = 0.3 mA. Because 2 wires, the Common and the Source, go to the actuator,the resistance in the wires is 2 x 5Ω = 10Ω. The loss of signal will be (E = R x I) 10 x 0.3 = 3 mV = -.003V.

4 to 20 mA Control Signals

The controller will regulate the output current (signal) to the desired value, regardless of the resistance (up to a specified value) in the wires and the load resistor.

The resistance in the wires will only cause the output voltage of the controller to be slightly higher than the input of the actuators. The advantage with a 4 to 20 mA output signal to the actuators is that wire resistance does not cause any error to the control signal,and that electrical interference is rejected.

The input impedance of the actuators will reduce the resulting resistance of the load resistor. However, the error is so small that there is no need to compensate for this by using a slightly higher resistance value. A 500Ω load resistor will give an adequate accu-racy. Use a 499Ω, 1%, 1/2w resistor or two 1kΩ, 1%, 1/4 w resistors in parallel.

TRANSFORMER

CONTROLLERAnalog Output Board

4 to 20mALOAD

RESISTOR

4 to 20mA3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

(+)

(–)

(+)

(–)

500Ω

CO

M ⊥

24 VA

C

HO

T ~

LINE

L I N E

ALWAYS USE A SEPARATE TRANSFORMER FOR THE CONTROLLER UNLESS YOU KNOW A HALF-WAVE RECTIFIER IS USED!

BELIMO*ACTUATOR

BELIMO*ACTUATOR

BELIMO*ACTUATOR

TRANSFORMER



0 to 10V

I = .3 mA

330 ft., 22 Ga.(+)

(–)

(+)

(–)C

OM

⊥

24 VA

C

HO

T ~

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

BELIMOACTUATOR

LINE

L I N E

10 V

10.0 - .003 = 9.997 V

BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

* up to 4 actuators may bewired to one load resistorwithout a significantrange shift.

175

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Spec

ial W

iring

Understanding Wiring Diagrams

Fig. II-3 Multiple Outputs to Multiple Actuators Using 2 Transformers for Actuators

**

* USE ONLY ONE CONNECTION BETWEEN COMMON ON THE CONTROLLER AND THE COMMON OF A GROUP OF ACTUATORS POWERED BY ONE TRANSFORMER! (REFER TO FIG. 11 - 5 FOR A COMMON WIRING MISTAKE.).

EACH ACTUATOR OR GROUP OF ACTUATORS POWERED BY A SEPARATE TRANSFORMER NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED TO COMMON ON THE CONTROLLER.

TRANSFORMER

CO

M ⊥

24 VA

C

HO

T ~

(+)

(–)

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 4


0 to 10 V

(+)

OUTPUT 1

*

**

⊥

(+)

(–)

(+)

(–)⊥

TRANSFORMER

CO

M ⊥

24 VA

C

HO

T ~

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

COM ⊥

0 to 10 V

0 to 10 V

0 to 10 V

COM ⊥

0 to 10 V

LINE

ALL THE COMMON ON THE CONTROLLER ARE ASSUMED TO BE INTERNALLY CONNECTED.

L I N E

L I N E

⊥

⊥

(–)

(+)

(–)


BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

Fig. II-1 Single Output to Single Actuator


COM ⊥

0 to 10 V 3

2

1

(+)

(–)

(+)

(–)

CO

M ⊥

24 VA

C

HO

T ~

LINE

TRANSFORMER

L I N E


BELIMOACTUATOR

Fig. II-2 Multiple Outputs to Multiple Actuators Using 1 Transformerfor Actuators

3

2

1

ALL THE COMMONSON THECONTROLLER AREASSUMED TO BEINTERNALLYINTERCONNECTED.

(+)

TRANSFORMER


0 to 10 V

(+)

CHECK THE WIRE LENGTH/SIZINGSEE SECTION 1-L..

3

2

1

CO

M ⊥

24 VA

C

HO

T ~

(–)

3

2

1

(–) COM ⊥

0 to 10 V

HOT ~

COM ⊥

0 to 10 V

HOT ~

LINE

L I N E

ALWAYS USE A SEPARATETRANSFORMER FOR THECONTROLLER UNLESS YOUKNOW A HALF-WAVERECTIFIER IS USED!

BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

Modulating Control Signal Wiring

®

176

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.


Fig. II-4

COM ⊥

(+)

(–)

0 to 10 V

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3


0 to 10 V

(+)

(–)

(+)

(–)

OUTPUT 1

0 to 10 V

0 to 10 V

**

⊥

⊥

⊥

* JUNCTION BOX

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

COM ⊥

24 VAC

HOT ~

TRANSFORMER

LINE

ALL THECOMMON ONTHECONTROLLERARE ASSUMEDTO BEINTERNALLYCONNECTED.

LINE


BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

THESE WIRES SHOULD BE RELATIVELYSHORT, BECAUSE THE WIRES BETWEENTHE JUNCTION BOX AND THEACTUATORS CARRY AC POWER.SEE SECTION I-L FOR WIRE SIZING.

THESE WIRES CAN BE LONG BECAUSETHE WIRES BETWEEN THE CONTROLLERAND THE JUNCTION BOX CARRY A VERYLOW LOAD (SEE SECTION IIC “SIGNALLOSS”. THEREFORE, THE WIRE LENGTHAND SIZE IS OF NO CONCERN.

(MAKE CERTAIN THAT A SUFFICIENTNUMBER OF WIRES ARE AVAILABLE.ESPECIALLY IN THE CABLE BETWEENTHE CONTROLLER AND THE JUNCTIONBOX. IT IS PRUDENT TO HAVE A FEWEXTRA WIRES, JUST IN CASE.)

*

**

II-D. Long Distance Wiring

Fig. II-5 A Common Wiring Problem

(+)

(+)

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3


0 to 10 V

(+)

OUTPUT 1

0 to 10 V

0 to 10 V

*

*

GROUNDLOOP

CO

M ⊥

24 VA

C

HO

T ~

TRANSFORMER

(–)⊥

(–)⊥

⊥(–)

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

GROUNDLOOP

L I N E

LINE

ALL THECOMMON ONTHECONTROLLERARE ASSUMEDTO BEINTERNALLYCONNECTED.

COM ⊥


BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

* DO NOT CONNECTREDUNDANTCOMMON WIRES!Wiring in this manner willcause ground loops. Also,there will be a short if theconnections to terminals #1and #2 on one of the actuatorsare crossed by mistake. Thismay damage the controller,actuator or transformer.

II-E. Wiring Mistakes

Fig. II-6 Correct Wiring

(+)

(+)

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3


0 to 10 V

(+)

OUTPUT 1

0 to 10 V

0 to 10 V

CO

M ⊥

24 VA

C

HO

T ~

TRANSFORMER

(–)⊥

(–)⊥

⊥(–)

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

L I N E

LINE

ALL THE COMMONON THECONTROLLERARE ASSUMED TOBE INTERNALLYCONNECTED.

COM ⊥

0 to 10 V


BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

Wiring in this manner givesthe following advantages:

Ground loops are eliminated.

The number of wires isreduced.

If wires #1 and #2 of anactuator are crossed bymistake, the actuator will notwork properly but no damagewill occur. Resolve theproblem by rewiring in thecorrect manner.

••

•

177

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Spec

ial W

iring

Analog Outputs®

III. ANALOG OUTPUTS

III-A. 2 to 10 Volt Analog Output

The controller produces a variable voltage between signal common and the analog output.

The signal common (wire #1) of the actuator must be connected to the signal common of the controller, and the output of the con-troller is connected to actuator signal input (wire #3).

III-B. Sourcing 4 to 20 mA Analog Output

A sourcing 4 to 20mA analog output sends out a current to theactuator, and receives it at the signal common terminal.

It is similar to a 0 to 10 V output. The only difference is thatone 500Ω resistor has to be installed between wires #3 and#1 at the actuator. The resistor converts the current (4 to 20mA) to a 2 to 10 V signal. The resistor should be located atthe actuator.

III-C. Sinking 4 to 20 mA Analog Output

A sinking 4 to 20 mA output uses a different logic to create acontrol signal. In both a 0 to 10 VDC and sourcing 4 to 20mA application, the signal is regulated at the positive (+)source of the signal. In a sinking application the signal is reg-ulated between the device being controlled and common.For this reason, the term “Output” in a sinking application issometimes confusing.

The controller has one terminal that supplies a constant DCvoltage (often +24V). The input of the actuators (wire #3) areconnected to the constant voltage. A 500Ω resistor is con-nected between wires #1 and #3 on one actuator connectedto each output. (One resistor for each output.) Terminal #1on the actuator is connected to the output of the controller.

The current will run from the constant voltage on the con-troller, to wire #3 on the actuator, through the 500 Ω resistor,to wire #1, and back to the input of the controller.

From the controllers point of view, all the #3 terminals of theactuators are at a “common” constant +24VDC. The signalcommon, wire #1, of the actuators will vary with the controlsignal.

Because the signal common of the actuators is variable, eachoutput requires a separate transformer. The signal commonof actuators connected to different outputs must never beinterconnected. (See note ** in the wiring diagram)

Fig III-1

Con

trol

Out

put

Sourcing 4 to 20 mA

LINE

It is possible to use onetransformer, for actuatorsconnected to different outputs.(Connect #1 of one actuator tominus (COM) on the controller.)

Each transformer needs to beconnected (via wire #1 of oneactuator) to minus (COM) onthe controller.

Only one 500Ω resistor shouldbe used for multiple actuatorswired in parallel. Up to fouractuators may be wired inparallel to the 500Ω resistor.

*

**

***

(+)

(–)

3

2

1

(+)

(–)

4 to 20 mA

COM ⊥

**

LOADRESISTOR500Ω, 0.5W

TRANSFORMER#2

CO

M ⊥

24 VA

C

HO

T ~

L I N E

+

(+)

(–)

3

2

1

(+)

(–)

4 to 20 mA

LOADRESISTOR500Ω, 0.5W

TRANSFORMER #1

CO

M ⊥

24 VA

C

HO

T ~

L I N E

+

(+)

(–)

3

2

1

(+)

(–)

4 to 20 mA

COM ⊥

OUTPUT 1 LOADRESISTOR500Ω, 0.5W+

3

2

1

***

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3


BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

*

Fig. III-2 Sinking 4 to 20 mA

+

HOT ~

24 VAC

COM ⊥

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

Sinking 4 to 20mA

ControllerPOWERSUPPLY+ 24V DC(Typically)

4 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

Transformer #1

Transformer #2

*

**

500

Ω50

0 Ω

2 to 10V

+

SINKINGOUTPUT 2

SINKINGOUTPUT 1

(–) (+)

LINE

L I N E

LINE


BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

HOT ~

24 VAC

COM ⊥

It is possible to connect two or more actuators to one transformer,provided that the actuators are served by the same output.

Each output requires its own transformer.

*

**(If actuators which are connected to different sinking outputs arepowered, by mistake, from the same transformer, all the actuatorswill respond to the average of the output signals. This can bevery deceptive, because when one output signal is changed thecorresponding actuator will move, giving the false impression thatthe system works. The problem is that the other actuators willalso move, although they belong to other control loops. Forexample: Instead of operating the heating and cooling valvesand dampers in sequence, the valves and dampers will operateat the same time, which is the wrong control sequence.)

178

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Analog Outputs ®

III-D. Parallel Operation III-E. Master-Slave operation

III-F. Monitoring feedback with a remote indicator

III-G. One Output/Multiple Transformers

Fig III-3

COM ⊥

L I N E

(+)

(–)(+)

(–)

5

4

3

2

1

Output 5 used to parallel a 2nd actuator.

Direct and reverse acting are possible.

5

4

3

2

1

TRANSFORMER

CO

M ⊥

24 VA

C

HO

T ~

(+)

(–)

Input

Output

COMLINE

CONTROLLERFeedback

(Optional)

2 to 10 V

NOTE: Master-Slave operation should be used when it is important that one damper tracks the movement of another.


BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

Fig III-4

(+)

(–)(+)

(–)

5

4

3

2

1

5

4

3

2

1

TRANSFORMER

CO

M ⊥

24 VA

C

HO

T ~

(+)

(–)

Input

Output

COM

LINE

L I N E

COM ⊥

CONTROLLERFeedback

(Optional)

2 to 10 V

NOTE: The outputimpedance of thecontroller must beobserved.

ALWAYS USE ASEPARATETRANSFORMER FORTHE CONTROLLERUNLESS YOU KNOW AHALF-WAVE RECTIFIERIS USED!

BELIMOACTUATOR

BELIMOACTUATOR

Fig. III-5

(+)

(–)(+)

(–)

5

4

3

2

1

TRANSFORMER

CO

M ⊥

24 VA

C

HO

T ~

(+)

(–)

Input

Output

COM

Output wire 5 can be used as afeedback for true position indication.

COM

Input

PositionFeedbackMonitor

Note: NM24-SR wire 4 is signal out.Belimo TypesAM, LF, LM, SM, GM, AF, NF, -SR Proportional

LINE

2 to 10 V

COM ⊥

L I N E

2 to 10 V


BELIMOACTUATOR

Fig. III-6

(+)

(–)(+)

(–)

TRANSFORMER

CO

M ⊥

24 VA

C

HO

T ~

(+)

(–)

Input

Output

COM

LINE

L I N E

COM ⊥

CONTROLLER

2 to 10 V3

2

1

CO

M ⊥

24 VA

C

HO

T ~

L I N E

3

2

1

3

2

1

CO

M ⊥

24 VA

C

HO

T ~

L I N E

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1


BELIMOACTUATORS

BELIMOACTUATORS

BELIMOACTUATORS

Note: If multiple actuatorsare on one shaft, seeSection V-A.



179

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Spec

ial W

iring

Wiring Diagrams for Belimo Products®

24 V

120/230 V

IV. WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR BELIMO PRODUCTS

IV-A. Spring Return On/Off Control

2

3

3

1

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts




2

3




1 Common

2 + Hot

AF24 USNF24 USLF24 US

2

3

1

1

2

6

4

4

5

6

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

NF24-S US

LF24-S US

NC

NO 5° to 85° (NF)0° to 95° (LF)




For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., NF24-SUS incorporates a built-in auxiliaryswitch: 1 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed,adjustable 5° to 85°.


For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., LF24-SUS incorporates a built-in auxiliaryswitch: 1 x SPDT, 6A (1.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed,adjustable 0° to 85°.

3

5

S1

S2

S3

2

3

1

1

2

4

4

5

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

AF24-S US

NC

5°NO

NC

25° to 85°NO

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6




For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., AF24-S incorporates two built-in auxiliaryswitches: 2 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed,one switch is fixed at +5°, one is adjustable 25° to 85°.


3

5

2

1

1

2

120 VAC(230 VAC for AF230)





1 Neutral

2 Hot3

3

AF120 US/NF120 US

LF120 USAF230 US/LF230 US

L1 N

L2 H

4

4

1

120 VAC

L1 N

L2 H

2

3

1Provide overload protection and disconnect as required.



For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., NF120-SUS incorporates a built-in auxiliaryswitch: 1 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed,adjustable 5° to 85°.


For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., LF120/230-SUS incorporates a built-in auxiliaryswitch: 1 x SPDT, 6A (1.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed,adjustable 0° to 85°.

4

5

6

2

6

4

1 Neutral

2 Hot

NF120-S US

LF120-S US

LF230-S US

NC

NO5° to 85°

3

5

S1

S2

S3

2

3

1

2




For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., AF120/230-S incorporates two built-in auxil-iary switches: 2 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250 VAC, ULlisted, one switch is fixed at +5°, one is adjustable 25°to 85°.


1 Neutral

2 Hot

AF120-S USAF230-S US

NC

5°NO

NC

25° to 85°NO

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

1

120 VAC(230 VAC for AF230)

L1 N

L2 H

4

4

5

3

5


Line Volts

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +

AF24-3 (-S) US

LF24-3 (-S) US

CCW CW

The indication of directionis valid for switch position CW.

a

a opena closed

3

180

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Wiring Diagrams for Belimo Products ®

On/Off Control GM, SM, NM, LM

IV-B. Non-Spring-Return On/Off Control

IV-C. Floating Point Control, Spring Return and Non-Spring-Return

Spring Return

On-Off Control of SM24-S US

On-Off Control of AM24 (-S) US

On-Off Control of LM24-S US

Auxiliary switches of AF24-3-S US

Auxiliary switches of LF24-3-S US

1

1

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts


1 Common

2 +

3 +

Parallel connection of severalactuators is possible.

The indication of direc-tion is valid for switch position A.

A

B

A

B

SM24 US

SMC24 US

2

2

3

3

4

4

1

1

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts


Actuators with plenum rated cable do not have numberson wires; use color codes instead.

See special wiring diagrams for LM24-T US.

LM and NM actuators use a L/R switch to change rota-tion. SM and GM actuators use a A/B switch to changerotation.

1 Blk Common

2 Red +

3 Wht +

L R

The indication of direction isvalid for switch position R. (positionA on GM24 US and SM24-S US)

a

a opena closed

LM24 US

NM24 US GM24 US

A

B

2

3



SPDT, 2A @24 VAC

2


Line Volts

1 Blk Common

2 Red +

3 Wht +

SM24-S US

The indicationof direction is valid forswitch position A.

a

a opena closed

2

3



For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup,etc., LM24-S US incorporates a built-in auxiliary switch:1 x SPDT, 6A (2.5A) @24 VAC, UL listed, adjustable0° to 95°.

2


Line Volts

1 Blk Common

2 Red +

3 Wht +

LM24-S USL R

The indicationof direction is valid forswitch position R.

a

a opena closed

NC

0° to 95°NO

S1

S2

S3

12

424 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

Blk (1) Common –

Wht (2) +

Wht (3) +

AM24 (-S) US

CCW CW


aa opena closed

3

4

2





CCWCW

stop

a(3)

b(4)

stop stop stop

Installation Side


xxxx

xxxx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xxx

xxxx

xxxx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xxx

CWCCWSwitch

Positions

CCWCW CCWCW

stop

a(3)

b(4)

stop stop stop

Installation Side


xxxx

xxxx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xxx

xxxx

xxxx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xxx

CWCCWSwitch

Positions

CCWCW

Floating point control of AF24-3 (-S) US Floating point control of LF24-3 (-S) US


Line Volts

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +

AF24-3 (-S) US

CCW CW


2

3




2

3

4




Actuators with plenum rated cable do not have numbers onwires; use color codes instead.


Line Volts

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Grn (4) +

LF24-3 (-S) US

CW CCW


4

a

b

LF24-3-S US

NC

0° to 95°NO

S1

S2

S3

1

1

1 For end position indica-tion, interlock control,fan startup, etc., AF24-3-SUS incorpo-rates two built-in auxil-iary switches: 2 xSPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250VAC, UL listed, oneswitch is fixed at +5°,one is adjustable 25° to85°.

For end position indi-cation, interlock con-trol, fan startup, etc., LF24-S US incorporatesa built-in auxiliaryswitch: 1 x SPDT, 6A(1.5A) @250 VAC, ULlisted, adjustable 0° to85°.

AF…-S US

NC

5°NO

S1

S2

S3

NC

25° to 85°NO

S4

S5

S6

1

3

0°

80°

10°

0°

6 5

4

3

181

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Spec

ial W

iring


Standard Floating Point Control

Non-Spring Return

Floating Point Control of LM24-3-T USFloating Point Control of AM24 (-S) US

1

1

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts


1 Common

2 +

3 +

Parallel connection of severalactuators is possible.

The indication of direc-tion is valid for switch position A.

stop

A

B

SM24 US

SMC24 US

GM24 US

2

2

1

1

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts



1 Blk Common

2 Red +

3 Wht +

L R

The indication of direc-tion is valid for switch position R.

stop

LM24-3 US

NM24 US

4

2

3

3

4



The LM24-TUS actuator has terminals instead of wires.

The LM24-T US actuator does not have a direction ofrotation switch.


Line Volts

1 Common

2 +

3 +

LM24-3-T US

Swapping wires 2, 3 changes thedirection of rotation.

Stop

3

4

2





AM24 (-S) US

CCW CW

1 42

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts


Blk (1) Common –

Wht (2) +

Wht (3) +

Floating point control of AF24-3(-S) US and LF24-3(-S) US from triac

(Triac Source)

(Triac Sink)

(Triac Sink with Separate Transformers)24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +/Grn

AF24-3 (-S) US

LF24-3 (-S) US

Hot COM

Controller

CCW CW

2

6

1


24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

Hot COM

Controller

2

6

1

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +/Grn

AF24-3 (-S) US

LF24-3 (-S) US

CCW CW

4

5


24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

Hot COM

Controller

1

1

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +/Grn

AF24-3 (-S) US

LF24-3 (-S) US

2

6

5


2

3

4

5

6




The Common connection from the actuator must be connected to the Hot connection ofthe controller.


Actuators with plenum rated cable do not have numbers on wires; use color codes instead.AF… No. 4 wire is white; LF… No. 4 wire is green.

CCW CW

182

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.


IV-D. Proportional Control

4 to 20 mA Control Signal

Notes

24 VAC Transformer

2 to 10 VDC Feedback signal

Line Volts

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) Y1 Input, 2 to 10 V

Grn (5) U Output 2 to 10V

(–)(+)

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts


A

(–)(+)


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot


Override to zero position

A Open = 0 V PositionA Closed = Normal Operation

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts


B

C

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot


Override to 10 V position

Standard Wiring

B Closed = 10 V PositionC Closed = Normal Operation

CCW(L) CW(R)

2

3

3

1

3

1

23

1

23

1

(–)(+)

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

Control Signal4 to 20 mA

A

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot


Grn (5) U Output 2 to 10V

A Open = 4 mA PositionA Closed = Normal Operation

2 to 10 VDC Feedback Signal

B

C

B Closed = 20 mA PositionC Closed = Normal Operation

24 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot


Override control to min, mid, max, positions

Ω500Ω

1/4 watt

(–)(+)

Line Volts

Control Signal2-10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA

Ω

500Ω1/4 watt

(–)(+)

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot


4

5

Override to zero position

Ω500Ω1/4watt

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot


Override to 20 mA position

Standard Wiring

Ω

500Ω1/4 watt

CCW(L) CW(R)

4

3

2

3




ZG-R01 may be used.4

4

1

3

2

3

4

2

3

1

4

2

With a 4-20 mA Input, up to 4 actuators may be wired in parallel. A 2% shift in the signal is seen when using a 500Ω resistor. Power consumption must be observed.

C

B

A

Min*

50%

ca bFunctions

Control mode acc. to Y

0%

100%

Mid*

Max*

Normal**

* Default selectable 0-100%. See Configuration Data Sheet.**Customizable. See Configuration Data Sheet.

183

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Spec

ial W

iring


IV-F. Auxiliary Switch Wiring

Auxiliary SwitchesS1/S2 for SM, GM; SN1/SN2 for NMSA1/SA2 for AM

Note: S1,S2 are usedwith the SM and GmSeries actuators.

SN1,SN2 are used withNM Series actuators

S2/SN2/SA2

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

S1/SN1/SA1

NC

NO

S1

S2

S3

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

Note:SA1, SA2, AM…24-S US, AF…24-S US,NF…-S US auxiliary switches are doubleinsulated and meet UL and CSA require-ments without an electrical ground.

AM…-S US

NC

0° to 95°NO

S1

S2

S3

NC

0° to 95°NO

S4

S5

S6

AF…-S US

NC

5°NO

S1

S2

S3

NC

25° to 85°NO

S4

S5

S6

Auxiliary switch wiring for AM…-S US

Auxiliary switch wiring for AM…-S US Auxiliary switch wiring for LF…-S US

and LM24-S US

Auxiliary switch wiring for P-370 US

Auxiliary switch wiring for AF…-S US Auxiliary switch wiring for NF…-S US

LF…-S US

LM24-S US

NC

0° to 95°NO

S1

S2

S3

NF…-S US

NC

5° to 85°NO

S1

S2

S3

SM24-S US

P-370

NC

NO

Grn

Blk

Wht

Product Voltage Resistive Inductiveload load

S1, S2 250 7.0 A 2.5 A

SA1, SA2 250 6.0 A 2.5 A

SN1, SN2 250 6.0 A 2.5 A

AF…-S US 250 7.0 A 2.5 A

AM…-S US 24 3.0 A 1.5 A

LF…-S US 250 6.0 A 1.5 A

LM24-S US 24 6.0 A 2.5 A

NF…-S US 250 7.0 A 2.5 A

P-370 120 1.0 A 1.0 A

240 0.7 A 0.7 A

0°

80°

10°

0°

6 5

4

184

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.


IV-G. Accessories

Feedback PotentiometerP… used with SM/GMPA… used with AM

Note: Used with the SMand GM Series actuators

The direction of rotationswitch on the actuator must be in position “A” for the SZS to function correctly.

24 VAC Transformer

Lin

e V

olts 1 Common

2 +

3 +

SM24 US

GM24 US

A

B

1

2

3

4

SZS

1

2

3

3

2

A

B

C

A - Open

B - Mid-Position

C - Closed

Parallel connection of further actuators is not possible.

Reverse A and C connections to the actuator to changedirection of rotation.

A

B

C

+Alternativeswitchingwith relay.

SPTTswitch

SZS Mid Position Switch

2

To otheractuators

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

Control Signal

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Signal Input

4 Output, 2 to 10 VDC

IRM-100

1

1

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y1

4 Y2

5 U

…-SR US

(–)(+)

3

2



The actuator and IRM-100 may be powered from thesame transformer.



3

4

5

5

4

IRM-100 Input Rescaling Module

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Signal Input

4 Contactor

5 Ref. signal

6 Contactor

7 Ref. signal

8 Contactor

9 Ref. signal

ADS-100COM

∩ ∩∩

∩ ∩∩

∩ ∩∩

Reheat output(2 to 10 VDC)

from TRS-Mthermostat or

other controller

Reheat stage(24 VAC con-tactors 10 VAmax. per stage)

5,7,9 = Switch point reference signal for manualadjustment of stages 1,2, & 3 respectively.


Stage 1

#1

#2

#3

1

1

Stage 2Stage 3

2

(–)(+)

2

ADS-100 Analog to Digital Switch

2

2



The actuator and SBG-24 may be powered from thesame transformer.


Wire No. 4 on the NM24-SR US is used for feedback.

3

4

4

24 VAC Transformer

U 2 to 10 VDC Feedback signal

0 to 20 V Phasecut

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y1

4 Y2

5 U

6 Z

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y1

5 U

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y1

5 U

(–)(+)


2

1

A

B

C

OverrideSwitch Position

A = ClosedB = Normal

C = Open

…-SR US

SBG24

I

N

P

U

T

OUTPUT

5

3

5

SBG 24 Range Controller

SGA, SGF Positioners

Remote Control

P1

P2

P3

P…/PA…

0

10

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 +

3 + Y

…-SR US

A

B

1 Common

2 +

3 Y

4 Z

SGA24 SGF24

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 +

3 Y

. . -SR US

1 Common

2 +

3 Y

4 Z

SGA24 SGF24

(–)

(+)


A Boff off 0%off on 0%on off 0 to 100%on on 100%

Override controlDamper control




1

1

1

2

2

2

185

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Spec

ial W

iring


IV-F. Accessories (continued)

2 3 10 9

1 11 NSV 24

max4A (T)

SM24 US( + ) ( + ) ( – )~ ~ COM

2 3 10 9

1 11 NSV 24

+

–

max4A (T)

SM24-SR US ( + ) ( – ) HOT COM

3 2 1

3 2 1

+

–

NSV-BAT (2) or equiv. NSV-BAT (2) or equiv.

Y1

24 VACCOM ~

24 VACCOM ~

NSV 24 Battery Back-up Module

ZAD24 Digital Position Indicator

ZG-X40

120 VAC 24 VAC

Yellow

Yellow

White

Black

ZG-X40 Transformer

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot


4

5

Ω ZG-R01

1

1

ZG-R02Ω

Output0 to 10 VDC TypeSignal Input

COMCOM

Grey

Black

White

The impedance of the device attached must be 100kΩ.

ZG-R01, ZG-R02 Resistor Kits

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 AC

4 AC5

6


Triac, common pulsed signal (non-isolated circuit)

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 AC

4 AC5

6


Triac, hot pulsed signal (non-isolated circuit)

24 VAC Transformer

BASPower

PTAPower

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 AC

4 AC5

6


Triac, pulsed signal (isolated circuit)

PTA-250 Pulse Width Modulation Interface

Control interface diagrams

Control interface diagrams

Failsafe directionmust have a normal-ly closed contact.

42

5

5

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 + Signal Input

4 – Signal Input

5 Aux. Power Output

6 Output 2 to 10 VDC

PTA-2501

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y1

4 Y2

5 U

…-SR US

3

2





The PTA-250 and actuator may be powered from thesame transformer.

3

4

See controlinterface

diagramsbelow.

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 + Signal Input

4 – Signal Input

5 Aux. Power Output

6


N.O.

Relay pulsed signal (non-isolated circuit)

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 + Signal Input

4 – Signal Input

5

6


N.O.

Relay pulsed signal (isolated circuit)

Separatepower supply12 to 24VDC/VAC

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U Output 2 to 10 V

(–)(+)


1 Common

2 + Hot

3 –

4 +

2

1

4

4

5

5 …SR US

ZAD24

2

3

3





Wire #4 is used for feedback on the NM24-SR US.

186

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.


V. APPLICATION INFORMATION

V-A. Wiring for Multiple Actuators on One Shaft (AF/GM, for other actuators use next higher torque actuator)

Actuators which may beused on one shaft:

MaxQuantity

Model Per Shaft

AF24(-S) US

AF120(-S) US 4AF230(-S) US

AF24-SR(-S) US 4

AF24-3(-S) US 4

AF24-SR95 US 1

GM24 US 2

GM24-SR US 2

AM24(-S) US 4

AM24-SR US 4

124 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

AF24 US

1 Common, Neutral

2 + Hot

AF24 US

3

3

1

1 Neutral

2 Hot

AF120 US

AF230 US

1 Common, Neutral

2 + Hot

AF120 US

AF230 US

3

3

L1 N

L2 H

3 2

4

4


Line Volts

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +

AF24-3 (-S) US

CCW CW

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +

AF24-3 (-S) US

CCW CW

The indication of directionis valid for switch position CCW.

2

3

4

5




Set reversing switch (CCW-CW)(A-B) as required bycontrol logic and control range.


Notes:

Note:See page 185 for ladder diagram wiring of 2 to 10 VDCactuators.

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U

(–)(+)


4

5

1

GM24-SR US

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U

4A

B

A

B

GM24-SR US

AM24-SR US

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 +

3 +

4

2

1

GM24 US

AM24 US

1 Common

2 +

3 +

4A

B

A

B

GM24 US

AM24 US

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U Output 2 to 10 V

(–)(+)


4

5

1

AF24-SR US

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U

4

AF24-SR US

CCW CW

CCW CW

To OtherActuators

To Other Actuators

To Other Actuators

Note:When using the AF24-SR95 US and the SM24-SR94 US

consult the actuator data sheet.

To Other Actuators(AM24(-S) US only)

To Other Actuators(AM24-SR US only)

To Other Actuators

187

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Spec

ial W

iring


V-A. (continued) Wiring for Multiple Actuators on One Shaft (AF/GM, for other actuators use next higher torque actuator)

24 VAC Transformer

Note:See table on page 23 for maximum number ofactuators allowed.

Line Volts

(–)(+)

Control Signal

12

35

12

35

12

35

12

35

All actuators except AF24-SR US

24 VAC Transformer

Note:AF24-SR US must be wired in thismanner when more than one actua-tor is mounted on a single shaft.

A maximum of 4 actuators may bemounted to a single shaft.

Line Volts

(–)(+)

Control Signal

12

35

12

35

12

35

12

35

AF24-SR US

24 VAC Transformer DAMPER 1 DAMPER 2 24 VAC Transformer

Note:Shown with typical 2 transformer wiring, if one transformerdoes not have enough capacity for 6 actuators.

Line Volts

Line Volts

(–)(+)

Control Signal

12

35

12

35

12

35

12

35

12

35

12

35

Typical wiring of multiple dampers with more than one AF24-SR US mounted on a single shaft.

188

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.


V-F. Operating two 0 to 10 VDCControllers with the Higher of TwoControl Signals

V-H Wiring to Johnson Controls A350PController

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U

(–)

(+)

Control Signal0 to 10 VDCController A

1

1

…-SR US

(–)

(+)

Control Signal0 to 10 VDCController B

1 IN4001, IN4003 diode or equivalent, observe polarity.

Explanation: The diode allows the positive (+) signal topass through it and does not allow a higher level posi-tive signal to back feed to the other controller. Only thehighest controller signal is seen by the actuator. Thereis a .7 VDC voltage loss across the diode. This makesthe actual voltage range 2.7 to 10.7 VDC.

V-G. Minimum Position with 0 to 10VDC Actuators

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 +

3 Y

. . -SR US

1 Common

2 +

3 Y

4 Z

SGA24 SGF24

(–)

(+)





1

1

2

V-E. Floating Control Using a 2-wireDC Control Signal

1 Common

2 +

3 +

1

LM24 USNM24 USSM24 USGM24 US

1 IN4001, IN4003 diode or equivalent, observe polarity.

– +

+ –

Stop

24 V

DC

Note: Direction of rotationshown for the R or A position.

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U

…-SR US

Johnson Controls A350P ControllerMultiple Power Source Wiring

1 Power polarity must be correct

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U

1

…-SR US

Johnson Controls A350P ControllerSingle Transformer Wiring

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

V I SN

VD

CC 24

V

V I SN

VD

CC 24

V

189

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Spec

ial W

iring


V-I. Wiring to Honeywell T775 Controller

1 Use separate transformer for T775 if powering from 24 VAC.

Note: The T775 Controllers have an adjustable controlrange of 0 to 18 VDC. Use the T775 Calibration instruc-tions to calibrate a 2 to 10 VDC range.

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U

1

1

…-SR US

120 V

COM

240V

NO

COM

NC

NC

COM

NO

NO

COM

NC

OUTPUT 4OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 2

C/F

1 2

3 4

SELECT SET ENTER

SA SB

3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6

SA TOD 24V

T775E1098 / T775F10890 to 18 VDC Output Models


24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y1

4 Y2

5 U

1

1

…-SR US

120 V

COM

240V

NO

COM

NC

NC

COM

NO

NO

COM

NC

OUTPUT 4OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 2

C/F

1 2

3 4

SELECT SET ENTER

SA SB

3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6

SA TOD 24V

T775E1056 / T775F10554 to 20 mA Output Models

Resistor500Ω1/2 W

(ZG-R01)

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts


24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y1

4 Y2

5 U

1

…-SR US

120 V

COM

240V

NO

COM

NC

NC

COM

NO

NO

COM

NC

OUTPUT 4OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 2

C/F

1 2

3 4

SELECT SET ENTER

SA SB

3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6

SA TOD 24V

T775E1056 / T775F10554 to 20 mA Output Models

Resistor500Ω1/2 W

(ZG-R01)


Note: The T775 Controllers have an adjustable controlrange of 0 to 18 VDC. Use the T775 Calibration instruc-tions to calibrate a 2 to 10 VDC range.

24 VAC Transformer

Line Volts

Line Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U

1

…-SR US

120 V

COM

240V

NO

COM

NC

NC

COM

NO

NO

COM

NC

OUTPUT 4OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 2

C/F

1 2

3 4

SELECT SET ENTER

SA SB

3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6

SA TOD 24V

T775E1098 / T775F10890 to 18 VDC Output Models

190

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

®Actuator/Valve SpecificationTo download specifications, see www.belimo.com

I. GENERALA. Warranty all actuators for a period of five years from the production date

as stated in the Terms and Conditions of Sale and Warranty. B. Electronic valve and damper actuators shall be as manufactured, brand

labeled, or distributed by Belimo.C. Electronic control valves, as specified, shall be Belimo or other brands

manufactured, brand labeled or distributed by Belimo.D. Other manufacturers must be approved, in writing, 10 days prior to the

bid date.

II. PRODUCTSA. Electronic Damper Actuators1. Electronic actuators, less than 600 in-lb. of rated torque, shall have ISO

9001 quality certification and be UL listed under standard 873, CSAC22.2 No. 24 and have CE certification.

2. Electronic actuators used on valves or dampers shall be designed todirectly couple and mount to a stem, shaft or ISO style-mounting pad.Actuator mounting clamps shall be a V-bolt with a toothed V-clamp cre-ating a cold weld, positive grip effect. Single point, bolt, or single screwactuator type fastening techniques or direct-coupled actuators requiringfield assembly of the universal clamp is not acceptable.

3. Actuators shall be fully modulating/proportional, pulse width, floating/tri-state, or two position as required and be factory or field selectable.Actuators shall have visual position indicators and shall operate insequence with other devices if required.

4. Optional auxiliary switches shall be available. 5. Actuators shall have an operating range of –22° to 122°F. 6. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mA input signal

and provide a 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA (with a load resistor) operatingrange.

7. Actuators shall be capable of operating on 24, 120 or 230VAC, or24VDC and Class 2 wiring as dictated by the application. Power con-sumption shall not exceed 10 VA for AC, including 120VAC actuators,and 8 watts per actuator for DC applications.

8. NEMA 2 rated actuators shall be provided with a three foot (minimum),pre-wired, electrical cable. Actuators requiring removal of the actuatorcover for access to wiring terminals, exposing electronic, printed circuitboards to damage, are unacceptable.

9. Actuators shall have electronic overload protection or digital rotationsensing circuitry to prevent actuator damage throughout the entire rota-tion. End switches to deactivate the actuator at the end of rotation ormagnetic clutches are not acceptable.

10. For power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical springreturn mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. Spring returnactuators shall be capable of CW or CCW mounting orientation. Springreturn models > 60 in-lbs. will be capable of mounting on shafts up to1.05” in diameter. Spring return actuators with more than 60 in-lb. oftorque shall have a metal, manual override crank.

11. Actuators using “on-board” chemical storage systems, capacitors, orother “on-board” non-mechanical forms of fail-safe operation are unac-ceptable.

12. Upon loss of control signal, a proportional actuator shall fail open orclosed based on the minimum control signal. Upon loss of power, anon-spring return actuator shall maintain the last position.

13. Actuators shall be capable of being mechanically and electrically paral-leled to increase torque if required. Valves and dampers requiringgreater torque or higher close off may be assembled with multiple lowtorque actuators.

14. Dual mounted actuators using additional anti-rotation strap mechanicallinkages, or special factory wiring to function are not acceptable.Actuators in a tandem pair must be "off the shelf," standard actuatorsready for field wiring.

15. Damper and valve actuators will not produce more than 62 dB (A) whenfurnished with a mechanical fail-safe spring. Non-spring return actuatorsshall conform to a maximum noise rating of 45 dB(A) with power on or inthe running or driving mode.

16. Proportional actuators shall be fully programmable. Control input, posi-tion feedback and running time shall be factory or field programmable.Diagnostic feedback shall provide indications of hunting or oscillation,mechanical overload, mechanical travel and mechanical load limit. Theactuators shall also provide actuator service data, at minimum, numberof hours powered and number of hours in motion.

17. Proportional actuators shall be capable of digital communication, as built.

B. Electronic Valve Actuators1. Electronic actuators, less than 600 in-lb. of rated torque, shall have ISO

9001 quality certification and be UL listed under standard 873, CSAC22.2 No. 24 and have CE certification.

2. Electronic actuators used on valves shall be designed to directly coupleand mount to a stem, shaft or ISO style-mounting pad.

3. Actuators shall be fully modulating/proportional, pulse width, floating/tri-state, or two position as required and be factory or field selectable.Actuators shall have visual position indicators and shall operate insequence with other devices if required.

4. Optional auxiliary switches shall be available. 5. Actuators shall have an operating range of –22° to 122°F except NR

series with range of -22° to 160°F. 6. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mA input signal

and provide a 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA (with a load resistor) operatingrange.

7. Actuators shall be capable of operating on 24, 120 or 230VAC, or24VDC and Class 2 wiring as dictated by the application. Power con-sumption shall not exceed 10 VA for AC, including 120VAC actuators,and 8 watts per actuator for DC applications.

8. NEMA 2 rated actuators shall be provided with a three foot (minimum),pre-wired, electrical cable. Actuators requiring removal of the actuatorcover for access to wiring terminals, exposing electronic, printed circuitboards to damage, are unacceptable.

9. For power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical springreturn mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. Spring returnactuators shall be capable of CW or CCW mounting orientation. Springreturn actuators with more than 60 in-lb. of torque shall have a metal,manual override crank.

10. Actuators using “on-board” chemical storage systems, capacitors, orother “on-board” non-mechanical forms of fail-safe operation are unac-ceptable.

11. Upon loss of control signal, a proportional actuator shall fail open orclosed based on the minimum control signal. Upon loss of power, anon-spring return actuator shall maintain the last position.

12. Actuators shall be capable of being mechanically and electrically paral-leled to increase torque if required. Valves requiring greater torque orhigher close off may be assembled with multiple low torque actuators.

13. Dual mounted actuators using additional anti-rotation strap mechanicallinkages, or special factory wiring to function are not acceptable.Actuators in a tandem pair must be "off the shelf," standard actuatorsready for field wiring.

14. Valve actuators will not produce more than 62 dB (A) when furnishedwith a mechanical fail-safe spring. Non-spring return actuators shall con-form to a maximum noise rating of 45 dB(A) with power on or in the run-ning or driving mode.

15. Proportional actuators shall be fully programmable. Control input, posi-tion feedback and running time shall be factory or field programmable.Diagnostic feedback shall provide indications of hunting or oscillation,mechanical overload, mechanical travel and mechanical load limit. Theactuators shall also provide actuator service data, at minimum, numberof hours powered and number of hours in motion.

16. Proportional actuators shall be capable of digital communication, as built.

®

191

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

® Actuator/Valve Specification

C. Industrial Actuators1. Belimo SY Series Industrial Electric Actuators

a. The valve actuator shall consist of a thermally protected capacitor-type reversible electric motor, a patented planetary worm combina-tion drive, heater, limit switches and wiring termination blocks, allcontained in a die cast aluminum enclosure. The drive system willprovide continuous, smooth torque transmission throughout a 90degree travel. Adjustable stops provide mechanical adjustment ofend-of-travel. The transmission shall allow continuous duty operationof a manual override handwheel without the need to remove power,or de-clutch the manual system.

b. Enclosure shall be designed to meet NEMA 4, 4X (weatherproof)requirements, or CSA approved for non-hazardous locations.

c. The actuator shall employ ISO5211 mounting standards to providefor a wide range of international applications.

d. The enclosure will have an industrial quality coating.e. Actuator shall have a motor rated for a minimum of 25% duty cycle

in modulating applications.f. Actuator shall be suitable for operation in ambient temperature rang-

ing from 22°F to +150°F [-5°C to +65°C].g. The motor shall be fractional horsepower; permanent split capacitor

type designed to operate on 24 VAC, 110 VAC or 220 VAC, 1 pH,50/60 Hz supply. A self resetting thermal switch shall be imbedded inthe motor for overload protection.

h. Internal terminal blocks shall be clearly marked for field wiring. Awiring diagram shall be permanently attached to the OUTSIDE of theactuator housing.

i. Actuator will have a suitable sized NPT entry for external connections.j. Gears shall be hardened alloy steel, permanently lubricated. The

worm drive system negates the need for a brake. k. Two adjustable cam actuated end travel limit switches shall be pro-

vided to control electrical movement of the actuator. l. 2 SPDT auxiliary switches, rated 10A at 250 VAC shall be included.

The switches are factory pre-set at 3 degrees and 87 degrees rota-tion, and may be field adjusted.

m. Actuator shall be equipped with a hand wheel or shaft for manualoverride to permit operation of the actuator in the event of electricalpower failure or system malfunction. Hand wheel, where applicable,must be permanently attached to the actuator. (SY2 and larger)

n. The handwheel override shall be continuously operational regardlessof the powered state of the actuator, without the need to removeelectrical power if present during the override phase. (SY2 and larger)

o. The hand wheel will not rotate while the actuator is electrically driven.

p. The actuator shall provide a visual indicator beacon on the top of thehousing for position status of the actuator and attached devices.

q. Actuator shall have an internal heater and thermostat to minimizethe build-up of moisture inside the sealed enclosure.

r. Modulating units shall operate under 2-10 VDC, 4-20mA, and 1-5VDC control modes. The default shall be 2-10 VDC control.

2. Industrial Type Actuators (Manufactured by RCS) For Butterfly Valvesa. The valve actuator shall consist of a capacitor-type reversible electric

motor, gear train, limit switches and terminal block, all contained in adie cast aluminum enclosure.

b. Enclosure shall be designed to meet NEMA 4 (weatherproof)requirements, or CSA approved for non-hazardous or hazardouslocations.

c. Output shaft shall be electroless nickel plated to prevent corrosion.d. The enclosure will have an industrial quality coating.e. Actuator shall have a motor rated for continuous duty.f. Actuator shall be suitable for operation in ambient temperature rang-

ing from -22°F to +150°F [-30°C to +65°C].g. The motor shall be fractional horsepower; permanent split capacitor

type designed to operate on a 120 VAC, 1 pH, 60 Hz supply. A selfresetting thermal switch shall be imbedded in the motor for overloadprotection.

h. A 6 ft wiring harness shall be provided for ease in field wiring (Above 1500 in-lbs).

i. Actuator will have a suitable sized NPT entry for external connections.

j. Reduction gearing shall be designed to withstand the actual motorstall torque.

k. Gears shall be hardened alloy steel, permanently lubricated. A self-locking gear assembly or a brake shall be supplied.

l. Two adjustable cam actuated end travel limit switches shall be pro-vided to control direction of travel.

m. 2 SPDT auxiliary switches, rated at 250 VAC shall be included.n. Actuator shall be equipped with a hand wheel or shaft for manual

override to permit operation of the valve in the event of electricalpower failure or system malfunction. Hand wheel, where applicable,must be permanently attached to the actuator.

o. When in manual operation electrical power to the actuator will bepermanently interrupted.

p. The hand wheel will not rotate while the actuator is electrically driven.

q. Actuator shall have heater and thermostat to minimize condensationwithin the actuator housing.

r. Modulating units shall include programmable card capable of 0-10VDC, 2-10 VDC, 4-20mA, and 1-5 VDC default settings.

D. Electronic Control Valves1. General

a. The manufacturer shall be capable of providing individual valve iden-tification tagging on each printed valve label. Valve tag identificationshall be documented on the approved, submitted valve schedule.

b. Valve actuator(s) shall provide the minimum torque, based on themanufacturers’ calculations, required for the rated valve close off.

2. Zone Valvesa. Zone valves, as specified, shall be by Belimo. b. Zone valves with brass bodies shall be used in terminal unit water

applications where sizing or physical limitations prohibit the use ofcharacterized control valves, or in terminal equipment, where watersizing dictates a 2 or Three-way, diverting electronic control valve3/4” or smaller.

c. Zone valve actuators shall have a minimum of 30 psi close-off rating.

3. Characterized Control Valves™a. Control valves shall be of the Characterized Control Valve™ type

provided by Belimo. b. Characterized Control Valves™ shall be used for all water applica-

tions where sizing permits. c. A TEFZEL‚ flow-characterizing disc shall be installed in the inlet of

Two-way characterized control valves and in the control port ofThree-way valves. The valve trim shall utilize a stainless steel balland stem for all water or glycol solutions up to 60%. For water appli-cations, an optional chrome plated brass ball and brass stem can beused.

d. Valve bodies shall be nickel-plated, forged brass with female NPTthreads. Bodies to 1-1/4” shall be rated at 600 psi and sizes 1-1/2”to 3” at 400 psi.

e. Characterized Control Valves™ shall have a self-aligning, blowoutproof, brass stem with a dual EPDM O-ring packing design.Fiberglass reinforced Teflon seats shall be used.

f. The valves shall have a four bolt mounting flange to provide a 4position, field changeable, electronic actuator mounting arrange-ment.

g. A non-metallic coupling, constructed of high temperature, continualuse material shall provide a direct, mechanical connection betweenthe valve body and actuator. The coupling shall be designed to pro-vide thermal isolation and eliminate lateral and rotational stemforces. Vent hole shall be provided to reduce condensation build-up.

®

192

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Actuator/Valve Specification ®

4. Globe Valves:a. Globe valves, as specified, shall be by Belimo. b. Two-way and Three-way globe valves may be used only if charac-

terized control valves do not fit the sizing criteria or application. c. Globe valves may be used for chilled or hot water, steam, or glycol

solutions to 60%. Screwed and flanged water valves shall haveequal percentage or linear flow characteristics for Two-way or Three-way valves, respectively. All stems shall be stainless steel.

d. Screwed globe valves 1/2” through 2” shall have bronze bodies ratedat ANSI Class 250. For water or steam up to 35 psi, trim shallinclude a brass plug, a spring-loaded TFE packing, and a bronzeseat. The maximum differential shall be 35 psi for water and 20 psifor steam.

e. Two-way and Three-way flanged globe valves 2-1/2” to 6” shall havecast iron bodies rated for ANSI Class 125 or ANSI 250. The maxi-mum differential shall be 25 psi for water and 10 psi for steam. Trimshall include stainless steel stems, bronze plugs, bronze seats, anda TFE V-ring packing.

f. For steam inlet pressures higher than those stated above, furnishglobe valves with stainless steel trim specifically rated for the appli-cation.

5. Direct Coupled Globe Valve Actuator and Adaptor Bracket:a. Actuator shall be designed with an integrated adaptor bracket that

will direct mount to the valve. b. Actuator shall provide a linear force capable of fulfilling the required

close-off of the valve. c. Actuator shall include an automatic valve coupling device that shall

lock securely to the valve stem. d. Proportional and spring return actuators shall adapt upon powering

the actuator. This adaptation will determine stroke length andenable the actuator to set the minimum and maximum limits of thesupplied control signal, thereby utilizing the entire control signalrange. Feedback, running time and other parameters are automati-cally adjusted to the effective stroke.

e. Actuator shall have a manual override equipped with an interlockingdevice to protect the actuator from over-torque of the manual override.

6. Butterfly Valvesa. Butterfly valves, as specified, shall be by Belimo.b. Butterfly valves 2” to 12” shall have a fully lugged, drilled and tapped,

cast iron body, rated to 200 psi body pressure, with 14” and largervalves having a body pressure rating of 150 psi. Flanges shall meetANSI 125/150 standards. The one-piece body shall feature anextended neck allowing sufficient clearance for flanges and 2” of pip-ing insulation. The disc shall be stainless steel and provide bi-direc-tional bubble-tight close off in either direction for water or 60% glycolapplications. The disc shall be polished and contoured to minimizetorque and wear. The flow characteristic shall be modified equal per-centage for Two-way valves and linear for Three-way valves. Valves2” through 12” shall be rated for standard HVAC service of up to 50psi close-off, or for heavy commercial service of up to 200 psi close-off. Valves 14” and larger shall be rated for up to 150 psi close-off.

c. The disc shall have full 360-degree concentric seating. Valves upthrough 12” shall utilize an internal spline for the disc-to-stem con-nection. External mechanical methods to achieve this mechanicalconnection, such as pins or screws, shall not be employed. Valves14” and larger will utilize a dual-pin method to prevent the heavy discfrom settling onto the liner, causing distortion. A phenolic backed,non-collapsing, EPDM seat shall be field replaceable and shall cre-ate a positive seal between flange face and valve body. No gasketsshall be required between the valve and flange faces. The shaft shallbe supported at four locations by RPTFE bushings.

d. Butterfly valves may be used in all two-position applications andmodulating applications larger than 2”, or where the close off ratingof other valve styles does not meet the design requirements.

e. Butterfly valves shall be sized primarily by using velocity calculationsto prevent fluid velocities from exceeding 12 feet per second. Formodulating applications, CV factors at sixty (60) degrees shall beused for determining delta P once size has been determined by thevelocity calculations.

f. High torque industrial valve actuators, >300 in-lb. of rated torque,may be used where low torque actuators are not suitable. Hightorque actuators shall be as manufactured or provided by Belimo.

193

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.Terms and Conditions of Sale and Warranty

I . GENERALUntil otherwise arranged, in writing, the following conditionsare valid. The Seller as referred to in the terms of sale isBelimo Aircontrols (USA) Inc. or Belimo Aircontrols (CAN) Inc.

II. PRICE1. Our prices are net, FOB Point of Origin in US currency

for sales made by Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. andCAN currency for sales made by Belimo Aircontrols(CAN) Inc.

2. Freight and packaging (wooden crates, pallets etc) willbe charged at cost for each shipment.

3. Orders with a net value of less than US$300 (CAN$450)will be subject to a US$20 (CAN$35) handling fee.

4. No handling fee will be applied to orders placed throughthe Belimo Internet ordering system (www.belimo.com).

5. We reserve the right to make partial deliveries which canbe invoiced separately.

6. Wiring diagrams, installation, and commissioning are notincluded in our prices.

III. PAYMENT1. Invoices are payable in US currency for sales made by

Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. and in CAN currency forsales made by Belimo Aircontrols (CAN) Inc. within 30 days from the date of invoice without any deductions.

2. Accounts with balances exceeding 60 days will be subject to an interest charge of 2% per month.

3. Accounts with balances exceeding 45 days will be subject to restricted shipments or COD status.

IV. TITLETitle in and property to the goods shall not pass to the Buyeruntil the Seller has received payment in full.

V. DAMAGE OR LOSS IN TRANSITSeller assumes no liability for damage or loss of shipment.All shipments should be unpacked and examined immedi-ately upon receipt. Any external evidence or loss or dam-age must be noted on the freight bill or carrier’s receipt andsigned by the carrier’s agent at the time of delivery. Failureto do so will result in the carrier’s refusal to honor the claim.Buyer then should notify Seller with copy of freight bill ordamage report so that Seller then can file claim for loss ordamage in transit with the carrier. If damage does notbecome apparent until shipment is unpacked, customermust make a request for inspection by the carrier’s agentand file with the carrier within 15 days after receipt of prod-uct and notify Seller. Seller is not liable for consequentialdamages resulting from the installation of damaged product.

VI. DELIVERY We undertake to make every attempt to adhere to our deliv-ery promise(s), but do not accept cancellation of contract orliability for any direct or indirect losses which may arise, forany reason whatsoever, due to our failure to adhere to suchpromise(s).

VII. RETURN OF GOODS1. Goods received by the Buyer cannot be returned unless

previously agreed upon with Seller. Buyer must acquireReturn Material Authorization (RMA) number fromBelimo prior to return of the goods. At this time, Buyerwill also receive instructions to where product is to bereturned. Only products returned to proper location withRMA number will be considered for credit.

2. Only goods in original packaging can be accepted.Goods returned must be in condition for resale as newequipment to qualify for credit. A minimum restockingcharge of 10% for actuators and 15% for valve productsand valve assemblies of the invoice value will be applied.Return material must be shipped prepaid.

3. Returns resulting from errors by the Seller will not besubject to re-stocking charges.

VIII. WARRANTY1. Belimo offers a five-year warranty for product listed in

our literature and shipped after May 1, 2000 for productshipped to locations within the USA and Canada. Someproducts may carry less than a 5-year warranty. Pleasesee documentation for specific reference to productswith a warranty of less than five years.

2. The Belimo warranty is unconditional for the first twoyears from the date of production. For the followingthree years, a conditional warranty applies. Under thisconditional warranty, the consequences of ordinary wearand tear, damage due to negligence or improper use, orother causes beyond our control are excluded from war-ranty coverage. Product specific terms of warranty withregard to warranty period or conditions of warranty mayapply to certain specified products as stated in the doc-umentation for those products.

3. The warranty shall be null and void should the Buyer or anyother persons modify or repair any part of our equipment.

4. Buyer must acquire a Return Material Authorization (RMA)number from Belimo prior to receiving warranty replace-ment or credit for product. Product return is not required inall cases to complete the warranty process. Ask ourCustomer Service department for detailed information.

5. Products found to be defective for which warranty isapplicable will be replaced or repaired at Seller’s discre-tion. Seller is not responsible for charges resulting fromthe removal and/or replacement of product.

IX. NONSTOCK AND NONCATALOG ITEMSProducts not listed in the current price list or catalogs areconsidered to be special order items and subject to mini-mum order quantities, special handling charges, and/orother conditions stipulated to us by suppliers. Such itemsnormally are subject to longer delivery times. Special orderitems may carry cancellation charges once an order isplaced and may also be subject to a restricted return policy.

X. PROPER LAW AND JURISDICTIONFor sales made by Belimo Aircontrols (USA) Inc., this con-tract is and shall be deemed to have been made in theUnited States, shall in all respects be governed by the lawsof the State of CT. For sales made by Belimo Aircontrols(CAN) Inc., this contract is and shall be deemed to havebeen made in Canada, shall in all respects be governed bythe laws of the Province of Ontario.

®

194

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Discontinued Products ®

Discontinued Correct Replacement Page

Spring Return

Airside onlyAF24-3 US AFR24-3 US 14AF24-3-S US AFR24-3-S US 14AF24-SR-S US AF24-MFT-S US *AF24-SR95 US AF24-MFT95 US *AF24-PWM US AF24-MFT US + P-20… *FM24 US AFR24 US 10FM24-SR US AFR24-SR US 16FM24-SR90 US AF24-MFT95 US *FM24-SR95 US AF24-MFT95 US *FS24 AF24 US 10FS24-S AF24-S US 10LF24-SR-MP US LF24-MFT-20 US *LF24-SR-S-MP US LF24-MFT-S-20 US *SF120 US AFR120 US 12SF120-S US AF120-S US 12SF24 US AFR24 US 10SF24-S US AF24-S US 10

*Please review our MFT Product Documentation for more information.

Discontinued Correct Replacement Page

Non-Spring Return

AM24-S US AM24 US w/SA1 US or SA2 US 82AM24-PWM-A US AM24-MFT US + P-20002 *AM24-PWM-B US AM24-MFT US + P-20003 *AM24-PWM-C US AM24-MFT US + P-20001 *AM24-SRS-A US AM24-MFT US + P-10004 *AM24-SRS-B US AM24-MFT US + P-10005 *AM24-SRS-C US AM24-MFT US + P-10006 *KM24 LM24-3 US 114KM24-3 LM24-3 US 114KM24-SL LM24-SR-2.0 US 116KM24-SR LM24-SR-2.0 US 116LM24-SR US LM24-SR-2.0 US 116LM24-SR-T US LM24-SR-T-2.0 US 116NM24-1 US NM24 US 100NM24 EU NM24 US 100NM24-1/200 US NM24 US 100NM24-1/300 US NM24 US 100NM24-SRS US NM24-MFT US + P-10… *NM24-PWM US NM24-MFT US + P-20… *NMV24-D US NMV-D2M US, contact Belimo for supportNMV24-V US NMV-D2M US, contact Belimo for supportSM24 US AM24 US 82SM24-SR US AM24-MFT US *SM24-SRS US AM24-MFT US + P-10… *SM24-SR94 US AM24-MFT95 US *

Replacement of discontinued Belimo products

When replacing an actuator, whether Belimo or other, be sure toconsider the application parameters before selecting the replace-ment. The new product may not be the best fit for the applica-tion.An example would be an existing SM24-SR US mounted to avalve linkage. The direct replacement of the actuator is the

AM24-MFT US. However the SM… and AM… are differentlengths, the linkage would need to be replaced as well. Whenretrofitting or replacing actuators, it is always best to select thenew product based on application parameters. This ensures theselected actuator is fit for the application. Never only use a partnumber cross-reference when replacing defective actuators.

195

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.Belimo Platinum Distributors®

USA

Aireco Supply9120 Washington Blvd.Savage, MD 20763-0414Phone: 301-953-8800With branch in VA

Amcon Controls, Inc.11906 WarfieldSan Antonio,TX 78216Phone: 210-349-6161

Applied Automation3186 South Washington Street, #230Salt Lake City, UT 84115Phone: 801-486-6454

Boston Aircontrols, Inc.1 Garfield CircleBurlington, MA 01803Phone: 781-272-5800

Charles D. Jones Co.445 Bryant Street, Unit #1Denver, CO. 80204-4800Phone: 800-777-0910With branches in CO, MO

Climatic Control Co., Inc.5061 W. State StreetMilwaukee, WI 53208Phone: 800-242-1656

Cochrane Supply and Engineering, Inc.30303 Stephenson HighwayMadison Heights, MI 48071-1633Phone: 800-482-4894

Columbus Temperature Control1053 E. 5th Ave.Columbus, OH 43201Phone: 800-364-9600

Control Consultants & Supply Co.2330 Hampton AvenueSt. Louis, MO 63139-2909Phone: 314-647-6680With branch in TN

Controlco5600 Imhoff Drive, Ste. GConcord, CA 94520Phone: 925-602-7728With branches in CA

G & O Thermal Supply5435 N. Northwest HighwayChicago, IL 60630Phone: 773-763-1300

Industrial Controls Distributors LLC1776 Bloomsbury AvenueWanamassa, NJ 07712Phone: 800-631-2112With branches in NY, PA

Interstate Electric Equipment30 Vineland St.Brighton, MA 02135 Phone: 617-782-9000

M & M Controls9E West Aylesbury RoadTimonium, MD 21093Phone: 410-252-1221

MICONTROLS, Inc.6516 5th Place SouthSeattle, WA 98124Phone: 800-877-8026With branches in WA, OR

Minvalco, Inc.3340 Gorham AvenueMinneapolis, MN 55426-4267Phone: 952-920-0131

RSD/Total Control26021 Atlantic Ocean Dr.Lake Forest, CA 92630Phone: 949-380-7878With branches in CA, NV, OR, AK, AZ, ID, UT, WA

South Side Control Supply, Co. 488 N. Milwaukee AvenueChicago, IL 60610-3923Phone: 312-226-4900With branches in IL, IN

Stromquist and Company4620 Atlanta Rd.Smyrna, GA 30080Phone: 404-794-3440With branch in FL

Temperature Control Systems10315 Brockwood RoadDallas, TX 75238Phone: 214-343-1444With branches: Temperature Controls-Dallas, Climate Control Systems, TulsaControls, Austin Controls.

Tower Equipment Co., Inc.1320 West Broad StreetStratford, CT 06615Phone: 800-346-4647

Twinco Supply Corporation55 Craven StreetHuntington Station, NY 11746-2143Phone: 800-794-3188With branches in NY

CANADA

AirexC - 5 Sandhill Crt.Brampton, ON, L6T 5J5 Phone: 905-790-8667

Baymar Supply Co.3200 Jefferson Blvd.Windsor, ON N8T 2W8Phone: 519-974-5800

Controls Depot#105 2150 Thurston DriveOttawa, ON K1G 5T9 Phone: 613-248-1212 With branches in Scarborough, ON

Cypress Sales2615 Wentz Ave. Saskatoon, SK, S7K 5J1 Phone: 306-242-3333 With branches in Regina

O’Dell Associates Inc.#3 - 1038 Cooke Blvd.Burlington, ON L7T 4A8 Phone: 905-681-3901

Prokontrol1989 MichelinLaval, QC, H7L 5B7 Phone: 450-973-7765 With branches in Ville Vanier andOntario

Refrigerative Supply 3958 Myrtle Street, Burnaby, BC, V5C 4G2 Phone: 604-435-7151 With branches in British Columbia,Alberta, Saskatchewan,Manitoba

Regal Controls 1156 Kingsway Vancouver, BC, V5V 3C8 Phone: 604-879-6357 With branches in Langley

Regulvar Laval1985 Boul Industriel Laval Q.CH7S-1P6Phone: 450-629-0435With branches in Hull, Sherbrooke,St. Hubert, Lachine, Quebec City

Regulvar Ottawa Inc.170 Laurier Ax West Suite 714Ottawa, Ontario, K1P-5V6 Phone: 613-565-2129

Sinclair Supply10914 - 120 StreetEdmonton, AB, T5H 3P7 Phone: 780-452-3110 With branches in British Columbia,Alberta, Saskatchewan

Southern Supplies323 Bloor St. WOshawa, ON, L1J 6X4 Phone: 905-728-6216 With branch in Belleville

SCI3311 Boul Industriel Laval, QC, H7L 4S3 Phone: 450-668-8866

Wiles & Legault#5 - 505 Industriel AvenueOttawa, ON, K1G 0Z1 Phone: 613-747-1867

Yorkland Controls2689 Steeles Avenue, W. Downsview, ON, M3J 2Z8 Phone: 416-661-3306 With branch in Mississauga

For Latin American distributors please call 954-456-8077

®

For information and to place an order, contact the Belimo customer service and technicalsupport office near you, or visit:

www.belimo.com

Belimo and You...

Together to the Top

Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.

43 Old Ridgebury Road 1675 East Prater WayDanbury, CT 06810 Suite 101Toll Free: (800) 543-9038 Sparks, NV 89434(203) 791-9915 Toll Free: (800) 987-9042Fax: (800) 228-8283 (775) 857-4243

(800-ACTUATE) Fax: (775) 857-4255(203) 791-9919 (800) 987-8875

Belimo Servomoteur, Inc.2790 Chemin du LacLongueuil, Québec J4N 1B8Toll Free: (866) 928-1440(450) 928-1440Fax: (450) 928-0050

Belimo Aircontrols (CAN), Inc.

14/16 – 5716 Coopers Ave.Mississauga, Ontario L4Z 2E8Toll Free: (866) 805-7089(905) 712-3118Fax: (905) 712-3124

Belimo in Latin America

1250 E. Hallandale Beach Blvd.Suite 802Hallandale Beach, FL 33009(954) 456-8077 Fax: (954) 456-8092

3151 E. Thomas StreetInverness, FL 34453Toll Free: (888) 829-3166(352) 637-9280Fax: (352) 637-9634

(888) 829-3412

651 South Roselle RoadSchaumburg, IL 60193Toll Free: (877) 833-1647(847) 352-0528Fax: (847) 352-1442

(877) 833-1663

F203

58 /

5 4

3 2

1 -0

1/04

-10M

-IG-S

ubje

ct to

cha

nge.

© B

elim

o Ai

rcon

trols

(USA

), In

c.

Product Documentation Damper Actuators and Accessoriesmidwestbas.com/store/media/pdf/belimo/Belimo_Damper_Actuators... · Product Documentation Damper Actuators and Accessories ...

Documents